Home

ZyXEL VMG5313-B10A/ User's Manual

1. 391 ipo m RN 392 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 14 PART User s Guide Introducing the VMG 1 1 Overview In this guide we refer to all models in the series as the VMG The exact model name is used for explicit references The VMG is a combo WAN DSL Ethernet and 3G in order of priority gateway with VolP capabilities and high speed LAN and WAN access for business users It is equipped with four LAN ports of which port number four can be converted into a WAN port two phone ports that can be connected to make VoIP calls and one USB 2 0 port for file sharing It is backward compatible with ADSL ADSL2 and ADSL2 in case VDSL is not available The VMG is also a wireless access point and is compatible with IEEE 802 11b g n wireless standard The VMG5313 B10A works over the analog telephone system POTS Plain Old Telephone Service The VMG5313 B30A works over ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network or T ISDN UR 2 Only use firmware for your VMG s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your VMG 1 2 Ways to Manage the VMG Use any of the following methods to manage the VMG Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the VMG using a supported web browser TR 069 This is an auto configuration server used to remotely configure your device 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the VMG
2. E 337 Esp Lc e EET 340 TODO PONI ou esci tbt atia pla ed x ER UR A rei uda FER QUA a 345 ij M 353 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 4 Table of Contents Table of Contents pop ia cs fis cc 3 Tople of aN cscs ss 5 a BE aic 15 Chapter 1 Lutuugui 17 Quies E E EEA E E EN E AE E E E A E A ET 17 1 2 Ways to Manage tho VMG essiri T ASE 17 dae Good Habite for Managing mir dee 17 TA Applications for Ihe VMO sisjctssessssasecasernsszesequasaasscaaviasasdenwnd A AA ANN 18 TTNET ACIES saho rre 18 ibd tkg8 c5 000 A danino inn A E i Ea EEEE AEE SOE 19 QR gB2ecsiBGD CI Tr 20 Ta Ihe E BUDOH us iictsen ad eret uo riv te YT cba acacia aE a 21 ESSI 2 00 o 22 18 1 Usmg ihe WkFiand PAs MN T m iaa 22 Chapter 2 bi Eo 105 0 sn o aa E a i A 23 FADE TUI o TT NT 23 2 T Pocessing Ne Web COTIKGEEOE 6c oto GUY RERO SUA NRDERO URN CDUGRG pA ROGA GO RIO EH DU Fea S dE 23 Cox viso er ire Mis eU Mte 25 2 2 EG n a mdosemtebeenleneleee 25 Para WINN LO E 26 PA vac a NR I mre A E E N SU 27 Chapter 3 sols lo sa E a i S A 33 CAES 17 c TNT 33 REPAS Mer LES E Is aiaa T D LO 33 Chapter 4 TMQ AIS iis iicsssi
3. LAYER 2 INTERFACE INTERNET CONNECTION DSL LINK CONNECTION TYPE MODE ENCAPSULATION CONNECTION SETTINGS ADSL VDSL N A Routing PPPoE PPP information IPv4 IPv6 IP over PTM address routing feature DNS server VLAN QoS and MTU PoE IPv4 IPv6 IP address routing feature DNS server VLAN QoS and MTU Bridge N A VLAN and QoS VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 79 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 6 WAN Setup Overview LAYER 2 INTERFACE INTERNET CONNECTION DSL LINK CONNECTION TYPE MODE ENCAPSULATION CONNECTION SETTINGS ADSL over ATM EoA Routing PPPoE PPPOA ATM PVC configuration PPP information IPv4 IPv6 IP address routing feature DNS server VLAN QoS and MTU IPoE IPoA ATM PVC configuration IPv4 IPv6 IP address routing feature DNS server VLAN QoS and MTU Bridge N A ATM PVC configuration and QoS Ethernet N A Routing IPoE PPPoE PPP information IPv4 IPv6 IP address routing feature DNS server VLAN QoS and MTU Bridge N A VLAN and QoS 6 1 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the VMG which makes it accessible from an outside network It is used by the VMG to communicate with other devices in other networks It can be static fixed or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the VMG tries to access the Internet If your ISP assig
4. 100 Trying 4 180 Ringing ee 180 Ringing 4 4 180 Ringing 2000K 4 2000K 2000K ACK RTP o RTP 4 E BYE 200 OK E User Agent 1 sends a SIP INVITE request to Proxy 1 This message is an invitation to User Agent 2 to participate in a SIP telephone call Proxy 1 sends a response indicating that it is trying to complete the request Proxy 1 sends a SIP INVITE request to Proxy 2 Proxy 2 sends a response indicating that it is trying to complete the request Proxy 2 sends a SIP INVITE request to User Agent 2 User Agent 2 sends a response back to Proxy 2 indicating that the phone is ringing The response is relayed back to User Agent 1 via Proxy 1 User Agent 2 sends an OK response to Proxy 2 after the call is answered This is also relayed back to User Agent 1 via Proxy 1 User Agent 1 and User Agent 2 exchange RTP packets containing voice data directly without involving the proxies When User Agent 2 hangs up he sends a BYE request User Agent 1 replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request and the call is terminated Voice Coding A codec coder decoder codes analog voice signals into digital signals and decodes the digital signals back into analog voice signals The VMG supports the following codecs G 711 is a Pulse Code Modulation PCM wav
5. The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Network Setting gt Broadband gt 802 1x Edit Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate the authentication Select this to enable the authentication Clear this to disable this authentication without having to delete the entry Interface Select an interface to which the authentication applies EAP Identity Enter the EAP identity of the authentication EAP method This is the EAP method used for this authentication Enable Select this to allow bidirectional authentication Bidirectional Certificate Select the certificate you want to assign to the authentication You need to import the certificate in the Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates screen Trusted CA Select the Trusted CA you want to assign to the authentication You need to import the certificate in the Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 6 6 Ethernet WAN Use the Ethernet WAN screen to convert LAN port number four as a WAN port and to restore it back from a WAN to a LAN port for Ethernet Internet access VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 99 Chapter 6 Broadband It s not enough to just enable LAN 4 as a WAN connection here You must also go to Network Setting gt Broadband gt
6. v Security Mode WPA2 PSK v Generate password automatically Enter 8 63 characters a z A Z 0 9 and other characters are not allowed Password 432D54BEE9 less 8C WPA PSK Compatible Enable Disable Encryption TKIP AES v 1800 sec Group Key Update Timer The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 PSK LABEL Security Level DESCRIPTION Select More Secure to enable WPA 2 PSK data encryption Security Mode Generate password automatically Select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the drop down list box Select this option to have the VMG automatically generate a password The password field will not be configurable when you select this option Password The encryption mechanisms used for WPA 2 and WPA 2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA 2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials If you did not select Generate password automatically you can manually type a pre shared key from 8 to 64 case sensitive keyboard characters more less Click more to show more fields in this section Click less to hide them WPA PSK This field appears when you choose WPA PSK2 as the Security Mode Compatible Check this field to allow wireless devices using WPA PSK security mode to connect to your VMG The VMG supports WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK simultaneously VMG53
7. HTTPS Enable x Enable Enable 443 HTTP Enable Y Enable Enable 80 TELNET Y Enable Enable Enable 23 FTP Enable Enable Enable 21 88H Y Enable Enable Enable 22 Certificate HTTPS Certificate Apply Cancel VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 315 Chapter 30 Remote Management The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 134 Maintenance gt Remote MGMT LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN Interface Select Any WAN to have the VMG automatically activate the remote management service used for when any WAN connection is up services Select Multi WAN and then select one or more WAN connections to have the VMG activate the remote management service when the selected WAN connections are up HTTP This is the service you may use to access the VMG LAN WLAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the VMG from the LAN WLAN WAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the VMG from all WAN connections Trust Domain If you only want certain WAN connections to have access to to the VMG using the corresponding services then clear WAN select Trust Domain and configure the allowed IP address es in the Trust Domain screen Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that
8. Beacon Interval fi 00 ms DTIM Interval fi ms 802 11 Mode 802 11b g n Mixed 802 11 Protection Auto Preamble Long Thomas can now use the WPS feature to establish a wireless connection between his notebook and the VMG see Section 4 4 2 on page 42 He can also use the notebook s wireless client to search for the VMG see Section 4 4 3 on page 46 4 4 2 Using WPS This section shows you how to set up a wireless network using WPS It uses the VMG as the AP and ZyXEL NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to the notebook Note The wireless client must be a WPS aware device for example a WPS USB adapter or PCMCIA card VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 42 Chapter 4 Tutorials There are two WPS methods to set up the wireless client settings Push Button Configuration PBC simply press a button This is the easier of the two methods PIN Configuration configure a Personal Identification Number PIN on the VMG A wireless client must also use the same PIN in order to download the wireless network settings from the VMG Push Button Configuration PBC Make sure that your VMG is turned on and your notebook is within the cover range of the wireless signal Make sure that you have installed the wireless client driver and utility in your notebook In the wireless client utility go to the WPS setting page Enable WPS and press the WPS button Start or WPS button Push an
9. LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Type up to 63 ASCII characters not including spaces to identify this certificate Name Common Name Select Auto to have the VMG configure this field automatically Or select Customize to enter it manually Type the IP address in dotted decimal notation domain name or e mail address in the field provided The domain name or e mail address can be up to 63 ASCII characters The domain name or e mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string Organization Name Type up to 63 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs You may use any character including spaces but the VMG drops trailing spaces State Province Name Country Region Name Type up to 32 characters to identify the state or province where the certificate owner is located You may use any character including spaces but the VMG drops trailing spaces Select a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is located Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving After you click Apply the following screen displays to notify you that you need to get the certificate request signed by a Certificate Authority If you already have click Load_ Signed to import the signed certificate into the VMG Otherwise click Back to return to the Local Certificates screen VMG5313 B10A B30A Ser
10. Protocol This is the transport layer protocol Source Port This is the source port number WAN This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this policy Click the Delete icon to remove a policy from the VMG A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the policy VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 159 Chapter 9 Routing 9 4 1 Add Edit Policy Forwarding Click Add new Policy Forward Rule in the Policy Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next to a policy Use this screen to configure the required information for a policy route Figure 64 Policy Forwarding Add Edit Add a New Policy Forward Entry Policy Name Source IP Source Subnet Mask Protocol v Source Port Source MAC WAN VDSL v Add WAN Interface Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Policy Forwarding Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Policy Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 8 printable English keyboard characters not including spaces Source IP Enter the source IP address Source Subnet Enter the source subnet mask address Mask Protocol Select the transport layer protocol TCP or UDP Source Port Enter the source port number Source MAC Enter the source MAC address WAN Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent You mus
11. R T 130 nuuc e TO Ae H 131 FAQS Wireless Distiibution System WDS aazizeqdeiviesvieqirbeeniuur certi euren dud eee rEM IDEE EEPIANE 131 7 10 9 WiFi Protected Setup VES iussisse iceteiseese ruth mene ra eor Pie a Fat evene Lb Fixe E Tob HER HE vL etd dg ipai 131 Chapter 8 gea aa aae E A E ABE RERR DURAREKI D DER IK SE EA i 139 B T OQ VIN EONI IEA da DUO von ene bar fusing Qd ooo AE NAR Elda dud E EAEE EA A du Fa A Dd DU Road rU 139 SAC What xou Can Do inm this Chapter s ees ccis opa cixd eb o RR ee Rea FU Up RR cx Ert a baa de ionini eui goes 139 e T 2 bat You Need TO IBIDW usce o a eae E ERE Ra ta o det ont c ac b a xt ah 140 9 1 9 BeOS TOU BON apres reU eine ERE Peu biete E toned am bbs Feu viv coda Eee enn ED DID RR 141 6 2 WHE LAN Senp Coree queccustenscstui teer bekedi sects enie EAE aE a eiia 141 mo menie BHC R SCIBERRAS E EEE 144 58 4 The LPRP SCEO arrene RE 146 84 1 Turning On UPnP in Windows 7 Example 4 x ceased t bts laine 147 Bo Ihe Additional Subnet SOFGG auos ien iadan aaa Shiau shunts aaa a aa a aana Crea i a a R 148 eu Ihe STB Vendor ID SIGN iirrainn i eE a LEX PED a rea 150 SF The Waken LAN Screen ariani oE aN A NAE AA EO 150 8 8 The TFTP Server Name SOPSSl ci siccacisiccoexcayicciuccsarcecoreeiaserudaqarisecernneysecanuceu RHU PSU REEKUI TERRA FRUTA ERE 151 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 7 Table of Contents CENE eripe T TI TETTE 152 8 9 1 LANS WANS a
12. 7 10 Technical Reference This section discusses wireless LANs in depth For more information see Appendix E on page 375 7 10 1 Wireless Network Overview Wireless networks consist of wireless clients access points and bridges A wireless client is a radio connected to a user s computer An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients extending a network s range Traditionally a wireless network operates in one of two ways An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients The wireless clients connect to the access points An ad hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 125 Chapter 7 Wireless The following figure provides an example of a wireless network Figure 41 Example of a Wireless Network tame T DETS Tn r H 1 4 AP 2 i 4 H 3 i H 1 1 1 1 1 4 he 2 s A B o eonnmunes The wireless network is the part in the blue circle In this wireless network devices A and B use the access point AP to interact with the other devices such
13. Add new rule v s Rule Name Day SUN MON U TUE U WED U THU FRIU SAT Time of Day Range From To hh mm Description Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 93 Scheduler Rule Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Rule Name Enter a name up to 31 printable English keyboard characters not including spaces for this schedule Day Select check boxes for the days that you want the VMG to perform this scheduler rule Time if Day Enter the time period of each day in 24 hour format during which the rule will be enforced Range Description Enter a description for this scheduler rule Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 242 Certificates 21 1 Overview The VMG can use certificates also called digital IDs to authenticate users Certificates are based on public private key pairs A certificate contains the certificate owner s identity and public key Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication 21 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Local Certificates screen lets you generate certification requests and import the VMG s CA signed certificates Section 21 4 on page 247 The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the VMG Section 21 4 on page 247 21 2 What You Need to Know
14. The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Network Setting gt Broadband LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New WAN Click this button to create a new connection Interface This is the index number of the entry Name This is the service name of the connection Type This shows whether it is an ATM Ethernet or a PTM connection Mode This shows whether the connection is in routing or bridge mode Encapsulation This is the method of encapsulation used by this connection 802 1p This indicates the 802 1p priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection This displays N A when there is no priority level assigned 802 1q This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection This displays N A when there is no VLAN ID number assigned IGMP Proxy This shows whether the VMG act as an IGMP proxy on this connection NAT This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection Default This shows whether the VMG use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default Gateway gateway IPv6 This shows whether IPv6 is activated or not for this connection IPv6 is not available when the connection uses the bridging service MLD Proxy This shows whether Multicast Listener Discovery MLD is activated or not for this connection MLD is not available when the connection uses the bridging service Modify Click the Edit icon to
15. This is the index number of a DNS route Domain Name This is the host name or domain name of the DNS route entry Interface This is the WAN connection through which the VMG forwards DNS requests for this domain name Subnet Mask This is the subnet mask of the DNS route entry Modify Click the Edit icon to modify the DNS route Click the Delete icon to delete the DNS route VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 157 Chapter 9 Routing 9 3 1 The DNS Route Add Screen You can manually add the VMG s DNS route entry Click Add new DNS Route in the Network Setting Routing DNS Route screen The screen shown next appears Figure 62 DNS Route Add Add new DNS Route x Domain Name Subnet Mask 255 255 255 255 Interface VDSL ppp1 1 v OK Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 DNS Route Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Domain Name Enter the domain name of the DNS route entry Interface Select the WAN connection through which the VMG forwards DNS requests for this domain name Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the DNS route entry OK Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to exit this screen without saving any changes 9 4 The Policy Forwarding Screen Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the VMG takes the shortest path to forward a packet Policy forwarding all
16. Visiting guests will use the Guest group which has a different SSID and password Company A will use the following parameters to set up the wireless network groups COMPANY VIP GUEST SSID Company VIP Guest Security Level More Secure More Secure More Secure Security Mode WPA2 PSK WPA2 PSK WPA2 PSK Pre Shared Key ForCompanyOnly 123456789 guest123 1 Click Network Setting Wireless to open the General screen Use this screen to set up the company s general wireless network group Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 47 Chapter 4 Tutorials Wireless Network Setup Band Wireless Disabled settings are invalid when disabled Channel Auto Current 13 more Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name SSID Max clients 16 Hide SSID i Enhanced Multicast Forwarding Max Upstream Bandwidth Kbps Max Downstream Bandwidth Kbps Notes 1 Max Upstream Bandwidth This field allow user configure the maximum bandwidth of this SSID to WAN 2 Max Downstream Bandwidth This field allow user configure the maximum bandwidth of WAN to this SSID 3 If Max Upstream Downstream Bandwidth is empty the CPE sets the value automatically BSSID CC 5D 4E 00 00 02 E mail notification when the wireless guest visit Enable Email Notification Security Level More Secure SS Recommended Security Mode WPA2 PSK
17. 36 Chapter 4 Tutorials Broadband I E 3GBackup Advanced 802 1x Ethernet WAN You can configure the Internet settings ofthis device Correct configurations build successful Internet connection Add New WAN Interface Enca 8021p 802 1q IGMP NAT Default IPv6 MLD Modify Proxy Proxy Gateway 1 VDSL PTM Routing PPPoE N A NIA Y Y Y N N L8 T 2 lan4 Ether Routing IPoE NIA NIA N Y Y N N i2 4 Next go to Broadband gt Ethernet WAN select Enable and then click Apply Ethernet WAN You can convert your Ethernet LAN 4 port as WAN port or restore the WAN port to LAN part State Disable B Note 1 State Enable the Ethernet Portis WAN Ethernet 2 State Disable the Ethernet Portis LAN Ethernet 3 Please do not connect Ethernet WAN cable and xDSL line atthe same time Cancel 5 After the connection is set up connect LAN port 4 to a broadband router or modem for Internet access Note The DSL Internet connection and the Ethernet Internet connection cannot operate at the same time 4 3 Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection This tutorial shows you how to set up an ADSL Internet connection using the Web Configurator If you connect to the Internet through an ADSL connection use the information from your Internet Service Provider ISP to configure the VMG Be sure to contact your service provider for any information you need to configure the Broadband screens 1 Cli
18. Do the following things regularly to make the VMG more secure and to manage the VMG more effectively Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters Write down the password and put it in a safe place VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 17 Chapter 1 Introducing the VMG Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the VMG to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the VMG You could simply restore your last configuration 1 4 Applications for the VMG Here are some example uses for which the VMG is well suited 1 4 1 Internet Access Your VMG provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack You can have multiple WAN services over one ADSL VDSL or Ethernet connection at the same time However the VMG cannot work in ADSL and VDSL mode simultaneously The ADSL and VDSL lines share the same WAN layer 2 interfaces that you configure in the VMG Refer to Section 6 2 on page 83 for the Network Setting Broadband screen Computers can connect to the VMG s LAN ports or wirelessly VMG5313 B10A
19. Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the entry Click the Delete icon to remove the entry VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 313 Chapter 29 User Account Table 132 Maintenance gt User Account continued continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 29 2 1 The User Account Add Edit Screen Click Add new user or the Edit icom of an existign account in the Maintenance gt User Account to open the following screen Figure 160 Maintenance gt User Account gt Add Edit User Account Edit x UserName john Old Password New Password Verify New Password Retry Times 0 0 5 0 Not limit Idle Timeout 60 Minute s 1 60 Lock Period 15 Minute s 15 90 Group Administrator Y Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 133 Maintenance gt User Account LABEL DESCRIPTION User Name Enter a new name for the This field displays the name of an existing account Old Password Type the default password or the existing password used to access the VMG web configurator New Password Type your new system password up to 256 characters Note that as you type a password the screen displays a for each character you type After you change the password use the new password to access the VMG Verify Password Type the new
20. Properties ZyXEL Connecting the Future 33 minutes Unknown Recorded TV 4 11 3 Using a Digital Media Adapter This section shows you how you can use the VMG with a ZyXEL DMA 2500 to play media files stored in the USB storage device in your TV screen Note For this tutorial your DMA 2500 should already be set up with the TV according to the instructions in the DMA 2500 Quick Start Guide 1 Connect the DMA 2500 to an available LAN port in your VMG VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 63 Chapter 4 Tutorials u USB Storage Device DMA 2500 ZyXEL Device Turn on the TV and wait for the DMA 2500 Home screen to appear Using the remote control go to MyMedia to open the following screen Select the VMG as your media server C 01 VMG 02 TWPC 13262 01 The screen shows you the list of available media files in the USB storage device Select the file you want to open and push the Play button in the remote control CUES 2 ZyXEL Celebration Video 3 ZyXEL Connecting the Future VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 64 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4 12 Using the Print Server Feature The VMG allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN You can do this by connecting a USB printer to one of the USB ports on the VMG and then adding the printer on the computers connected to your network In this section you can Add a New Printer Using
21. After Traffic Policing The VMG supports three incoming traffic metering algorithms Token Bucket Filter TBF Single Rate Two Color Maker srTCM and Two Rate Two Color Marker trTCM You can specify actions VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 164 Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS which are performed on the colored packets See Section 10 7 on page 175 for more information on each metering algorithm 10 3 The Quality of Service General Screen Click Network Setting gt QoS gt General to open the screen as shown next Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth See Section 10 1 on page 163 for more information Figure 66 Network Settings gt QoS gt General QoS Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled WAN Managed Upstream Band width kbps LAN Managed Downstream Band width kbps Upstream traffic priority Assigned by None B Note You can assign the upstream bandwidth manually If the field is empty the CPE sets the value automatically If Enable QoS checkbox is selected choose a default DSCP mark to automatically mark incoming traffic without reference to a particular classifier If the setting of WAN managed upstream bandwidth is greater than current WAN interface linkup rate then the WAN managed upstream bandwidth will become current WAN interface linkup rate Apply Cancet The following table describes the labels in this screen
22. Broadband Tm You can configure the Internet settings ofthis device Correct configurations build successful Internet connection PTM Routing PPPoE NIA 2 Configure the Broadband screen as follows VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 35 Chapter 4 Tutorials General Active Name Type Mode Encapsulation IPv6 IPv4 Mode IP Address DHCP option 60Vendor ID DHCP option 61 IAID DHCP option 61 DUID DHCP option 43 Enable Static IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Routing Feature NAT Enable Fullcone NAT Enable IGMP Proxy Enable Apply as Default Gateway DNS server DNS DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 WAN MAC Address Factory Default Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address Set WAN MAC Address Tunnel Enable BRD BRD Type IPv4 Mask Length 6RD Border Relay Server IP BRD IPv6 Prefix VLAN Active 802 1p 802 1g QoS Rate Limit WAN Outgoing Default Tag DSCP MTU MTU Size v lan4 wan Ethernet Routing IPOE Y IPv4 Only M 8 digit Hex digit Hex 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Dynamic Static Enable Disable DHCP Static ov 0 4094 kbps Enable Disable 0 53 1500 MTU 68 1500 Bridge and Routing mode in the same WAN Enable Con current WAN Apply Cancel 3 The Broadband summary screen then appears as follows VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide
23. Click Network Setting gt Wireless gt WDS The following screen displays VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 120 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 37 Network ais gt Wireless gt WDS This page allows you to set the operating mode of your device to Access Point AP or Wireless Bridge Select Wireless Bridge to disable AP functionality Select Access Point to enable your device to act as an access point while on bridge mode so that other wireless stations are still able to associate with the AP Select Disable in Bridge Restrict to enable any wireless station to establish a wireless bridge connection to the device Select Enable in Bridge Restrict to limit wireless bridge connections only to wireless stations listed in the table 2 4GHz Wireless Bridge Setup AP Mode Access Point v Bridge Restrict Enabled Disabled Remote sili la MAC Address 1 47 s 2 ZW RI 3 40 ail 4 ZW a B Notes 1 The WDS function only works when the security mode is setto No Security WEP WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK 2 The WDS connection security mode is based on the settings configured in the Wireless gt General screen 3 The WDS function only works with the first SSID 4 Ifthe AP mode is Wireless Bridge WPS will be disabled 5 The SSID should be the same in both WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK security modes Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Network Setting gt Wi
24. DiffServ DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCP indicating the level of service VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 290 Chapter 23 Voice 23 10 2 desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Figure 150 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP Unused 6 bit 2 bit The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kin
25. Generate password automatically Enter 8 63 characters a z A Z 0 9 and other characters are not allowed Password ForCompanyOnly more password unmask Appy Cancel Click Network Setting Wireless Guest More AP to open the following screen Click the Edit icon to configure the second wireless network group Guest More AP This device can enable up to 4 wireless networks to work atthe same time Assign a name and a security level if needed to startthe 2nd 3rd and 4th wireless network services Security Guest WLAN 1 9 ZyXEL000001_Guestt Mied WRAZ PSKWPA External Guest Ei 2 ZyXEL000001_Guest2 Med WFATPSKWPA NIA 3 ZyXELOD0001 Guest Wked WEAZ PSKWPA NIA Ei Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 48 Chapter 4 Tutorials Wireless Network Setup Wireless Disabled The settings in this screen are invalid if you select this Passphrase Type None v Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name SSID VIP Max clients 32 Hide SSID Enhanced Multicast Forwarding Z Guest WLAN Access Scenario External Guest Y Max Upstream Bandwidth Kbps Max Downstream Bandwidth Kbps B Notes 1 Max Upstream Bandwidth This field allow user configure the maximum bandwidth of this SSID to WAN 2 Max Downstream Bandwidth This field allow user configure the ma
26. It must contain both letters and numbers and is case sensitive Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name SSID The SSID Service Set IDentity identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated Wireless devices associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 English keyboard characters for the wireless LAN Security Level Max clients Specify the maximum number of clients that can connect to this network at the same time Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool Enhanced Select this check box to allow the VMG to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless Multicast unicast traffic Forwarding Maximum Specify the maximum rate for upstream wireless traffic to the WAN from this WLAN in Upstream kilobits per second Kbps Bandwidth Maximum Specify the maximum rate for downstream wireless traffic to this WLAN from the WAN in Downstream kilobits per second Kbps Bandwidth BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the VMG when wireless LAN is enabled Security Mode Select Basic WEP 802 1X or More Secure WPA 2 PSK to add security on this wireless network The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the VMG When you
27. LABEL DESCRIPTION Vendor ID 1 Enter the STB s vendor ID 5 Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving Note The VMG needs to restart to make the role change take effect 8 7 The Wake on LAN Screen Use this screen to turn on a device on the LAN network To use this feature the remote device must also support Wake On LAN You need to know the MAC address of the LAN device It may be on a label on the device or in its documentation VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 150 Chapter 8 Home Networking Click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Wake on Lan to open this screen Figure 55 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Wake on Lan Wake up your PC in LAN if your PC supports Wake on Lan feature Wake by Address Manual v IP Address MAC Address n F B Wake Up The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 36 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Wake on Lan LABEL DESCRIPTION Wake by Select Manual and enter the IP address or MAC address of the device to turn it on remotely Address The drop down list also lists the IP addresses that can be found in the VMG s ARP table Select an IP address and it will then automatically update the IP address and MAC address in the following fields IP Address Enter the IPv4 IP address of the device to turn it on MAC Address Enter the MAC address of t
28. Operating System An operating system OS is the interface which helps you manage a computer Common examples are Microsoft Windows Mac OS or Linux TCP IP TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol is a set of communications protocols that most of the Internet runs on Port A port maps a network service such as http to a process running on your computer such as a process run by your web browser When traffic from the Internet is received on your computer the port number is used to identify which process running on your computer it is intended for VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 212 Chapter 15 USB Service Supported OSs Your operating system must support TCP IP ports for printing and be compatible with the RAW port 9100 protocol The following OSs support VMG s printer sharing feature Microsoft Windows 95 Windows 98 SE Second Edition Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Macintosh OS X 15 1 3 Before You Begin Make sure the VMG is connected to your network and turned on 1 Connect the USB device to one of the VMG s USB port Make sure the VMG is connected to your network 2 The VMG detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on Note If your USB device cannot be detected by the VMG see the
29. Seamless Rate Adaptation functions The VMG supports the PhyR retransmission scheme PhyR is a retransmission scheme designed to provide protection against noise on the DSL line It improves voice video and data transmission resilience by utilizing a retransmission buffer ITU T G 993 2 standard defines a wide range of settings for various parameters some of which are encompassed in profiles as shown in the next table Table 11 VDSL Profiles MAX PROFILE BANDWIDTH DOWNSTREAM BANDWIDTH POWER DBM DOWNSTREAM MHZ Reus KHZ THROUGHPUT MBIT S Ba 8 832 2048 4 3125 17 5 50 8b 8 832 2048 4 3125 20 5 50 8c 8 5 1972 4 3125 11 5 50 8d 8 832 2048 4 3125 14 5 50 12a 12 2783 4 3125 14 5 68 12b 12 2783 4 3125 14 5 68 17a 17 664 4096 4 3125 14 5 100 30a 30 3479 8 625 14 5 200 Click Network Setting gt Broadband gt Advanced to display the following screen VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 95 Chapter 6 Broadband Figure 23 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Advanced Broadband PhyR US PhyR DS Bitswap SRA G Drt Gite 71 413 ADSL2 AnnexL ADSL2 AnnexM 8a Enabled 8b Enabled 8c Enabled 8d Enabled 12a Enabled 12b Enabled 17a Enabled uso When the state of DSL Bonding is changed The CPE will require a reboot If xDSL setting is changed The CPE will require a retrain DSL Capabilities ADSL Modulation PTM ov
30. ZyXEL VMG5313 B10A VMG5313 B30A Wireless N VDSL2 VoIP IAD with USB Version 1 00 Edition 3 09 2014 Default Login Details LAN IP Address http 192 168 1 1 Login admin zyuser Password 1234 1234 Default URL http 192 168 1 1 Copyright 2014 ZyXEL Communications Corporation IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in your product firmware or your computer operating system Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the VMG and get up and running right away VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 2 Contents Overview Contents Overview Usora GONO acdsee UIDI IIIS I IU 15 Wesen md tie ec ETE 17 The Wob CONOUG Ar 23 C S a a T T TT 33 TUONE e a a 25 Technical HarereO ousssiesiedtid tebea a EX IIS a2 E2dd EA rere T rererr rrr tren 71 Network Map and Status SOIeOIS ouissiqeenadtten dies drei sancidiguesdaceianda e Rid nia aehan aie 73 Ba EY 79 big SS ca cscaad ct occa aS a ana ea 107 Home BSB siis e 139 islas I e S 155 ere pegs Reet li fit Wim etc 163 Network Address Translation NAT sensisse pee a fte aa d oa td
31. 11 5 The DMZ Screen In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server IP address A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding Setup screen VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 189 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Figure 81 Form Forwar adn Network Setting gt NAT gt DMZ ppucations Fort triggering The LAN clientin the Demilitarized Zone DMZ is no longer behind this device and therefore can run any Internet applications such as video conferencing and Internet gaming without restrictions But with the same reason it also uncover itself to Internet security threats Default Server Address 192 168 1 B Note Enter IP address and click Apply to activate the DMZ host Clear the IP address field and click Apply to deactivate the DMZ host Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 60 Network Setting gt NAT gt DMZ LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Server Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not Address specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen Note If you do not assign a Default Server Address the VMG discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously sav
32. 8a 8b 8c 8d 12a 12b 17a USO The G 993 2 VDSL standard defines a wide range of profiles that can be used in different VDSL deployment settings such as in a central office a street cabinet or a building The VMG must comply with at least one profile specified in G 993 2 but compliance with more than one profile is allowed Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the VMG Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 97 Chapter 6 Broadband 6 5 The 802 1x Screen You can view and configure the 802 1X authentication settings in the 802 1x screen Click Network Setting gt Broadband gt 802 1x to display the following screen Figure 24 Network Setting gt Broadband gt 802 1x 802 1x Authentication List 802 1x Authentication List Status Interface EAP Identity EAP method Bidirectional A Certificate Trusted CA Modify 1 N A NIA EAP TLS No N A N A g 2 NIA N A EAP TLS No N A N A g B Note You need to add WAN interface first and you can modify authentication rules The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 Network Setting gt Network Setting gt 802 1x Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry Status This field displays whether the authentication is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this authenticati
33. A SIP account is a type of VolP account It is an arrangement with a service provider that lets you make phone calls over the Internet When you set the VMG to use your SIP account to make calls the VMG is able to send all the information about the phone call to your service provider on the Internet Strictly speaking you don t need a SIP account It is possible for one SIP device like the VMG to call another without involving a SIP service provider However the networking difficulties involved in doing this make it tremendously impractical under normal circumstances Your SIP account provider removes these difficulties by taking care of the call routing and setup figuring out how to get your call to the right place in a way that you and the other person can talk to one another How to Find Out More See Chapter 4 on page 35 for a tutorial showing how to set up these screens in an example scenario See Section 23 10 on page 282 for advanced technical information on SIP 23 2 Before You Begin Before you can use these screens you need to have a VoIP account already set up If you don t have one yet you can sign up with a VoIP service provider over the Internet e You should have the information your VoIP service provider gave you ready before you start to configure the VMG 23 3 The SIP Account Screen The VMG uses a SIP account to make outgoing VoIP calls and check if an incoming call s destination number matches your SIP a
34. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products Open Source Licenses This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and or GPL like licenses Open source licenses are provided with the firmware package You can download the latest firmware at www zyxel com If you cannot find it there contact your vendor or ZyXEL Technical Support at support zyxel com tw To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses please contact your vendor or ZyXEL Technical Support at support zyxel com tw CEO Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personn
35. Bookmarks Help La LACE e HAKERA Host 192 168 1 1 i Username admin 227 Entering Passive Mode 192 168 1 1 172 245 LIST 150 BINARY data connection established 226 Directory list has been submitted Directory listing successful 421 Kicked from the server due to control connection timeout Connection dosed by server Desktop IF My Documents Ej Computer Filesize Filetype Last modified Filename Filesize Filetype Last modified Permis Lg Floppy Disk Dri B E Local Disk ushi 1 File folder ana 0100 drwxrw 7 m D 1 directory Server Local file Direction Remote file Size Priority Status Queued files Failed transfers Successful transfers 2 Once you log in the USB device displays in the mnt folder VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 59 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4 11 Using the Media Server Feature Use the media server feature to play files on a computer or on your television using DMA 2500 This section shows you how the media server feature works using the following media clients Microsoft MS Windows Media Player Media Server works with Windows Vista and Windows 7 Make sure your computer is able to play media files music videos and pictures ZyXEL DMA 2500 a digital media adapter You need to set up the DMA 2500 to work with your television TV Refer to the DMA 2500 Quick Start Guide for the correct hardware connec
36. CCBS Deactivate Outgoing SIP Dial Plan Dial Plan Enable Dialing Interval Selection Dialing Interval Selection Immediate Dial Enable Immediate Dial Enable 46 46 3600 1800 180 120 66 82 67 418 41 12 0 63 0 63 20 65535 second 1 65535 second 91 3600 second 90 1800 second 3 wj second Each field is described in the following table Table 111 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider gt Add new provider Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Service Provider Selection Service Select the SIP service provider profile you want to use for the SIP account you configure in Provider this screen If you change this field the screen automatically refreshes Selection General SIP Service Enter the name of your SIP service provider Provider Name SIP Local Port Otherwise keep the default value Enter the VMG s listening port number if your VoIP service provider gave you one SIP Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP server provided by your VoIP service provider You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters It does not matter whether the SIP server is a proxy redirect or register server VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 274 Chapter 23 Voice Table 111 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider gt Add new provider Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Server Port
37. Chapter 37 Firmware Upgrade Figure 176 Error Message e Image uploading failed The selected file contains an illegal image VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 335 Chapter 37 Firmware Upgrade VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 336 Configuration 38 1 Overview The Configuration screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default 38 2 The Configuration Screen Click Maintenance gt Configuration nformation related to factory defaults backup configuration and restoring configuration appears in this screen as shown next Figure 177 Maintenance gt Configuration onfiguration In Configuration you can save the current device settings in a backup file in your computer or recover the system by restoring the backup file You can also reset the device back to factory default Backup Configuration Click Backup to save the current configuration of your system to your computer Backup Restore Configuration File Path Choose File No file chosen Upload Back to Factory Defaults Click Reset to clear all user entered configuration information and return to factory defaults After resetting the LAN IP address will be 192 168 1 1 DHCP will be reset by server Reset Backup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up save the VMG s current configuration to a file on your comp
38. IPv4 Address Enter the IPv4 IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in this field VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 142 Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 30 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt LAN Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Addressing This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field Values Beginning IP This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Address Ending IP This field specifies the last of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Address Auto reserve IP for the same host Select Enable to have the VMG record DHCP IP addresses with the MAC addresses the IP addresses are assigned to The VMG assigns the same IP address to the same MAC address when the host requests an IP address again through DHCP DHCP Server This is the period of time DHCP assigned addresses is used DHCP automatically assigns IP Lease Time addresses to clients when they log in DHCP centralizes IP address management on central computers that run the DHCP server program DHCP leases addresses for a period of time which means that past addresses are recycled and made available for future reassignment to other systems This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field Days Hours Enter the lease time of the DHCP server Minutes DNS Values This field is only available when you select Enab
39. If you select Block the VMG prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs listed below If you select Allow the VMG blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below Add new Click this to show a screen in which you can add a new service rule You can configure the service Service Name Protocol and Name of the new rule This shows the index number of the rule Select the checkbox next to the rule to activate it Service Name This shows the name of the rule Protocol Port This shows the protocol and the port of the rule VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 238 Chapter 19 Parental Control Table 91 Parental Control Rule Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule Blocked Site URL Keyword Click Add to show a screen to enter the URL of web site or URL keyword to which the VMG blocks access Click Delete to remove it Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the VMG Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 239 Chapter 19 Parental Control VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 240 Scheduler Rule 20 1 Overview You can define time periods and days during which the VMG performs scheduled rules of certain fea
40. LABEL DESCRIPTION Protocol Choose the IP protocol TCP UDP ICMP or Other that defines your customized port from the drop down list box Select Other to be able to enter a protocol number Source These fields are displayed if you select TCP or UDP as the IP port Destination Port I Select Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service If you select Any the service is applied to all ports Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service Protocol This field is displayed if you select Other as the protocol Number Enter the protocol number of your customized port Add Click this to add the protocol to the Rule List below Rule List Protocol This is the IP port TCP UDP ICMP or Other that defines your customized port Ports Protocol For TCP UDP ICMP or TCP UDP protocol rules this shows the port number or range that Number defines the custom service For other IP protocol rules this shows the protocol number Delete Click the Delete icon to remove the rule Service Name Enter a unique name up to 32 printable English keyboard characters including spaces for your customized port Service Enter a description for your customized port Description Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User
41. LINK TAB FUNCTION Email Email Use this screen to configure up to two mail servers and sender Notification Notification addresses on the VMG Log Setting Log Setting Use this screen to change your VMG s log settings Firmware Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your VMG Upgrade Upgrade Configuration Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore your VMG s configuration settings or reset the factory default settings Reboot Reboot Use this screen to reboot the VMG without turning the power off Diagnostic Ping amp Traceroute Use this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection You can amp Nslookup use Ping TraceRoute or Nslookup to help you identify problems 802 1ag Use this screen to configure CFM Connectivity Fault Management MD maintenance domain and MA maintenance association perform connectivity tests and view test reports OAM Ping Use this screen to view information to help you identify problems with the DSL connection VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 31 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 32 Quick Start 3 1 Overview Use the Quick Start screens to configure the VMG s time zone basic Internet access and wireless settings Note See the technical reference chapters starting on Chapter 4 on page 35 for background information on the features in this chapter 3 2 Quick Start Se
42. Notification the wireless network Mail Server Select a mail server for the e mail address specified below If you do not select a mail server e mail notifications cannot be sent via e mail You must have configured a mail server already in the Maintenance gt Email Notification screen Email Title Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e mail notifications that the VMG sends Send Notifications are sent to the e mail address specified in this field If this field is left blank notifications cannot be sent via e mail Security Level Security Mode Select Basic WEP 802 1X or More Secure WPA 2 PSK to add security on this wireless network The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the VMG After you select to use a security additional options appears in this screen Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication See Section 7 2 1 on page 110 for more details about this field Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 116 Chapter 7 Wireless 7 4 MAC Authentication This screen allows you to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to specific devices Allow or exclude specific devices from accessing the ZyXEL Device Deny E
43. Priority This shows the priority of this queue Weight This shows the weight of this queue Buffer This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue Management i Queue management algorithms determine how the VMG should handle packets when it receives too many network congestion Rate Limit This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the queue Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action 10 4 1 Adding a QoS Queue Click Add new Queue or the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue Figure 68 Queue Setup Add Active Name Interface Priority Weight Buffer Management Rate Limit 1 High ga Drop Tail DT kbps ox canca The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Queue Setup Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select to enable or disable this queue Name Enter the descriptive name of this queue Interface Select the interface to which this queue is applied This field is read only if you are editing the queue VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 167 Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS Table 47 Queue Setup Add continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority Select the priority level from 1 to 7 of this queue The smaller th
44. Remote Procedure Calls see RPCs 319 reset 21 338 restart 339 restoring configuration 338 RFC 1058 See RIP RFC 1389 See RIP RFC 1483 101 RFC 1889 286 RFC 3164 297 RIP 160 router features 18 Routing Information Protocol See RIP RPPCs 319 RTP 286 RTS Request To Send 364 threshold 363 364 RTS threshold 123 127 S security wireless LAN 127 Security Log 299 Security Parameter Index see SPI service access control 315 316 317 Service Set 110 116 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 395 Index Services 196 Session Initiation Protocol see SIP setup firewalls 225 static route 99 156 158 200 silence suppression 289 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP Single Rate Three Color Marker see srTCM SIP 283 account 283 call progression 286 client 284 identities 283 INVITE request 287 288 number 283 OK response 288 proxy server 284 redirect server 285 register server 286 servers 284 service domain 283 URI 283 user agent 284 SIP ALG 190 activation 191 SMTP 196 SNMP 196 323 324 agents 323 Get 324 GetNext 324 Manager 323 managers 323 MIB 323 network components 323 Set 324 Trap 324 versions 323 SNMP trap 196 speed dial 279 SPI 224 SrTCM 178 SSID 128 activation 114 MBSSID 130 static route 155 160 327 configuration 99 156 158 200 example 155 static VLAN status 73 firmware version 75 LAN 75 WAN 75 wireless LAN 75 status indicators 20 subnet m
45. SHAI1 type a unique key 40 hexadecimal characters long SPI Type a unique SPI Security Parameter Index in hexadecimal characters The SPI is used to identify the VMG during authentication The VMG and remote IPSec router must use the same SPI OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 257 Chapter 22 VPN 22 3 The IPSec VPN Monitor Screen Use this screen to check your VPN tunnel s current status You can also manually trigger a VPN tunnel to the remote network Click Security gt I PSec VPN gt Monitor to open this screen as shown next Figure 132 Security gt IPSec VPN gt Monitor tup Monitor The status of IPSec Tunnel is displayed on this page You can trigger the IPSec Tunnel or change its status by clicking the button in the table Monitor Refresh Interval No Refresh v Status B Note IPSec tunnels follow the Firewall Security Level You can add Firewall ACL Rule to accept some services This screen contains the following fields Table 102 Security gt IPSec VPN gt Monitor LABEL DESCRIPTION VMG stop updating the screen Refresh Interval Select how often you want the VMG to update this screen Select No Refresh to have the successfully Otherwise it displays a red line in between Status This displays a green line between two hosts if the VPN tunnel has been esta
46. The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter Certification Authority A Certification Authority CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates Anyone can then use the certification authority s public key to verify the certificates You can use the VMG to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority 21 3 The Local Certificates Screen Click Security gt Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen This is the VMG s summary list of certificates and certification requests VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 243 Chapter 21 Certificates Figure 122 Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates Certificates Local Certificates Certificates also known as digital IDs can authenticate users In Local Certificate you can generate certification requests and importthe signed certificates Maximum 4 certificates can be stored Replace PrivateKey Certificate file in PEM format Private Key is protected by a password Choose File No file chosen Amport Certificate Create Certificate Request Current File The following table describes
47. VoIP Status VoIP Status Use this screen to view VoIP registration current call status and phone numbers for the phone ports ARP table ARP table Use this screen to view the ARP table It displays the IP and MAC address of each DHCP connection Use this screen to view the routing table on the VMG IGMP MLD Group Status IGMP MLD Group Status Use this screen to view the status of all IGMP settings on the VMG xDSL Statistics xDSL Statistics Use this screen to view the Device s xDSL traffic statistics 3G Statistics 3G Statistics Use this screen to look at 3G Internet connection status Maintenance User Account User Account Use this screen to change user password on the VMG Remote MGMT Remote MGMT Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services Trust Domain Use this screen to grant access to local management service by adding IP address TR 069 Client TR 069 Client Use this screen to configure the VMG to be managed by an Auto Configuration Server ACS TR 064 TR 064 Use this screen to enable management via TR 064 on the LAN SNMP SNMP Use this screen to configure SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol settings Time Time Use this screen to change your VMG s time and date VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 30 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary continued
48. You need to specify a static routing rule on the VMG to specify R as the router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2 In this case the VMG routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the traffic to B This tutorial uses the following example IP settings Table 4 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE COMPUTER IP ADDRESS The VMG s WAN 172 16 1 1 The VMG s LAN 192 168 1 1 IP Type IPv4 Use Interface VDSL ppp1 1 A 192 168 1 34 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 51 Chapter 4 Tutorials Table 4 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE COMPUTER IP ADDRESS R s N1 192 168 1 253 R s N2 192 168 10 2 B 192 168 10 33 To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2 Log into the VMG s Web Configurator in advanced mode Click Network Setting gt Routing Click Add new static route in the Static Route screen Interface Modify Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings 4a Select the Active check box Enter the Route Name as R 4b Set IP Type to IPv4 4c Type 192 168 10 0 and subnet mask 255 255 255 0 for the destination N2 4d Select Enable in the Use Gateway IP Address field Type 192 168 1 253 R s N1 address in the Gateway IP Address field 4e Select VDSL ppp1 1 as the Use I nterface Add new Static Route Active A Route Name R IP Type IPv4 v Destination IP Address 192 168 10 1 IP
49. in NetMeeting CU SeeMe etc You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name for instance myhost dhs org where myhost is a name of your choice that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don t know your IP address First of all you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www dyndns org This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key 12 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the DNS Entry screen to view configure or remove DNS routes Section 12 2 on page 200 Use the Dynamic DNS screen to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the VMG Section 12 3 on page 201 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 199 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup 12 1 2 What You Need To Know DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes yourhost dyndns org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost dyndns org This feature is useful if you want to be able to use for example www yourhost dyndns org and still reach your hostname If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use Dynamic DNS 12 2 The DNS Entry Screen Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the VMG Click Network Settin
50. the VMG to record Port the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN This is the first port number that identifies a service Trigger End This is the last port number that identifies a service Port Trigger Proto This is the trigger transport layer protocol Open Start Port The open port is a port or a range of ports that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service The VMG forwards the traffic with this port or range of ports to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service This is the first port number that identifies a service Open End Port This is the last port number that identifies a service Open Proto This is the open transport layer protocol Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule 11 4 1 Add Edit Port Triggering Rule This screen lets you create new port triggering rules Click Add new rule in the Port Triggering screen or click a rule s Edit icon to open the following screen VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 188 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Figure 80 Port Triggering Add Edit Add new rule Active Service Name WAN Interface Trigger Start Port Trigger End Port Trigger Protocol Open Start Port Open End Port Open Protocol Xx vDSL v TCP TCP M ok Cancel The following table d
51. xam Ss amd BUT Loaosceetuiudienacunedukot Most ven mn cre Renee ne ren C uico euet M mere ner ada ipi Esel 262 ddp VPN INE BV NIKE DEVEESBI aiiis uictcektebeesekrcbineus 6oipleker esbd Qaboa d set emus onde Gd breui Qe Ed Rar dee d 262 L ATUTO Se OHI 263 Be ABP 08 5 hare Ay ou sisi p EET tO dE de QE rido da ER MR RI ME RR eid FER D MR Nd ERE bU UIS 264 22 4 9 Diffie Hellman DET Key Groups seis cacecscnes actes cota rper ctas etre Cubl d deno sent so ee e err eeii 264 Chapter 23 polo Mov EE 265 SDN ROIS Mn Te 265 Zar le What You Can Do n this GHODIIC uis cem ipiria a ee ER ERE SIN Eoobl adl aas CR E Pha ELEC Xa N FALE Ea pea dE 265 23 1 2 What You Need to Know About VolP esis isos io oti a t aea e ke a EA e at 266 uo Bats TOU BOUM xaspsodqustuiamtetuieimh T E E E De e dri Ut ue itu Feliu bate AS 266 235 Th SP Aecoubt SOIBO siir eei E i aa Eea ERO Mesi RE TUM PLE ap eU OPE 266 23 3 1 The SIE Account Add Edit SORROW aaran nias ipod a LER ER AR E DER EVE CRI a iaa ELE KORR dO FO EA bn a 267 2341 The SIP Service Provider Sereen areae EEE SOME ARR PHURAK OK DAEMKE SEDI SM RAE 271 23 4 1 The SIP Service Provider Add Edit SCheen see rd rere nord etat e ard asd ia 272 Ao MEPE SCEE pania a a Mundt adh a eran thon tadecic th 279 236 The Gall Rule SUP OO riser eini e eA OE AR E E EE 279 coe he Gall Histor Summa SCOE asniensis a aa dU ad qai end e reda a Ragga 280 pamagu re iM pcregRenusesgER kce
52. 2048bit DH Group14 use a 2048 bit random number 3072bit DH Group15 use a 3072 bit random number 4096bit DH Group16 use a 4096 bit random number Key Life Time Define the length of time before an IPSec SA automatically renegotiates in this field A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys However every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected The following fields are available if you select Manual in the Key Exchange Method field Encryption Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA Choices are iud DES a 56 bit key with the DES encryption algorithm 3DES a 168 bit key with the DES encryption algorithm EPS NULL no encryption key or algorithm Encryption This field is applicable when you select an Encryption Algorithm y Enter the encryption key which depends on the encryption algorithm DES type a unique key 16 hexadecimal characters long 3DES type a unique key 48 hexadecimal characters long Authentication Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data Choices are MD5 SHA1 Algorithm SHA is generally considered stronger than MD5 but it is also slower Authentication Enter the authentication key which depends on the authentication algorithm i MD5 type a unique key 32 hexadecimal characters long
53. 259 architecture 258 NAT 262 IPSec VPN 251 IPv6 80 375 addressing 81 105 375 EUI 64 377 global address 376 interface ID 377 link local address 375 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 375 ping 375 prefix 81 105 375 prefix delegation 82 prefix length 81 105 375 unspecified address 376 iTunes server 215 ITU T 289 K key combinations 295 keypad 295 L LAN 139 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 393 Index and USB printer 216 client list 144 DHCP 140 152 DNS 140 153 IP address 140 141 153 MAC address 145 status 75 subnet mask 140 141 153 LAND attack 224 LAN Side DSL CPE Configuration 321 LBR 340 limitations wireless LAN 129 WPS 137 link trace 340 Link Trace Message see LTM Link Trace Response see LTR listening port 276 login 23 passwords 23 24 logs 297 301 311 329 Loop Back Response see LBR loopback 340 LTM 340 LTR 340 MA 340 MAC address 117 145 filter 117 128 MAC authentication 117 Mac filter 233 Maintenance Association see MA Maintenance Domain see MD Maintenance End Point see MEP Management Information Base MIB 323 managing the device good habits 17 Maximum Burst Size MBS 102 MBSSID 130 MD 340 media server 215 activation 216 iTunes server 215 MEP 340 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 103 multicast 104 multimedia 283 Multiple BSS see MBSSID multiplexing 101 LLC based 102 VC based 101 multiprotocol encapsulation 101 N NAT 181 182 183 194
54. 45 Chapter 4 Tutorials ZyXEL Device Wireless Client Continuous Access Mode Register Wireless Cent s PIN Numi 1 Enter the PIN of your wireless clie ap 25327519 Register 2 Activate WPS on the Mes within 2 minutes after clicking Connq WITHIN 2 MINUTES D Authentication by PIN ert Mert cep SECURITY INFO j amp em 4 4 3 Without WPS Use the wireless adapter s utility installed on the notebook to search for the Example SSID Then enter the DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork pre shared key to establish an wireless Internet connection Note The VMG supports IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 11g wireless clients Make sure that your notebook or computer s wireless adapter supports one of these standards VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 46 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4 5 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups Company A wants to create different wireless network groups for different types of users as shown in the following figure Each group has its own SSID and security mode mom 9 9 ud ie di id Company E AS 4 n A 2 I A i i i VIP HA gt gt 7 Guest WV Ss AK 9 hi rd b P w Ld s 9 see ee C U7 Employees in Company A will use a general Company wireless network group Higher management level and important visitors will use the VIP group
55. A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 323 Chapter 33 SNMP SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events Click Maintenance SNMP to open the following screen Use this screen to configure the VMG SNMP settings Figure 167 Maintenance gt SNMP SNMP Agent Get Community Set Community System Name System Location System Contact Trap Destination The device supports SNMP and can be managed and monitored on a computer network by a network management system NMS The settings below decide the access information about how this device reports information via SNMP to the NMS Enable Disable public private VMG5313 Taiwan admin
56. Add New Share Share Directory List Click this to create a new share for users to access through the VMG Active Status Select this to activate the share This field shows the status of the share The share is not activated 3 The share is activated and shared to all users The share is activated and only shared to the specified users listed in the Account Management section below Share Name This field shows the name of a folder that is shared through the VMG Share Path This field shows the location of the share in the VMG Share This field shows a short description of the share Description Modify Click the Edit icon to modify the share Click the Delete icon to remove the share from the VMG Account Manage ment Add New User Click this button to create a user account to access the secured shares Active Select this to allow the user to access the secured shares Status This field shows the status of the user S The user account is not activated for the share amp The user account is activated for the share User Name This is the name of a user who is allowed to access the secured shares on the USB device Modify Click the Edit icon to modify the user account Click the Delete icon to remove the user account from the VMG Apply Click this to save your changes to the VMG Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings
57. B has answered the call Now A and B exchange voice media talk After talking A hangs up and sends a BYE request B replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request and the call is terminated SIP Call Progression Through Proxy Servers Usually the SIP UAC sets up a phone call by sending a request to the SIP proxy server Then the proxy server looks up the destination to which the call should be forwarded according to the URI requested by the SIP UAC The request may be forwarded to more than one proxy server before arriving at its destination The response to the request goes to all the proxy servers through which the request passed in reverse sequence Once the session is set up session traffic is sent between the UAs directly bypassing all the proxy servers in between The following figure shows the SIP and session traffic flow between the user agents UA 1 and UA 2 and the proxy servers this example shows two proxy servers PROXY 1 and PROXY 2 Figure 149 SIP Call Through Proxy Servers PROXY 1 PROXY 2 Bl Bl 4 SIP SIP SIP amp RTP C ci UA 1 UA 2 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 287 Chapter 23 Voice The following table shows the SIP call progression Table 118 SIP Call Progression UA 1 PROXY 1 PROXY 2 UA2 Invite Invite 44 100 Trying Invite 44
58. B30A Series User s Guide 295 Chapter 23 Voice VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 296 Log 24 1 Overview The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and or alerts to have the VMG log and then display the logs or have the VMG send them to an administrator as e mail or to a syslog server 24 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the System Log screen to see the system logs Section 24 2 on page 298 Use the Security Log screen to see the security related logs for the categories that you select Section 24 3 on page 299 24 1 2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Alerts and Logs An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention They include system errors attacks access control and attempted access to blocked web sites Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen Alerts display in red and logs display in black Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facilit
59. Enter the SIP server s listening port number if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise keep the default value REGISTER Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP register server if your VolP service provider gave you one Otherwise enter the same address you entered in the SIP Server Address field You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters REGISTER Server Port Enter the SIP register server s listening port number if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise enter the same port number you entered in the SIP Server Port field SIP Service Domain Enter the SIP service domain name In the full SIP URI this is the part after the symbol You can use up to 127 printable ASCII Extended set characters RFC Support Remove 5060 and transport udp from request uri in SIP messages Support Select this option to have the VMG use DNS procedures to resolve the SIP domain and find Locating SIP the SIP server s IP address port number and supported transport protocol s Server RFC3263 The VMG first uses DNS Name Authority Pointer NAPTR records to determine the transport protocols supported by the SIP server It then performs DNS Service SRV query to determine the port number for the protocol The VMG resolves the SIP server s IP address by a standard DNS address record lookup The SIP Server Port and REGI STER Server Port fields in the General secti
60. Guide 300 Traffic Status 25 1 Overview Use the Traffic Status screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN LAN interfaces and NAT 25 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics Section 25 2 on page 301 Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics Section 25 3 on page 302 Use the NAT screen to view the NAT status of the VMG s client s Section 25 4 on page 303 25 2 The WAN Status Screen Click System Monitor gt Traffic Status to open the WAN screen The figure in this screen shows the number of bytes received and sent on the VMG Figure 153 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt WAN Figures about data that have been sent outto and received from the Internet are displayed in the following table Status Received 151 236 287Bytes Sent 13 233 507Bytes Refresh Interval 15 Seconds v Data Drop lan4 wan 70 280 0 0 985 944 0 0 hide more Packets Received VDSL eth3G 0 0 0 0 pppo3G 0 0 0 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 301 Chapter 25 Traffic Status The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 126 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt WAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Connected This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected Interface Packets Sent Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on thi
61. IP address and 255 255 255 255 as the Local End IP address This field is blank for One to One mapping types Global Start IP This is the starting Inside Global IP Address IGA Enter 0 0 0 0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP You can only do this for the Many to One mapping type Global End IP This is the ending Inside Global IP Address IGA This field is blank for One to One and Many to One mapping types VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 191 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Table 62 Network Setting gt NAT gt Address Mapping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Type This is the address mapping type One to One This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address Note that port numbers do not change for the One to one NAT mapping type Many to One This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA i e PAT port address translation the VMG s Single User Account feature that previous routers supported only Many to Many This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing address mapping rule Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action 11 7 1 Add Edit Address Mapping Rule To add
62. IPv6 Address Select Automatic if you want to have the VMG use the IPv6 prefix from the connected router s Router Advertisement RA to generate an IPv6 address Select Get I Pv6 Address From DHCPv6 Server IA NA if you want to obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server The IP address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has priority over the IP address automatically generated by the VMG using the IPv6 prefix from an RA This option is available only when you choose to get your IPv6 address automatically Select Prefix Delegation I A PD to use DHCP PD Prefix Delegation which enables the Device to pass the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts The hosts can then use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses Select Static if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP Select None to not assign any IPv6 address to this WAN connection Prefix Enter the address prefix length to specify how many most significant bits in an IPv6 address Length compose the network address Next Hop Enter the IP address of the next hop gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your VMG s interface s The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations IPv6 Routing Fea ture This is available only when you select I Pv6 IPv4 DualStack or IPv6 Only in the I Pv6 I Pv4 Mode field You can enable IPv6 routing features in the following section MLD Proxy Select this checkbox to have the VMG act a
63. Identification Number of the VMG is shown here Enter this PIN in the Ada configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push button method Click the Generate New PI N Number button to have the VMG create a new PIN Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 7 6 The WMM Screen Use this screen to enable Wi Fi MultiMedia WMM and WMM Power Save in wireless networks for multimedia applications Click Network Setting Wireless WMM The following screen displays Figure 36 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WMM VWIMM WMM and APSD have beneficial effects on delay sensitive applications over wireless connection such as VoIP and multimedia streaming because WMM enhances data transmission quality and APSD improves power management on wireless clients 2 4GHz WMM Setup WMM Automatic Power Save Delivery APSD Enable Disabled Enable Disabled Apply Cancel VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 119 Chapter 7 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WMM LABEL DESCRIPTION WMM Select On to have the VMG automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends WMM QoS Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service gives high priority to voice and video
64. In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol for example if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network This agreement helps eliminate congestion which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections Peak Cell Rate PCR is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells This parameter may be lower but not higher than the maximum line speed 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes 424 bits soa maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells sec This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed Sustained Cell Rate SCR is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection SCR may not be greater than the PCR Maximum Burst Size MBS is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR After MBS is reached cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again At this time more cells up to the MBS can be sent at the PCR again If the PCR SCR or MB
65. It is strongly recommended you change the default password Enter a new password retype it to confirm and click Apply alternatively click Skip to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the password now Figure 5 Change Password Screen ZyXEL Change password It is highly recommended to setup a new password instead of using the default one for security concerns The password must contain 6 to 20 characters include 0 9 New Password pacc Verify New Password H skip f Appi 5 The Quick Start Wizard screen appears You can configure the VMG s time zone basic Internet access and wireless settings See Chapter 3 on page 33 for more information 6 After you finished or closed the Quick Start Wizard screen the Network Map page appears Figure 6 Network Map ZyXEL VMG5313 B30A Network Map E ES 2 Connection Status 7 Click Status to display the Status screen where you can view the VMG s interface and system information VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 24 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 2 2 Web Configurator Layout Figure 7 Screen Layout ZyXEL VMG5313 B30A Status Device Information odel Number erial Number Firmware Version WAN Information WAN Type WAN Name MAC Address IPv4 Address IPv4 Subnet Mask IPv4 Uptime Primary DNS server Secondary DNG server Encapsulation LAN Information IPv4 Ad
66. None lan4 wan eth3 1 eth3G eth3G pppo3G pppo3G0 Grouped LAN Interfaces Available LAN Interfaces LAN1 LAN2 Lana Automatically Add Clients With the following DHCP Vendor IDs AUC Ret Ra me If a vendor ID is configured for a specific client device please REBOOT the client device attached to the modem to allow itto obtain an appropriate IP address ZyXEL000001_Guest2 ZyXELO00001 ZyXELO00001_Guest3 ZyXELO00001_Guest1 Filter Criteria Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 73 Interface Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Group Name Enter a name to identify this group You can enter up to 30 characters You can use letters numbers hyphens and underscores _ Spaces are not allowed WAN Interface Select the WAN interface this group uses The group can have up to one PTM interface up to used in the one ATM interface and up to one ETH interface grouping Select None to not add a WAN interface to this group Grouped LAN Select one or more LAN interfaces Ethernet LAN HPNA or wireless LAN in the Available Interfaces LAN Interfaces list and use the left arrow to move them to the Grouped LAN Interfaces list to add the interfaces to this group Available LAN Interfaces To remove a LAN or wireless LAN interface from the Grouped LAN Interfaces use the right facing arrow Automatically Click A
67. ON SNR Margin 21 0 dB 22 7 dB Actual Delay 4 us 4 ms Transmit Power l l dBm 11 3 dBm Receive Power 0 9 dBm 10 0 dBm Actual INP 16 0 symbols 16 0 symbols Total Attenuation 0 0 dB 1 3 dB Attainable Net Data Rate 9 133 532 Mbps VDSL Band Status U3 Dl D2 D3 Line Attenuation dB 0 0 0 0 N 0 5 Lel 2 4 Signal Attenuation dB 0 0 0 0 N 0 5 Led 2 4 SNR Margin dB 21 0 1 0 N 22 6 22 6 22 8 Transmit Power dBm 15 6 4 4 D 6 N 6 6 6 0 7 0 VDSL Counters Downstream Upstream Since Link time 59 min 47 sec FEC 188 0 CRC 0 0 E3 0 0 SES 0 UAS 0 0 LOS 0 0 LOF 0 0 e SEN aped ny e E OOS VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 307 Chapter 27 xDSL Statistics Dau at d VDSL Counters Downstream Upstream Since Link time 59 min 47 sec FEC 188 0 CRC 0 ES 0 0 SES 0 0 UAS 0 0 LOS 0 LOF 0 0 LOM 0 Latest 15 minutes time 16 sec FEC 0 0 CRC 0 0 ES 0 SES 0 0 UAS 0 LOS 0 0 LOF 0 0 LOM 0 0 Previous 15 minutes time 15 min 0 sec FEC 0 0 CRC 0 0 ES 0 0 SES 0 0 UAS 0 0 LOS LOF 0 0 LOM 0 Latest 1 day time 16 hours 16 sec FEC 188 0 CRC 0 0 E3 0 0 SES 0 0 UAS 28 28 LOS 0 0 LOF 0 0 LOM 0 0 Previous 1 day time 0 sec FEC 0 CRC 0 0 E3 0 0 SES 0 0 UAS 0 0 LOS 0 0 LOF 0 0 LOM 0 0 Previous 15 minutes time 15 min 0 sec FEC 0 0 CRC 0 0 ES 0 0 SES 0 0 UAS 0 0 LOS LOF 0 LOM 0 0 L
68. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 369 Appendix B Wireless LANs pre authentication These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again Pre authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client already connecting to an AP to perform IEEE 802 1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA At the time of writing the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP Funk Software s Odyssey client The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP s built in Zero Configuration wireless client However you must run Windows XP to use it WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA 2 you need the IP address of the RADIUS server its port number default is 1812 and the RADIUS shared secret A WPA 2 application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows A is the RADIUS server DS is the distribution system 1
69. Policer Setup decides the rules of the inbound traffic Add new Policer The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Network Setting gt QoS gt Policer Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new Policer Click this to create a new entry This is the index number of the entry Status This field displays whether the policer is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this policer is active A gray bulb signifies that this policer is not active Name This field displays the descriptive name of this policer Regulated This field displays the name of a QoS classifier Classes Meter Type This field displays the type of QoS metering algorithm used in this policer Rule These are the rates and burst sizes against which the policer checks the traffic of the member QoS classes Action This shows the how the policer has the VMG treat different types of traffic belonging to the policer s member QoS classes Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the policer Click the Delete icon to delete an existing policer Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 173 Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS 10 6 1 Add Edit a QoS Policer Click Add new Policer in the Policer Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a policer to show the following screen Figure 72 Policer Setup Add Edit QoS Poli
70. Sea da end em t do ae 181 Dame DNS SAY e TC 199 NAA TOAD 203 Int POUD e 205 VSE OR COT M er M 211 ugs ilg e 219 iit cd tg D RA T tac hae al 223 WAS FIOT asnoisan nnna aioe onan aR Renae 233 Farena l S200 MT 235 SORORIS RUIE nosse ibo ca pek ated ean a Mee Ga du pu cbe QU dua a ULM AR Cobb ud pai RA cu i REP R Cien 241 decani TT 243 VEN per 251 po Me NER UU 265 E 297 Bulb RET T Tm 301 NIP SOUS mE UP 305 XDSL SIEIS A EE TER pray pe entre renee rt Cet Perret ey T yen Te errr Prt 307 REI ETAT RN NE Maar Mee athe ocead E Mei ae dead T 311 USEF teg dee 313 Fano o Manage mE e r M 315 TROC ICEN dip tere b Ebrr THREE PRIMER FE rU IR PRIME MEN E METER Mie 319 TRO T a ek b roc rPLE Cobra Fr UNEE POLEN UAG Peli D TECUM Pol USE ELE LODF OE UBIC E PELUD DURER E Fu L GRE ET 321 Pe PT E E D ROB A DO ENS 323 TE ups c EUN a rsny Pre er tretr rte 325 Emal INTC ATION aaseis eter tr PE LER UA epe E e USER PEDAL AU aU RR SO NU FN IRL Kara pta d 327 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 3 Contents Overview Lh ci 329 31 35 10 5 ede 333 Beie Trio ge
71. Select which protocol you want to use in the IPSec SA Choices are AH RFC 2402 provides integrity authentication sequence integrity replay resistance and non repudiation but not encryption If you select AH you must select an I ntegraty Algorithm ESP RFC 2406 provides encryption and the same services offered by AH but its authentication is weaker If you select ESP you must select an Encryption Agorithm and Integraty Algorithm Both AH and ESP increase processing requirements and latency delay The VMG and remote IPSec router must use the same active protocol Key Exchange Method Select the key exchange method Auto I KE Select this to use automatic IKE key management VPN connection policy Manual Select this option to configure a VPN connection policy that uses a manual key instead of IKE key management This may be useful if you have problems with IKE key management Note Only use manual key as a temporary solution because it is not as secure as a regular IPSec SA Authentication Method Select Pre Shared Key to use a pre shared key for authentication and type in your pre shared key A pre shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation It is called pre shared because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection Select Certificate X 509 to use a certificate for authentication Pre Shared Key Type
72. Set ESS consists of a series of overlapping BSSs each containing an access point with each access point connected together by a wired network This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System DS This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood An ESSID ESS IDentification uniquely identifies each ESS All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 362 Appendix B Wireless LANs Figure 189 Infrastructure WLAN Ethernet P a s Pd gt UJ o o P UJ o o N 2 Channel A channel is the radio frequency ies used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data Channels available depend on your geographical area You may have a choice of channels for your region so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP access point to reduce interference Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance Adjacent channels partially overlap however To avoid interference due to overlap your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using For example if your region has 11 chann
73. Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Use Gateway IP Address Enable Disable Gateway IP Address 192 168 1 253 Use Interface VDSL ppp1 1 v b OK Cancel 4a Click OK Now B should be able to receive traffic from A You may need to additionally configure B s firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 52 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4 7 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen Let s say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office You want to prioritize e mail traffic because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour You also upload data files such as logs and e mail archives to the FTP server throughout the day Your colleagues use the Internet for research as well as chat applications for communicating with other branch offices In the following figure your Internet connection has an upstream transmission bandwidth of 10 000 kbps For this example you want to configure QoS so that e mail traffic gets the highest priority with at least 5 000 kbps You can do the following Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue 1 to e mail traffic going to the WAN interface so that e mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion e Note the IP address 192 168 1 23 for example and or MAC address AA FF AA FF AA FF for
74. Switch On Off Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 16 3 The Auto Switch Off Screen Use this screen to view schedules to turn on or off specific interface s and or all LED lights on the VMG To access this screen click Network Setting gt Power Management gt Auto Switch Off Figure 105 Network Setting gt Power Managment gt Auto Switch Off Power Management EE TONT su You can decide schedules when to turn off any service below for power saving purpose Add or modify rules Rule Name DSL Eth LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 LAN4 LED B Notes 1 Service can be actived manually at any time 2 After adding or modifying schedule rules you MUST check schedule table above and re apply it Apply Cancel VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 220 Chapter 16 Power Management The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 80 Network Setting gt Power Managment gt Auto Switch OffNetwork Setting gt Power Managment gt Auto Switch Off LABEL DESCRIPTION Add or modify Click this link to create or edit a schedule rules This is the index number of a schedule rule Rule Name This field shows the name of the schedule rule Day This field shows which week days in green the interface s and or LEDs are turned on and the days grayed out they are turned off automatically T
75. Windows Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X Add a New Printer Using Windows This example shows how to connect a printer to your VMG using the Windows 7 operating system Some menu items may look different on your operating system 1 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Devices and Printers to open the Devices and Printers screen Click Add a printer VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 65 Chapter 4 Tutorials n Devices and Printers 27 Add Printer p 3 Click The printer that want isn t listed VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 66 Chapter 4 Tutorials x Q9 add Printer No printers were found S gt The printer that I want isn t listed EE 4 Select the Select a shared printer by name option Enter the URL for your printer http 192 168 1 1 631 printers USB PRINTER in this example This URL can be found in the VMG s Web Configurator on the Network Setting USB Service Printer Server screen Click Next VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 67 Chapter 4 Tutorials x Q9 add Printer Find a printer by name or TCP IP address C Browse for a printer Select a shared printer by name http 192 168 1 1 631 printers USB_PRINTER Browse Example computername printername or http computername printers printername printe Add a printer using a TCP IP address or hostname Ee Print Server tz Ena
76. ZyXELDDDD01 Max clients 16 Hide SID Y Enhanced Multicast Forwarding Max Upstream Bandwidth Kbps htx Downstream Bandwidth Kbps Notes 1 Mtax Upstream Bandwidth This field allow user configure the maximum bandwidth of this SSID to WAN 2 Max Downstream Bandwidth This field allow user configure the maximum bandwidth of WAN to this SSID 3 1f Max Upstream Downstream Bandwidth is empty the CPE sets the value automatically BSSID CC 5D 4E 00 00 02 E mail notification when the wireless guest visit Enable Email Notification Security Level More Secure Recommended X X Apply Cancel The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen Table 16 Network Setting gt Wireless gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Network Setup Wireless You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field Band This shows the wireless band which this radio profile is using 2 4GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802 11b g n wireless clients Channel Use Auto to have the VMG automatically determine a channel to use more less Click more to show more information Click less to hide them Bandwidth Select whether the VMG uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz or 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal neighborhood or the wireless clients do not suppo
77. a 56 bit key with the DES encryption algorithm 3DES a 168 bit key with the DES encryption algorithm AES 128 a 128 bit key with the AES encryption algorithm AES 196 a 196 bit key with the AES encryption algorithm AES 256 a 256 bit key with the AES encryption algorithm The VMG and the remote IPSec router must use the same key size and encryption algorithm Longer keys require more processing power resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput Integrity Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data Choices are MD5 SHA1 Algorithm SHA is generally considered stronger than MD5 but it is also slower Select Diffie Select which Diffie Hellman key group you want to use for encryption keys Choices for number of bits in the random number are 768 1024 1536 2048 3072 4096 The longer the key the more secure the encryption but also the longer it takes to encrypt and decrypt information Both routers must use the same DH key group Key Life Time Define the length of time before an IPSec SA automatically renegotiates in this field A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys However every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected Phase 2 Encryption Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA Choices are Algorithm DES a
78. address specified in this field If this field is left blank notifications cannot be sent via e mail Advanced Click this to show the advanced 3G backup settings Budget Setup Enable Budget Control Select Enable to set a monthly limit for the user account of the installed 3G card You can set a limit on the total traffic and or call time The VMG takes the actions you specified when a limit is exceeded during the month Time Budget Select this and specify the amount of time in hours that the 3G connection can be used within one month If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control the VMG resets the statistics Data Budget Mbytes Select this and specify how much downstream and or upstream data in Mega bytes can be transmitted via the 3G connection within one month Select Download Upload to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions Select Download to set a limit on the downstream traffic from the ISP to the VMG Select Upload to set a limit on the upstream traffic from the VMG to the ISP If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control the VMG resets the statistics Data Budget kPackets Select this and specify how much downstream and or upstream data in k Packets can be transmitted via the 3G connection within one month Select Download Upload to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions Select Download to set a limit
79. address specified in this field If this field is left blank the VMG does not send logs via E mail Send Alarm to Alerts are real time notifications that are sent as soon as an event such as a DoS attack system error or forbidden web access attempt occurs Enter the E mail address where the alert messages will be sent Alerts include system errors attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites If this field is left blank alert messages will not be sent via E mail Alarm Interval Specify how often the alarm should be updated Allowed Set what percent of the VMG s log storage space can be filled before the VMG sends a log e Capacity Before mail Email Clear log after Select this to delete all the logs after the VMG sends an E mail of the logs sending mail Active Log and Alert System Log Select the categories of system logs that you want to record Security Log Select the categories of security logs that you want to record Send Select log categories for which you want the VMG to send E mail alerts immediately immediate alert Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 36 2 1 Example E mail Log An End of Log message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent The following is an example of a log sent by e mail You may edit the subject title The date format here is Day Month Year The d
80. alias and public static IP Subnet STB Vendor ID Use this screen to have the VMG automatically create static DHCP entries for Set Top Box STB devices when they request IP addresses Wake on Lan Use this screen to remotely turn on a device on the local network TFTP Server Use DHCP option 66 to identify a TFTP server name Name VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 27 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary continued LINK TAB FUNCTION Routing Static Route Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the VMG DNS Route Use this screen to forward DNS queries for certain domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server s Policy Use this screen to configure policy routing on the VMG Forwarding RIP Use this screen to configure Routing Information Protocol to exchange routing information with other routers QoS General Use this screen to enable QoS and traffic prioritizing You can also configure the QoS rules and actions Queue Setup Use this screen to configure QoS queues Class Setup Use this screen to define a classifier Policer Setup Use these screens to configure QoS policers NAT Port Forwarding Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world Applications Use this screen to configure servers behind the VMG Port Triggering Use this screen to change your VMG s port triggerin
81. any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Certifications The following information applies if you use the product within Canada area Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian CES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to
82. applications 195 IP alias 196 example 195 global 194 IGA 194 ILA 194 inside 194 IPSec 262 local 194 outside 194 port forwarding 182 port number 196 services 196 SIP ALG 190 activation 191 traversal 262 NAT example 197 negotiation mode 261 Network Address Translation see NAT Network Map 73 network map 27 NNTP 196 non proxy calls 279 O OK response 287 288 outside header 260 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 394 Index P Pairwise Master Key PMK 369 371 passwords 23 24 PBC 132 Peak Cell Rate PCR 102 peer to peer calls 279 Per Hop Behavior see PHB 176 PHB 176 291 phone functions 295 PIN WPS 132 example 134 Ping of Death 224 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 196 POP3 196 port forwarding 182 ports 20 Power Mgmt 219 Power Mgmt Add 222 PPPoE 101 Benefits 101 PPTP 196 preamble 124 127 preamble mode 131 prefix delegation 82 pre shared key 264 Printer Server 216 printer sharing 65 and LAN 216 configuration 65 requirements 216 private IP address 154 product registration 388 PSK 369 push button 22 Push Button Configuration see PBC push button WPS 132 Q QoS 163 176 290 marking 164 setup 163 tagging 164 versus CoS 163 Quality of Service see QoS R RADIUS 366 message types 366 messages 366 shared secret key 366 RADIUS server 128 Real time Transport Protocol see RTP registration product 388 remote management TR 069 319
83. authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords the passwords must be stored Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file In addition it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication Finally MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption EAP TLS Transport Layer Security With EAP TLS digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication The server presents a certificate to the client After validating the identity of the server the client sends a different certificate to the server The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender s identity However to implement EAP TLS you need a Certificate Authority CA to handle certificates which imposes a management overhead EAP TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Service EAP TTLS is an extension of the EAP TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server side authentications to establish a secure connection Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection thus client identity is protected For client authe
84. calls are unanswered No Answer Call Forward Disable Enter the key combinations that you can enter to turn the no answer call forward function off Call Forward Enter the key combinations that you can enter to forward incoming calls to the phone Waiting Disable Do Not Disturb Enable When Busy number you specified in the SIP gt SIP Account screen if the phone port is busy Enable Call Forward Enter the key combinations that you can enter to turn the busy forward function off When Busy Disable One Shot Call Enter the key combinations that you can enter to activate call waiting on the next calls Waiting Enable One Shot Call Enter the key combinations that you can enter to deactivate call waiting on the next call only Enter the key combinations that you can enter to set your phone not to ring when someone calls you Do Not Disturb Disable Enter the key combinations that you can enter to turn this function off Call Completion Enter the key combinations that you can enter to disable CCBS on a call on Busy Subscriber CCBS Deactivate Outgoing SIP Enter the key combinations that you can enter to select the SIP account that you use to make outgoing calls If you enter 12 by default lt SIP account index number gt lt the phone number you want to call gt 1201 12345678 for example the VMG uses the first SIP account to call 12345678 Dial Plan Dial Plan Select this to ac
85. configure the WAN connection Click the Delete icon to remove the WAN connection VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 84 Chapter 6 Broadband 6 2 1 Add Edit Internet Connection Click Add New WAN Interface in the Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to an existing WAN interface to configure a WAN connection The screen varies depending on the interface type mode encapsulation and IPv6 IPv4 mode you select 6 2 1 1 Routing Mode Use Routing mode if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account The following example screen displays when you select the ADSL VDSL over ATM connection type Routing mode and PPPoE encapsulation The screen varies when you select other interface type encapsulation and IPv6 IPv4 mode Figure 19 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit Routing Mode WAN Configuration x General Active Name Type ADSL VDSL over PTM v Mode Routing Y Encapsulation PPPoE v IPv6 IPv4 Mode IPv4 Only v PPP Information PPP User Name PPP Password password unmask PPP Trigger Type Auto Connect Connect on Demand Manual Idle Timeout minutes 5 PPPoE Service Name PPPoE Passthrough IP Address 5 Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 Routing Feature NAT Enable IGMP Proxy Enable Apply as Default Gateway DNS server DNS D
86. each of the two devices When WPS is activated on a device it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated Then the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves 7 10 9 1 Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration PBC is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS enabled device and allowing them to connect automatically You do not need to enter any information Not every WPS enabled device has a physical WPS button Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button 1 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another 2 Look for a WPS button on each device If the device does not have one log into its configuration utility and locate the button see the device s User s Guide for how to do this for the VMG see Section 7 6 on page 119 3 Press the button on one of the devices it doesn t matter which For the VMG you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds 4 Within two minutes press the button on the other device The registrar sends the network name SSID and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee If you need to make sure that WPS worked check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successf
87. encoded PKCS 7 Certificate File Path Enable Trusted CA for 802 1x Authentication x Choose File No file chosen OK Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 99 Trusted CA Import Certificate LABEL Certificate File Path Enable Trusted CA for 802 1x Authentication DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the certificate you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it If you select this checkbox the trusted CA will be used for 802 1x authentication The selected trusted CA will be displayed in the Network Setting gt Broadband gt 802 1x Edit screen Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the VMG OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 249 Chapter 21 Certificates VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 250 VPN 22 1 Overview A virtual private network VPN provides secure communications over the the Internet Internet Protocol Security IPSec is a standards based VPN that provides confidentiality data integrity and authentication This chapter shows you how to configure the VMG s VPN settings Figure 129 IPSec Fields Summary Er Remote Network ee 22 2 The IPSec VPN Setup Screen Use this screen to view and manage your VPN tunnel policies The following figure helps ex
88. enrollee the device that receives network and security settings The registrar creates a secure EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol tunnel and sends the network name SSID and the WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK pre shared key to the enrollee Whether WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices If the registrar is already part of a network it sends the existing information If not it generates the SSID and WPA 2 PSK randomly The following figure shows a WPS enabled client installed in a notebook computer connecting to a WPS enabled access point VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 134 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 45 How WPS works ACTIVATE ACTIVATE WPS WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES C O WPS HANDSHAKE c K Ke o S ENROLLEE REGISTRAR SECURE TUNNEL J 4 7 GD md SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION N C 4 The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active two minutes The next time you use WPS a different device can be the registrar if necessary The WPS connection process is like a handshake only two devices participate in each WPS transaction If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device Note that the access point AP is not always the registrar and the wireless client is not always the enrollee All WPS certified APs can be a registrar and s
89. exactly the same function you can use one or the other Note It doesn t matter which button is pressed first You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 43 Chapter 4 Tutorials The VMG sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client This may take up to two minutes The wireless client is then able to communicate with the VMG securely The following figure shows you an example of how to set up a wireless network and its security by pressing a button on both VMG and wireless client Wireless Client Device WITHIN 2 MINUTES A Press and hold for 5 seconds SECURITY INFO CED 4 nnunmummmmmmmmumm COMMUNICATION amp i PIN Configuration When you use the PIN configuration method you need to use both the VMG s web configurator and the wireless client s utility Launch your wireless client s configuration utility Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number Log into VMG s web configurator and go to the Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS screen Enable the WPS function and click Apply VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 44 Chapter 4 Tutorials Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS lets you set up wireless security easily Select a method for establishing a WPS connection between the router and another WPS compatible device 2 4GHz WP
90. example of your computer and map it to queue 7 Note QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the VMG Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the VMG DSL 10 000 kbps Your computer IP 192 168 1 23 and or MAC AA FF AA FF AA FF Email traffic Highest priority A colleague s computer Other traffic Automatic classifier 1 Click Network Setting QoS General and select Enable Set your WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth to 10 000 kbps or leave this blank to have the VMG automatically determine this figure Click Apply VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 53 Chapter 4 Tutorials Qos Enable C Disable settings are invalid when disabled WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth fi 0000 kbps LAN Managed Downstream Bandwidth kbps Upstream traffic priority Assigned by None xi B Note You can assign the upstream bandwidth manually If the field is empty the CPE sets the value automatically If Enable QoS checkbox is selected choose a default DSCP mark to automatically mark incoming traffic without reference to a particular classifier If the setting of WAN managed upstream bandwidth is greater than current WAN interface linkup rate then the WAN managed upstream bandwidth will become current WAN interface linkup rate sooty Cancel Click Queue Setup gt Add new Queue to cr eate a new queue In the screen that opens check Act
91. faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 387 Appendix E Legal Information Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor
92. into the text box to store it on the VMG Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 21 4 The Trusted CA Screen Click Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA to open the following screen This screen displays a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the VMG to accept as trusted The VMG accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as being trustworthy thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities Figure 126 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA Trusted CA B Note Certification Authority CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner In Trusted CA you can save the certificates oftrusted CAs Maximum 4 certificates can be stored Import Certificate en Ed a HH Pr Pr Maximum 4 certificates can be stored Name Subject Type Modify The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 97 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA LABEL DESCRIPTION Import Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification Certificate authority that you trust to the VMG This is the index number of the entry Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate Subject T
93. into two schedule rules For example for a time period from 10 00 PM to the next day s 8 00 AM you can set one schedule for 22 00 23 59 and another schedule for 00 00 08 00 Description Enter more information for this rule here Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 222 17 Firewall 17 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the VMG s security settings Use the firewall to protect your VMG and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it By default the firewall allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN The following figure illustrates the default firewall action User A can initiate an IM Instant Messaging session from the LAN to the WAN 1 Return traffic for this session is also allowed 2 However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked 3 and 4 Figure 108 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN 17 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen to configure the security level of the firewall on the VMG Section 17 2 on page 225 Use the Protocol screen to add or remove predefined Internet services and configure firewall rules Section 17 3 on page 225 Use the Access Control screen to view and
94. is an application or a computer that runs such an application to receive forward and deliver e mail messages To have the VMG send reports logs or notifications via e mail you must specify an e mail server and the e mail addresses of the sender and receiver 35 2 The Email Notification Screen Click Maintenance gt Email Notification to open the Email Notification screen Use this screen to view remove and add mail server information on the VMG Figure 169 Maintenance gt Email Notification Add email to set email notification for logs 3G Backup VOIP and Wireless Add New Email B Note Mail Server Address Username Password Email Address Remove E mail notification only support the e mail server using port 25 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 141 Maintenance gt Email Notification LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New Email Click this button to create a new entry Mail Server This field displays the server name or the IP address of the mail server Address Username This field displays the user name of the sender s mail account Password This field displays the password of the sender s mail account Email Address This field displays the e mail address that you want to be in the from sender line of the e mail that the VMG sends Delete Click this button to delete the selected entry ies VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 327 Chapter 3
95. is an approximate value The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Network Setting gt Broadband gt 3G Backup Enable Disable per month er month of month minutes Apply Cancel LABEL DESCRIPTION General 3G Backup Select Enable to have the VMG use the 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails Ping Check Select Enable if you want the VMG to ping check the connection status of your WAN You can configure the frequency of the ping check and number of consecutive failures before triggering 3G backup Check Cycle Enter the frequency of the ping check in this field Consecutive Enter how many consecutive failures are required before 3G backup is triggered PING Fail Ping Default Select this to have the VMG ping the WAN interface s default gateway IP address Gateway Ping the Host Select this to have the VMG ping the particular host name or IP address you typed in this field 3G Connection Settings Card This field displays the manufacturer and model name of your 3G card if you inserted one in description the VMG Otherwise it displays N A VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 92 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 10 Network Setting gt Broadband gt 3G Backup continued following static DNS IP address LABEL DESCRIPTION Username Type the user name of up to 64 ASC
96. key password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP and LEAP Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802 1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication By using EAP to interact with an EAP compatible RADIUS server an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP s that supports IEEE 802 1x For EAP TLS authentication type you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate s from a certificate authority CA A certificate also called digital IDs can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner EAP MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 5 MD5 authentication is the simplest one way authentication method The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information Password is not sent in plain text However MD5 authentication has some weaknesses Since the
97. level Source Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation A blank source IP address means any source IP address Subnet Enter the source subnet mask Netmask Port Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field select the check box and enter the port number s of the source MAC Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet s MAC address should match Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic s MAC address should match Enter 0 for the bit s of the matched traffic s MAC address which can be of any hexadecimal character s For example if you set the MAC address to 00 13 49 00 00 00 and the mask to ff ff ff 00 00 00 a packet with a MAC address of 00 13 49 12 34 56 matches this criteria Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Destination Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation A blank source IP address means any source IP address Subnet Enter the source subnet mask Netmask Port Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field select the check box and enter the port number s of the source MAC Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to deter
98. maps packets coming to that external IP address and port to the internal IP address and port IGMP Proxy Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP is a network layer protocol used to establish Enable membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data Select this option to have the VMG act as an IGMP proxy on this connection This allows the VMG to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traffic significantly Apply as Select this option to have the VMG use the WAN interface of this connection as the system Default default gateway Gateway DNS Server This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6 IPv4 DualStack in the IPv6 IPv4 Mode field DNS Select Obtain DNS I nfo Automically if you want the VMG to use the DNS server addresses assigned by your ISP Select Use Following Static DNS Address if you want the VMG to use the DNS server addresses you configure manually DNS server1 Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP DNS server 2 Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP Tunnel This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or I Pv6 Only in the IPv6 IPv4 Mode field The DS Lite Dual Stack Lite fields display when you set the I Pv6 I Pv4 Mode field to IPv6 Only Enable Dual Stack Lite to let local computers use IPv4 through an ISP s IPv6 network See Dual Stack Lite on page 82 fo
99. not respond the client sends a Rebind message to any available server S2 For an lA TA the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client s discretion T2 Tl M l 6 S1 vfo S2 ee d to S1 to S to S DHCP Relay Agent A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages between the DHCP server and clients When a client cannot use its link local address and a well known multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network it then needs a DHCP relay agent to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification remote ID option and the interface ID option to the Relay Forward DHCPv6 messages The remote ID option carries a user defined string such as the system name The interface ID option provides slot number port information and the VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server The remote ID option if any is stripped from the Relay Reply messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients The DHCP server copies the interface ID option from the Relay Forward message into the Relay Reply message and sends it to the relay agent The interface ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts Prefix Delegation ICMPv6 Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix network address received from the ISP or a connected uplink router for its LAN The VMG
100. of 8 Mbit s downstream and 800 kbit s upstream AnnexL ADSL2 Annex L is an optional specification in the ITU T ADSL2 recommendation G 992 3 titled Specific requirements for a Reach Extended ADSL2 READSL2 system operating in the frequency band above POTS therefore it is often referred to as Reach Extended ADSL2 or READSL2 The main difference between this specification and commonly deployed Annex A is the maximum distance that can be used The power of the lower frequencies used for transmitting data is boosted up to increase the reach of this signal up to 7 kilometers 23 000 ft ADSL2 extends the capability of basic ADSL by doubling the number of downstream channels The data rates can be as high as 24 Mbit s downstream and up to 1 4 Mbit s upstream depending on the distance from the DSLAM to the customer s premises AnnexM Annex M is an optional specification in ITU T recommendations G 992 3 ADSL2 and G 992 5 ADSL2 also referred to as ADSL2 M and ADSL2 M This specification extends the capability of commonly deployed Annex A by more than doubling the number of upstream bits The data rates can be as high as 12 or 24 Mbit s downstream and 3 Mbit s upstream depending on the distance from the DSLAM to the customer s premises VDSL Profile VDSL2 profiles differ in the width of the frequency band used to transmit the broadband signal Profiles that use a wider frequency band can deliver higher maximum speeds
101. of your VMG Status This displays whether WLAN is activated SSID This is the descriptive name used to identify the VMG in a wireless LAN Channel This is the channel number used by the VMG now Security This displays the type of security mode the VMG is using in the wireless LAN 802 11 Mode This displays the type of 802 11 mode the VMG is using in the wireless LAN WPS This displays whether WPS is activated Security Firewall This displays the firewall s current security level System Status VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 75 Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens Table 5 Status Screen continued LABEL DESCRIPTION System Up This field displays how long the VMG has been running since it last started up The VMG Time starts up when you plug it in when you restart it Maintenance gt Reboot or when you reset it Current Date Time This field displays the current date and time in the VMG You can change this in Maintenance gt Time Setting System Resource CPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the VMG s processing ability is currently used When this percentage is close to 10096 the VMG is running at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications for example using QoS see Chapter 10 on page 163 Memory Usage This field displa
102. on the Protocol f the Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number f the Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 383 Appendix D Services Table 156 Examples of Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH IPSEC_TUNNEL User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header tunneling protocol uses this service AIM TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP UDP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software TCP UDP 24032 DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names for instance www zyxel com to IP numbers ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security Protocol IPSEC TUNNEL tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Protocol a program to enable fast transfer of files including large files that may not TCP 21 be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyp
103. on the downstream traffic from the ISP to the VMG Select Upload to set a limit on the upstream traffic from the VMG to the ISP If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control the VMG resets the statistics Reset all budget counters on Select the date on which the VMG resets the budget every month Select last if you want the VMG to reset the budget on the last day of the month Select specific and enter the number of the date you want the VMG to reset the budget Reset time and data budget counters Click this button to reset the time and data budgets immediately The count starts over with the 3G connection s full configured monthly time and data budgets This does not affect the normal monthly budget restart so if you configured the time and data budget counters to reset on the second day of the month and you use this button on the first the time and data budget counters will still reset on the second Actions before over budget Specify the actions the VMG takes before the time or data limit exceeds Enable of time budget data budget Mbytes data budget kPackets Select Enable and enter a number from 1 to 99 in the percentage fields If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control the VMG resets the statistics Actions when over budget Specify the actions the VMG takes when the time or data limit is exceeded Current 3G Select Kee
104. outside denotes where a host is located relative to the VMG for example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts Global Local Global local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router for example the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 181 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT NAT In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside behind NAT on the LAN servers for example web or FTP that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world Finding Out More See Section 11 9 on page 193 for advanced technical information on NAT 11 2 The Port Forwarding Screen Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to th
105. performs a software restart of the device Ittakes a few minutes before you can log into the device again after reboot System Reboot Reboot VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 339 Diagnostic 39 1 Overview The Diagnostic screens display information to help you identify problems with the VMG The route between a CO VDSL switch and one of its CPE may go through switches owned by independent organizations A connectivity fault point generally takes time to discover and impacts subscriber s network access In order to eliminate the management and maintenance efforts IEEE 802 1ag is a Connectivity Fault Management CFM specification which allows network administrators to identify and manage connection faults Through discovery and verification of the path CFM can detect analyze and isolate connectivity faults in bridged LANs 39 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Ping amp TraceRoute amp NsLookup screen lets you ping an IP address or trace the route packets take to a host Section 39 3 on page 341 The 802 1ag screen lets you perform CFM actions Section 39 5 on page 342 The OAM Ping screen lets you send an ATM OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance packet to verify the connectivity of a specific PVC Section 39 5 on page 342 39 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter How CFM Works A Maintenance Association MA defines a VL
106. phone port This is the phone port on which you received the call Missed means the call was unanswered phone number duration This is the SIP number that called you This displays how long the call lasted 23 10 Technical Reference This section contains background material relevant to the Vol P screens VoIP VoIP is the sending of voice signals over Internet Protocol This allows you to make phone calls and send faxes over the Internet at a fraction of the cost of using the traditional circuit switched telephone network You can also use servers to run telephone service applications like PBX services and voice mail Internet Telephony Service Provider ITSP companies provide VoIP service VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 282 Chapter 23 Voice Circuit switched telephone networks require 64 kilobits per second Kbps in each direction to handle a telephone call Vol P can use advanced voice coding techniques with compression to reduce the required bandwidth SIP The Session Initiation Protocol SIP is an application layer control signaling protocol that handles the setting up altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet SIP signaling is separate from the media for which it handles sessions The media that is exchanged during the session can use a different path from that of the signaling SIP handles telephone calls and can interface with traditional circuit sw
107. ready for use Blinking The VMG is self testing Red On The VMG detected an error while self testing or there is a device malfunction Off The VMG is not receiving power DSL Green On The ADSL line is up Blinking The VMG is initializing the ADSL line Orange On The VDSL line is up Blinking The VMG is initializing the VDSL line Off The DSL line is down VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 20 Chapter 1 Introducing the VMG Table 1 LED Descriptions continued LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION INTERNET Green On The VMG has an IP connection but no traffic Your device has a WAN IP address either static or assigned by a DHCP server PPP negotiation was successfully completed if used and the DSL connection is up Blinking The VMG is sending or receiving IP traffic Off There is no Internet connection or the gateway is in bridged mode Red On The VMG attempted to make an IP connection but failed Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server no PPPoE response PPPoE authentication failed LAN Green On The VMG has a successful 100 Mbps Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network LAN Blinking The VMG is sending or receiving data to from the LAN at 100 Mbps Off The VMG does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN WiFi 2 4G Green On The 2 4 GHz wireless network is activated Blinking The VMG is communicating with other wi
108. s Guide 227 Chapter 17 Firewall 17 4 The Access Control Screen Click Security gt Firewall gt Access Control to display the following screen This screen displays a list of the configured incoming or outgoing filtering rules Figure 112 Security gt Firewall gt Access Control General Protocol E Z jer 7 Dos An ACL rule is a manually defined rule to accept reject or drop the incoming or outgoing data of your network You may need to create at least one Protocol entry in order to add an ACL rule Rules Storage Space usage 0 Add New ACL Rule Name Src IP Dst IP Service Action Modify B Note When creating a rule causes inaccessible devices please restore to the factory defaults The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 Security gt Firewall gt Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new ACL Click this to go to add a filter rule for incoming or outgoing IP traffic rule This is the index number of the entry Name This displays the name of the rule Src IP This displays the source IP addresses to which this rule applies Please note that a blank source address is equivalent to Any Dst IP This displays the destination IP addresses to which this rule applies Please note that a blank destination address is equivalent to Any Service This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service and the direction of traffic to which this rule
109. segment F4 flows VCI 23 e end to end F4 flows VCI 4 segment F5 flows PTI 2100 end to end F5 flows PTI 2101 OAM F4 or F5 tests are used to check virtual path or virtual channel availability between two DSL devices Segment flows are terminated at the connecting point which terminates a VP or VC segment End to end flows are terminated at the end point of a VP or VC connection where an ATM link is terminated Segment loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of a PVC to the nearest neighboring ATM device End to end loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of an end to end PVC Note The DSLAM to which the VMG is connected must also support ATM F4 and or F5 to use this test Note This screen is available only when you configure an ATM layer 2 interface VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 343 Chapter 39 Diagnostic Info OAM Ping is a computer network administration utility used to test ADSL connection status Figure 186 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt OAM Ping OAM Ping VPICI undefined Y F4 segment F4 end end F5 segment F5 end end The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 148 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt OAM Ping LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a PVC on which you want to perform the loopback test F4 segment Press this to perform an OAM F4 segment loopback test F4 end end Press this to perform an OAM F4 end to end loopback test F5
110. shows the service s name WAN Interface This shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded WAN IP This field displays the incoming packet s destination IP address Server IP This is the server s IP address Address Start Port This is the first external port number that identifies a service VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 183 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Table 54 Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION End Port This is the last external port number that identifies a service Translation This is the first internal port number that identifies a service Start Port Translation End This is the last internal port number that identifies a service Port Protocol This shows the IP protocol supported by this virtual server whether it is TCP UDP or TCP UDP Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule 11 2 1 Add Edit Port Forwarding Click Add new rule in the Port Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to open the following screen Figure 75 Port Forwarding Add Edit Add new rule x Active Service Name WAN Interface VDSL M WAN IP Trigger Start Port End Port Translation Start Port Translation End Port Server IP Address 192 168 1 Protocol TCP v Wake up this target
111. slot and NoDevice when no device is detected in any USB slot Registration Status Account This column displays each SIP account in the VMG Action If the SIP account is already registered with the SIP server the Account Status field displays Registered Click Unregister to delete the SIP account s registration in the SIP server This does not cancel your SIP account but it deletes the mapping between your SIP identity and your IP address or domain name If the SIP account is not registered with the SIP server the Account Status field displays Not Registered Click Register to have the VMG attempt to register the SIP account with the SIP server The button is grayed out if the SIP account is disabled VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 76 Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens Table 5 Status Screen continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Account Status This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account You have to register SIP accounts with a SIP server to use VoIP Inactive The SIP account is not active You can activate it in VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account Not Registered The last time the VMG tried to register the SIP account with the SIP server the attempt failed Use the Register button to register the account again The VMG automatically tries to register the SIP account when you turn on the VMG or when you activate it Registered The SIP acco
112. software It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism Use the strongest security mechanism that all the wireless devices in your network support For example use WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK if all your wireless devices support it or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices support it and you have a RADIUS server If your wireless devices support nothing stronger than WEP use the highest encryption level available Your VMG allows you to configure up to four 64 bit or 128 bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time In order to configure and enable WEP encryption click Network Setting gt Wireless to display the General screen then select Basic as the security level Figure 30 Wireless gt General Basic WEP Security Level Basic aracters 0 9 A F racters 0 9 A F WEP Encryption VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 111 Chapter 7 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Wireless gt General Basic WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Level Select Basic to enable WEP data encryption Generate password automatically Select this option to have the VMG automatically generate a password The password field will not be configurable when you select this option Password 1 4 The password WEP keys are used to encrypt data Both the VMG and the wireless stations must use the same pass
113. someone press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone 2 Diala phone number directly to make another call 3 When the second call is answered press the flash key and press 3 to create a three way conversation 4 Hang up the phone to drop the connection 5 Ifyou want to separate the activated three way conference into two individual connections one is on line the other is on hold press the flash key and press 2 23 10 2 3 USA Type Supplementary Services This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the USA Type Call Service Mode Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 293 Chapter 23 Voice After pressing the flash key if you do not issue the sub command before the default sub command timeout 2 seconds expires or issue an invalid sub command the current operation will be aborted Table 121 USA Flash Key Commands COMMAND SUB COMMAND DESCRIPTION Flash Put a current call on hold to place a second call After the second call is successful press the flash key again to have a three way conference call Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call Flash 983t Transfer the call to another phone USA Call Hold Call hold allows you to put a call A on hold by pressing the flash key If you have another call press the flash key to switch back and forth between ca
114. the VMG s Wireless screens Use these screens to set up your VMG s wireless connection Use the General screen to enable the Wireless LAN enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode Section 7 2 on page 108 Use the Guest More AP screen to set up multiple wireless networks on your VMG Section 7 3 on page 114 Use the MAC Authentication screen to allow or deny wireless clients based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the VMG Section 7 4 on page 117 Use the WPS screen to enable or disable WPS view or generate a security PIN Personal Identification Number Section 7 5 on page 118 Use the WMM screen to enable Wi Fi MultiMedia WMM to ensure quality of service in wireless networks for multimedia applications Section 7 6 on page 119 Use the WDS screen to set up a Wireless Distribution System in which the VMG acts as a bridge with other ZyXEL access points Section 7 7 on page 120 Use the Others screen to configure wireless advanced features such as the RTS CTS Threshold Section 7 8 on page 122 Use the Channel Status screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results Section 7 9 on page 124 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 107 Chapter 7 Wireless 7 1 2 What You Need to Know Wireless Basics Wireless is essentially radio communication In the same way that walkie talkie radios send and receive information over the airwaves wireless networking devices e
115. the VMG to accept the first choice Select the VMG s third choice for voice coder decoder Select None if you only want the VMG to accept the first or second choice Speaking Volume Control Select the loudness that the VMG uses for speech that it sends to the peer device 12 is the quietest and 12 is the loudest Listening Volume Control Select the loudness that the VMG uses for speech that it receives from the peer device 12 is the quietest and 12 is the loudest Enable G 168 Echo Cancellation Enable VAD Voice Active Detector Call Features Select this if you want to eliminate the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk Select this if the VMG should stop transmitting when you are not speaking This reduces the bandwidth the VMG uses VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 269 Chapter 23 Voice Table 109 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Account gt Add new accoun Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Send Caller ID Select this if you want to send identification when you make VoIP phone calls Clear this if you do not want to send identification Reject Timer Enable Call Select this to enable call transfer on the VMG This allows you to transfer an Transfer incoming call that you have answered to another phone Enable Call Select this to enable call waiting on the VMG This allows you to place a call on Wa
116. the call invitation to client device C VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 285 Chapter 23 Voice Figure 148 SIP Redirect Server zl SS SN Ao C SIP Register Server A SIP register server maintains a database of SIP identity to IP address or domain name mapping The register server checks your user name and password when you register RTP When you make a VoIP call using SIP the RTP Real time Transport Protocol is used to handle voice data transfer See RFC 1889 for details on RTP Pulse Code Modulation Pulse Code Modulation PCM measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into bits SIP Call Progression The following figure displays the basic steps in the setup and tear down of a SIP call A calls B Table 117 SIP Call Progression A B 1 INVITE ee ____ 2 Ringing lt lt 3 OK 4 ACK e 5 Dialogue voice traffic VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 286 Chapter 23 Voice Table 117 SIP Call Progression continued A B 6 BYE _ _ 4 7 OK A sends a SIP INVITE request to B This message is an invitation for B to participate in a SIP telephone call B sends a response indicating that the telephone is ringing B sends an OK response after the call is answered A then sends an ACK message to acknowledge that
117. the identity of the users Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network Accounting Keeps track of the client s network activity RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication Access Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication Access Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access Access Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access Access Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access Request message The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting Accounting Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting Accounting Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting In order to ensure network security the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key which is a password they both know The key is not sent over the network In addition to the VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 366 Appendix B Wireless LANs shared
118. the labels in this screen Table 94 Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates LABEL DESCRIPTION Private Key is protected by a password Select the checkbox and enter the private key into the text box to store it on the VMG The private key should not exceed 63 ASCII characters not including spaces Browse Click this to find the certificate file you want to upload Import Certificate Click this button to save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification authority from your computer to the VMG Create Certificate Request Click this button to go to the screen where you can have the VMG generate a certification request Current File This field displays the name used to identify this certificate It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate s owner such as CN Common Name OU Organizational Unit or department O Organization or company and C Country It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate s issuing certification authority such as a common name organizational unit or department organization or company and country Valid From Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable The text displays in red and includes a No
119. traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol a trigger port When the VMG s WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol open port the VMG forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request After that computer s connection for that service closes another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application For example Figure 78 Trigger Port Forwarding Process Example Jane s E computer N Xm Ei J Internet iaa Real Audio Server 1 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server port 7070 2 Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the VMG to record Jane s computer IP address The VMG associates Jane s computer IP address with the open port range of 6970 7170 3 The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970 7170 4 The VMG forwards the traffic to Jane s computer IP address 5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out The VMG times out in three minutes with UDP User Datagram Protocol or two hours with TCP IP Transfer Control Protocol I nternet Protocol Click Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Triggering to open the following screen Use this screen to view your VMG s trigger port settings VMG53
120. uses the received IPv6 prefix for example 2001 db2 48 to generate its LAN IP address Through sending Router Advertisements RAs regularly by multicast the VMG passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts The hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6 is defined in RFC 4443 ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58 which is different from the value used to identify ICMP for IPv4 ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6 IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions such as ping Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP The Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP is a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices and track neighbor s reachability in a network An IPv6 device uses the following ICMPv6 messages types Neighbor solicitation A request from a host to determine a neighbor s link layer address MAC address and detect if the neighbor is still reachable A neighbor being reachable means it responds to a neighbor solicitation message from the host with a neighbor advertisement message VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 378 Appendix C IPv6 Neighbor advertisement A response from a node to announce its link layer address Router solicitation A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and forward packets Router adv
121. want to link to Once the security settings of peer sides match one another the connection between devices is made At the time of writing WDS security is compatible with other ZyXEL access points only Refer to your other access point s documentation for details The following figure illustrates how WDS link works between APs Notebook computer A is a wireless client connecting to access point AP 1 AP 1 has no wired Internet connection but it can establish a WDS link with access point AP 2 which has a wired Internet connection When AP 1 has a WDS link with AP 2 the notebook computer can access the Internet through AP 2 Figure 43 WDS Link Example DE S amp S INTERNEJ AP 2 7 10 9 WiFi Protected Setup WPS Your VMG supports WiFi Protected Setup WPS which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network WPS is an industry standard specification defined by the WiFi Alliance WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Each WPS connection works between two devices Both devices must support WPS check each device s documentation to make sure VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 131 Chapter 7 Wireless Depending on the devices you have you can either press a button on the device itself or in its configuration utility or enter a PIN a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other in
122. which makes them run more smoothly WMM Automatic Power Save Delivery Select this option to extend the battery life of your mobile devices especially useful for small devices that are running multimedia applications The VMG goes to sleep mode to save power when it is not transmitting data The AP buffers the packets sent to the VMG until the VMG wakes up The VMG wakes up periodically to check for incoming data Note Note This works only if the wireless device to which the VMG is connected also supports this feature Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 7 7 The WDS Screen An AP using the Wireless Distribution System WDS can function as a wireless network bridge allowing you to wirelessly connect two wired network segments The WDS screen allows you to configure the VMG to connect to two or more APs wirelessly when WDS is enabled Use this screen to set up your WDS Wireless Distribution System links between the VMG and other wireless APs You need to know the MAC address of the peer device Once the security settings of peer sides match one another the connection between devices is made Note WDS security is independent of the security settings between the VMG and any wireless clients Note At the time of writing WDS is compatible with other ZyXEL APs only Not all models support WDS links Check your other AP s documentation
123. will be made immediately Any digit 0 9 after the 9 character will be ignored In this example dial plan 0 49 11 1 2 9 xx xxxxxxx 1 947 xxxxxxx you can dial 0 to call the local operator call 411 or 911 or make a long distance call with an area code starting from 2 to 9 in the US The calls with the area code 947 will be dropped Use the SIP Service Provider Add Edit screen to configure a SIP service provider on the VMG Click the Add new provider button or an Edit icon in the Vol P gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider to open the following screen Note Click more to see all the fields in the screen You don t necessarily need to use all these fields to set up your account Click less to see and configure only the fields needed for this feature VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 273 Chapter 23 Voice Figure 140 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider gt Add new provider Edit SIP Service Provider Selection Service Provider Selection ADD_NEW General SIP Service Provider Name changeme SIP Local Port 5060 1025 65535 SIP Server Address changeme SIP Server Port 5060 1025 65535 REGISTER Server Address changeme REGISTER Server Port 5060 1025 65535 SIP Service Domain changeme jo o RFC support Support Locating SIP Server RFC 3263 LJ RFC 3262 Require 100rel VoIP IOP Flags Replace dial digit to 23 in SIP messages Remove 5060 and tra
124. zyxel com 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 139 Maintenance gt SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION SNMP Agent Get Community Select Enable to let the VMG act as an SNMP agent which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the Device through the network Select Disable to turn this feature off Enter the Get Community which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station Set Community Enter the Set community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station System Name Enter the SNMP system name System Location Enter the SNMP system location System Contact Enter the SNMP system contact Trap Destination Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to Apply Click this to save your changes back to the VMG Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 324 Time Settings 34 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings such as system time password name the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval 34 2 The Time Screen To change your VMG s time and date click Maintenance gt Time The screen appears as shown Use this screen to configure the VMG s time based on your local time zone Figure 168 Maintenance gt
125. 0000 1a2 0000 can be written as 2001 db8 1a2b 15 0 0 1a2 0 Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address So 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0000 0000 0015 can be written as 2001 0db8 1a2 0000 0000 0015 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0015 2001 db8 1a2 0 0 15 Or 2001 db8 0 0 la2 15 IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits start from the left in the address compose the network address The prefix length is written as x where x is a number For example 2001 db8 1a2b 15 1a2 0 32 means that the first 32 bits 2001 db8 is the subnet prefix IPv6 Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128 bit binary digits which are divided into eight 16 bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character 1 10 A F Each block s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters For example FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FC00 0000 0000 0000 IPv6 Rapid Deployment Use IPv6 Rapid Deployment 6rd when the local network uses IPv6 and the ISP has an IPv4 network When the VMG has an IPv4 WAN address and you set I Pv6 IPv4 Mode to IPv4 Only you can enable 6rd to encapsulate IPv6 packets in IPv4 packets to cross the ISP s IPv4 net
126. 13 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 113 Chapter 7 Wireless Table 19 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 PSK continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Encryption Select the encryption type TKIP AES or TKIP AES for data encryption Select TKIP if your wireless clients can all use TKIP Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES Select TKI P AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES Group Key The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group Update Timer key out to all clients 7 3 The Guest More AP Screen This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets BSSs on the VMG Click Network Setting gt Wireless gt Guest More AP The following screen displays Figure 32 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Guest More AP This device can enable up to 4 wireless networks to work atthe same time Assign a name and a security level if needed to startthe 2nd 3rd and 4th wireless network services s inc UN ee imme The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Guest More AP LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry Status This field indicates whether this SSID is active A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is active A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active SSID An SSID profile is the se
127. 13 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 187 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT iggering Port Triggering is a way to automate port forwarding with a little better security It dynamically forwards connection or data to whatever LAN client made a certain outgoing connection Example You define port 25 as Trigger Port and port 113 as Open Port If any ofthe LAN devices on your network creates an outgoing connection via port 25 all incoming connections via port 113 will temporarily go to that client B Note 1 The sum of trigger ports in all rules must be less than 1000 and every open port range must be less than 1000 When the protocol is TCP UDP the ports are counted twice 2 The TCP port 30005 is reserved for TRO69 connection request port The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Triggering LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new rule Click this to create a new rule This is the index number of the entry Status This field displays whether the port triggering rule is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active Service Name This field displays the name of the service used by this rule WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded Trigger Start The trigger port is a port or a range of ports that causes or triggers
128. 176 Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS The following table shows you the internal layer 2 and layer 3 QoS mapping on the VMG On the VMG traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Table 53 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping LAYER 2 LAYER 3 PRIORITY IEEE 802 1P USER QUEUE PRIORITY TOS IP DSCP IP PACKET ETHERNET PRECEDENCE LENGTH BYTE PRIORITY 0 1 0 000000 1 2 2 0 0 000000 gt 1100 3 3 001110 250 1100 001100 001010 001000 4 4 2 010110 010100 010010 010000 5 5 3 011110 lt 250 011100 011010 011000 6 6 4 100110 100100 100010 100000 5 101110 101000 7 7 6 110000 7 111000 Token Bucket The token bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted The bucket stores tokens each of which represents one byte The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size so the bucket can hold up to b tokens Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate The following shows how tokens work with packets A packet can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet in bytes After a packet is transmitted a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the bucket VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 177 Chapt
129. 5 E mail Notification 35 2 1 Email Notification Edit Click the Add button in the Email Notification screen Use this screen to configure the required information for sending e mail via a mail server Figure 170 Email Notification gt Add Email Notification Email Notification Configuration Mail Server Address Authentication Username Authentication Password Account Email Address SMTP Server NAME or IP Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 142 Email Notification gt Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Mail Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e mail address specified Address in the Account Email Address field If this field is left blank reports logs or notifications will not be sent via e mail Authentication Username Enter the user name up to 32 characters This is usually the user name of a mail account you specified in the Account Email Address field Authentication Password Enter the password associated with the user name above Account Email Enter the e mail address that you want to be in the from sender line of the e mail Address notification that the VMG sends If you activate SSL TLS authentication the e mail address must be able to be authenticated by the mail server as well Apply Click this button to save your changes and return to the previous screen Cancel Click this button t
130. 5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 82 Chapter 6 Broadband 6 2 The Broadband Screen Use this screen to change your VMG s Internet access settings Click Network Setting gt Broadband from the menu The summary table shows you the configured WAN services connections on the VMG Figure 18 Network Setting gt Broadband WAN Configuration General Active Name Type Mode Encapsulation IPv6 IPv4 Mode PPP Information PPP User Name PPP Password PPP Trigger Type Idle Timeout minutes PPPoE Service Name PPPoE Passthrough IP Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Routing Feature NAT Enable IGMP Proxy Enable Apply as Default Gateway DNS server DNS DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 Tunnel Enable 6RD BRD Type IPv4 Mask Length 6RD Border Relay Server IP BRD IPv6 Prefix VLAN Active 802 1p 802 10 QoS Rate Limit WAN Outgoing Default Tag DSCP MTU MTU Size Enable Con current WAN ADSL VDSL over PTM v Routing Y PPPoE v IPv4 Only v password unmask Auto Connect Connect on Demand Manual 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Dynamic Static Enable Disable DHCP Static 074094 kbps Enable Disable 0 83 1492 MTU 68 1492 Bridge and Routing mode in the same WAN VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 83 Chapter 6 Broadband
131. 56 bit key with the DES encryption algorithm 3DES a 168 bit key with the DES encryption algorithm AES 128 a 128 bit key with the AES encryption algorithm AES 192 a 196 bit key with the AES encryption algorithm AES 256 a 256 bit key with the AES encryption algorithm Select ESP NULL to set up a tunnel without encryption When you select ESP NULL you do not enter an encryption key The VMG and the remote IPSec router must use the same key size and encryption algorithm Longer keys require more processing power resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput Integrity Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data Choices are MD5 and Algorithm SHA1 SHA is generally considered stronger than MD5 but it is also slower VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 256 Chapter 22 VPN Table 101 Security gt IPSec VPN Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS Select whether or not you want to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS PFS changes the root key that is used to generate encryption keys for each IPSec SA The longer the key the more secure the encryption but also the longer it takes to encrypt and decrypt information Both routers must use the same DH key group Choices are None do not use any random number 768bit DH Group1 use a 768 bit random number 1024bit DH Group2 use a 1024 bit random number 1536bit DH Group5 use a 1536 bit random number
132. A is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side The following table summarizes this information Table 65 NAT Definitions ITEM DESCRIPTION Inside This refers to the host on the LAN Outside This refers to the host on the WAN Local This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the LAN Global This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the WAN NAT never changes the IP address either local or global of an outside host 11 9 2 What NAT Does In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host Note that the IP address either local or global of an outside host is never changed The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP In addition you can designate servers for example a web server and a telnet server on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world If you do not define any servers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload mapping NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection Wi
133. ABEL DESCRIPTION IP Subnet Mask If you are using IPv4 and need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID Enter the IP subnet mask here Use Gateway IP The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device s LAN or WAN Address port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations If you want to use the gateway IP address select Enable Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway Address Use Interface Select the WAN interface you want to use for this static route Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 9 3 The DNS Route Screen Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the VMG Click Network Setting Routing gt DNS Route to open the following screen Figure 61 Network Setting gt Routing gt DNS Route The purpose of DNS Route is to forward DNS query and the traffic to the ip address obtained in the DNS query via the specific WAN interface Add new DNS Route Domain Name Interface Subnet Mask Modify B Note Maximum of 20 entries could be added The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 Network Setting gt Routing gt DNS Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new DNS Click this to add a new DNS route Route
134. AN and associated Maintenance End Point MEP ports on the device under a Maintenance Domain MD level An MEP port has the ability to send Connectivity Check Messages CCMs and get other MEP ports information from neighbor devices CCMs within an MA CFM provides two tests to discover connectivity faults Loopback test checks if the MEP port receives its Loop Back Response LBR from its target after it sends the Loop Back Message LBM If no response is received there might be a connectivity fault between them Link trace test provides additional connectivity fault analysis to get more information on where the fault is If an MEP port does not respond to the source MEP this may indicate a fault Administrators can take further action to check and resume services from the fault according to the line connectivity status report VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 340 Chapter 39 Diagnostic 39 3 Ping amp TraceRoute amp NsLookup Use this screen to ping traceroute or nslookup an IP address Click Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt Ping amp TraceRoute amp NsLookup to open the screen shown next Figure 183 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt Ping amp TraceRoute amp NsLookup Diagnostic Ping amp Traceroute amp Nslookup 802 1 ag O 1Ping Ping and TraceRoute are network utilities used to test whether a particular host is reachable Enter either an IP address or a host name and click one ofthe buttons to start a P
135. Add New User Sipe ic ccisceicciaceiessessanreasstarns ceestdodistasdsasccantinteatiapueauantaayeerebeceuneaetcaniuces 214 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 9 Table of Contents 15 9 me Modia Sarver SC icc pedites tede tope eL SOR ERE euet soe I deat opad a de ud Eat E lo rdi dua eL E E RR 215 TEST PIM OMRON E EENT N AI T PIE IEA ANE Vert PU Mc abun T NE IE AINEEN E A NEA FE pid S 216 T5451 Before YOU Begi 216 1542 The PEL SGIVER rO usd eo uta CL erat a qued cee tes ees asd edet Lie tenders Pr kt E e cd aus 217 Chapter 16 Power Management AXX C A CO 219 15 1 NVR cass ce aainteneaies ebdmda tmd MEUM ELM LL EL ALIM eee 219 76 121 What You Can Doy IS Chapter Ludi edt pd pb ba eas de uy ei ode Feet o dtt io 219 167 2 What You Need To KNOW uuu asd cedet ede rea a Lupi Cope acne dni Papia 219 16 2 The Power Management SOIGGET i22cicsessmiceseesaescckuscduzeccuasc n ean E c o crar AERA 219 10 2 The Auto SWC ON SCHR iive pent rre a PEE Saar ets abe de ee gU ase e a er e ree d Eas 220 18 3 1 The Auto Switch Off Add or Modify Stren 2 errore tion EEEpEFE Foo a pPRoR nS REa PERI REREReP ET NAERATA 221 16 3 2 THE Add Edt RUE SORE eiorinn ck cio doa ei Ud adn Een iba buda Dr rod Fea Fd ord desit CE x lise 222 Chapter 17 FIEL AERE UO DER ERA EE AEE ANA AE ENAA en tr EE HOLDER RH ERO n EF A 223 UNES c o Mes H a 223 121 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter i a eter E
136. Add New WAN Interface screen and create a new interface for it with the Type as Ethernet and Encapsulation as I PoE and it s advisable to enable NAT You cannot have DSL Ethernet and 3G WAN connections working at the same time The order of priority for the WAN connections are 1 DSL 2 Ethernet 3 3G Click Network Setting gt Broadband gt Ethernet WAN to display the following screen You can convert your Ethernet LAN 4 port as WAN port or restore the WAN port to LAN port State Enable Disable B Note 1 State Enable the Ethernet Port is WAN Ethernet 2 State Disable the Ethernet Port is LAN Ethernet 3 Please do not connect Ethernet WAN cable and xDSL line atthe same time Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in the above screen Table 15 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Ethernet WAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Click the radio button to convert LAN port number four to a WAN port Disable Click the radio button to restore LAN port number four to a LAN port 6 7 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the VMG features described in this chapter Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP The VMG can work in bridge mode or routing mode When the VMG is in routing mode it supports the following methods VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 100 Chapter 6 Broadba
137. Address Translation NAT Figure 73 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A 192 168 1 33 LAN WAN B 192 168 1 34 ates IP Address assigned by ISP C 192 168 1 3 D 192 168 1 36 Click Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding to open the following screen See Appendix D on page 383 for port numbers commonly used for particular services Figure 74 Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding Port Forwarding Applications Port Triggering Port Forwarding is commonly used when you wantto do some Internet activities such as online gaming P2P file sharing or even hosting servers on your network It creates a bridge in order to let a party from the Internet contact a specific LAN client on your network correctly Ada Status Service WANI WANIP Server Trigger EndPort TranslationTranslationProtocol Modify Name IP Start Port Start P End Port Address 1 example VDSL 192 16 1024 1025 1024 1025 TCP g W B Note The TCP port 30005 is reserved for TROB9 connection request port The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 54 Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new rule Click this to add a new rule This is the index number of the entry is active A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active Status This field displays whether the NAT rule is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this rule Service Name This
138. Artist Album Genre f Videos Pictures Recorded TV f Other Libraries dd Music Bj Videos Pictures Recorded TV If you cannot see the VMG in the left panel as shown above right click Other Libraries Refresh Other Libraries Select a category in the left panel and wait for Windows Media Player to connect to the VMG VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 62 Chapter 4 Tutorials t4 Windows Media Player File View Play Tools GO gt VMG1312 Organize v Stream v ED Library k Playlists dd Music QJ Artist 3 Album Genre BS Videos Pictures Recorded TV f Other Libraries 4 P vme J3 Music Ej Videos Pictures Recorded TV Help gt Music gt All music Create playlist v Album i Title Length Play Burn Rating Contacting the remote media library Cancel o lc y Search Contributing artist 3 Inthe right panel you should see a list o f files available in the USB storage device File View Play Tools QU b VMG1312 Organize Stream v E Library Playlists 4 jJ Music JJ Artist Album Genre f Videos Pictures Recorded TV Other Libraries 4 P vme gt dd Music B Videos Pictures O Windows Media Player Help gt Videos gt All Videos Create playlist v ZyXEL Celebration Video Play all Play Play next Add to gt Edit Rate d
139. Auto Switch Off screen to configure schedules for turning on off interface s and or LEDs automatically Section 16 3 on page 220 16 1 2 What You Need To Know These screens are only available for the supervisor user The Power Management and Auto Switch Off screens are dependant You can only configure the on off switches of the same interface and LEDs in one of the two screens 16 2 The Power Management Screen Use this screen to manually turn on off interface s or LEDs Click Network Setting Power Management Power Management The screen appears as shown VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 219 Chapter 16 Power Management Figure 104 Network Setting gt Power Management Power Management If Auto Switch Off function of some service is disable you can turn on off the service immediately by changing the setting below However if you turn off All Lan Ports you cant connectto this GUI page anymore except reboot the device Manually Switch On Off DSL WAN POWER ON POWER OFF Ethernet WAN POWER ON POWER OFF LAN Port 1 POWER ON POWER OFF LAN Port 2 POWER ON POWER OFF LAN Port 3 POWER ON POWER OFF LAN Port 4 POWER ON POWER OFF LED POWER ON POWER OFF Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 79 Network Setting gt Power Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Manually Select POWER ON or POWER OFF to turn on off the interface or LED lights
140. B10A B30A Series User s Guide 141 Chapter 8 Home Networking 3 Click Apply to save your settings Figure 49 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt LAN Setup Interface Group Group Name LAN IP Setup IPv4 Address Subnet Mask Prefix Length IGMP Snooping Status IGMP Mode DHCP Server State DHCP IP Addressing Values Beginning IP Address Ending IP Address Auto reserve IP for the same host DHCP Server Lease Time 1 Days 0 DNS Values DNS DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 LAN IPV6 Mode Setup IPv6 State LAN IPv6 Address Setup Default v Opelegate prefix from WAN static 19216811 OULA Pseudo Random Global ID 255 255 255 0 ULA IPv6 Address Setup IPv6 Address Prefix Length V Enable IGMP Snooping standard Mode O Blocking Mode MLD Snooping Status Enable MLD Snooping Enable O Disable O DHCP Relay LAN IPv6 Address Assign Setup Stateless v LAN IPv6 DNS Assign Setup From DHCPv6 Server v 192 168 1 2 192 168 1 254 DHCPv6 Configuration DHCPv6 State Enable DHCPVv6 Server Hours 0 Minutes IPv6 Router Advertisement State RADVD State Enable O Dynamic Static From ISP None IPv6 DNS Values IPv6 DNS Server 1 From ISP v IPv6 DNS Server 2 From ISP v IPv6 DNS Server 3 From ISP v DNS Query Scenario IPVAIIPV6 DNS Server v enable ODisabled Apply Cancel The following ta ble describes the fields in this screen Table 30 Network S
141. B30A Series User s Guide 18 Chapter 1 Introducing the VMG Figure 1 VMG s Internet Access Application WLAN WAN Bridging IPoE PPPoE LAN A WLAN WAN Bridging PPPoE LAN WLAN WAN epee IPoE gt LAN Ethernet You can also configure IP filtering on the VMG for secure Internet access Click Security gt MAC Filter to set the IP Filtering When the IP filter is on all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked by default unless it is initiated from your network This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed but you can safely browse the Internet and download files 1 5 VMG s USB Support The USB port of the VMG is used for file sharing VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 19 Chapter 1 Introducing the VMG File Sharing Use the built in USB 2 0 port to share files on a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive B You can connect one USB hard drive to the VMG at a time Use FTP to access the files on the USB device Figure 2 USB File Sharing Application 1 6 LEDs Lights The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs Om 02 05 OO m PWR DSL INTERNET LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 LAN4 Wi Fi PHONE1 PHONE2 USB SYS None of the LEDs are on if the VMG is not receiving power Table 1 LED Descriptions LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION PWR SYS Green On The VMG is receiving power and
142. BEL DESCRIPTION Filter Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters not including spaces underscores and dashes You must enter the filter name to add an ACL rule This field is read only if you are editing the ACL rule Order Select the order of the ACL rule Select Source Device Select the source device to which the ACL rule applies If you select Specific I P Address enter the source IP address in the field below Source IP Enter the source IP address Address Select Select the destination device to which the ACL rule applies If you select Specific IP Destination Address enter the destiniation IP address in the field below Device Destination IP Enter the destination IP address Address IP Type Select whether your IP type is IPv4 or IPv6 Select Protocol Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port from the drop down list box The specific protocol rule sets you add in the Security gt Firewall gt Service gt Add screen display in this list If you want to configure a customized protocol select Specific Service Protocol Custom Source Port This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol Choose the IP port TCP UDP TCP UDP ICMP or I CMPv6 that defines your customized port from the drop down list box This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol Enter a sin
143. CA v Call Service Mode Europe Type v B Note Caution When Region Settings is changed you need to reboot device to take settings effect Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 112 VolP gt Phone LABEL DESCRIPTION Region Settings Select the place in which the VMG is located Call Service Mode Select the mode for supplementary phone services call hold call waiting call transfer and three way conference calls that your VolP service provider supports Europe Type use supplementary phone services in European mode USA Type use supplementary phone services American mode You might have to subscribe to these services to use them Contact your VolP service provider Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the VMG Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 23 6 The Call Rule Screen Use this screen to add edit or remove speed dial numbers for outgoing calls Speed dial provides shortcuts for dialing frequently used VolP phone numbers You also have to create speed dial entries if you want to call SIP numbers that contain letters Once you have configured a speed dial rule you can use a shortcut the speed dial number 01 for example on your phone s keypad to call the phone number VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 279 Chapter 23 Voice Figure 142 VoIP gt Call Rule When certain ph
144. Click Network Setting gt QoS gt Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment Figure 67 Network Setting gt QoS gt Queue Setup Queue Setup Queue Setup decides the priority on WAN LAN interfaces Use this page to configure QoS queue assignment Add new Queue DefaultQueue WAN 8 1 DT 0 VoiceQueue WAN 1 1 DT D ZW Priority3 WAN 3 1 DT 0 ZW Priority4 WAN 4 1 DT 0 ZW Priority WAN 5 1 DT 0 zW Status 1 9 EN EN EN s 9 B Note Maximum of 8 configurable entries for WAN port and maximum of 3 configurable entries for LAN port If queue is deleted then related classifiers will be removed too Priority level is the highest priority for QoS Rate Limit 0 is max bandwidth VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 166 Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Network Setting gt QoS gt Queue Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new Queue Click this button to create a new queue entry This is the index number of the entry Status This field displays whether the queue is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this queue is active A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active Name This shows the descriptive name of this queue Interface This shows the name of the VMG s interface through which traffic in this queue passes
145. E 321 Chapter 33 SNBA so ene Se M M M I 323 S0 T CUBIVIBWE 2 iaiciisiesrticadiuitus cti onc eid pedites Eo et dagseeeecduabauneddddgasnedte du sieatiaanntenndagdedeentuay 323 do FE SNMP OOE icai arius CE pee bULa A ANEA eR TU Rae IDE EpL URGERE PI IM LE EL OE 323 Chapter 34 Time 1 Pe aulee 325 ELM P rr NOI TTE 325 Oe clc MNT T E 325 Chapter 35 E imal Motticall l iiis E EERKERIEEN EREIR ERRREERKRRE RRRAKRAR a 327 Suh EP ri m re Hr ne e 327 392 The Emal Notification SOREN i iecit uere Por pat EI HE PE a Eta rad Ea La e E ERE SE EESLU aped A PE iG E Sess a 327 35 2 1 Email Notificadon EIE 2 deve MEDICI MUI NER NT NE MM MIRO 328 Chapter 36 L g SeN eR S 329 SO COUP mem 329 30A Mhe Log Somas eI EMT TOO UO oS S 329 30 21 Example E mail LO sesitciusisieaciiss aisinas okii ain i saad ialaaaben adam saanadu eae en 330 Chapter 37 Firmware CON AGE ciiisean aaar Eaa aaa aaie 333 VES ONEEN MER s 333 ora the Firmware Serao soan E 333 Chapter 38 ee a ss E T E 337 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 13 Table of Contents comb o rr c 337 Esa Rees Ur abor mM EEE 337 ELMCME Liceo mm 339 Chapter 39 Diagnoslie ues dae ask RYE ERKERR EHE SEAAE SENSE AERE LEGE R
146. ELAX REEGERECHREE XI LR EARS ETE aAa A aaae 340 SUN IIS NT oT 340 39 11 What You Can Do in ihis Chaptal ERRMT 340 Ta 2 What TOU VE O KOON onia aa a aa 340 39 3 Ping amp TraceRoute amp NSLOOKUP 125 nica lectin CA ade RA ERR Deb ud RR buda ATE EER REENT i da d 341 O0 BOE TAG acere ord sec tbe c adt RC XXE ER DHARRNA EE ERE DI FORE Duo teed MELLE GNI PAPIAS Hut QS beats MU Pls a ir PROS d ARES 341 29 5 OAM PIN acastiapkX ELE PEDASSEEE RENE RUIN EV ERE EYYERELULEDA ERE RAE ERN ERE ETERNA ERU HIP FL Fe n RR aS 342 Chapter 40 Troubieshoo lng ee 345 40 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS iiaa AA ARR 345 402 VMG FOSS aNG LOJI 346 AOS UNCED POORER alias S TU NETTES 348 AA Wireless Intemet A00ESS oe docssiuseventaaaeue testbed u iaaii 349 20 5 USE Device CONNEC UO ode odere e e et ob iive aa een aa 350 LEO eer 350 Loud Me qe c 353 Appendix A Customer SUDDOPT aussi cipis p dep die es E MED HDD Mis DE da RA pA Sap Sap EPMM NUN PRIM NER 355 Anpendi B Wireless EIS assiette DE KDE FORE HERR DENS KE HVPS nema DUE CLAN VEU ERIGI UON RS 361 Pelea ME Pun Pe 375 hr qi AERE oo m M 383 Appendix E Legal Inroermistionas iiie cer iiir bio D RR DO EON ELEME Na LUCA EAT EUR a RR UR RD ERR NR UNDA KON RO 387
147. ESCRIPTION Refresh Click this button to renew the dialed call list Clear All Click this button to remove all entries from the dialed call list This is a read only index number time This is the date and time when the call was made VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 281 Chapter 23 Voice Table 115 VoIP gt Call History gt Call History Outgoing LABEL DESCRIPTION phone port This is the phone port on which you made the call phone number duration This is the SIP number you called This displays how long the call lasted 23 9 The Call History Incoming Calls Screen Use this screen to see detailed information for each incoming call from someone calling you Click Vol P gt Call History gt Call History Incoming Calls The following screen displays Figure 145 VoIP gt Call History gt Call History Incoming Calls Call History Summary CallHistory Outgoing This page shows Call Histroy Incoming information Refresh Clear All Call History Incoming time phone port Each field is described in the following table Table 116 VoIP gt Call History gt Call History Incoming LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Click this button to renew the received call list Clear All Click this button to remove all entries from the received call list This is a read only index number time This is the date and time when the call was made
148. ESEN cas aaa abia naaa aad oaia soniai 199 T2 1 1 What You Can Doin this Chapter acne eter inaasa d iaaa riadi d rn d 199 12 1 2 What voulNeed Te ENON em 200 122 TO DNS Eny COCON eac 200 RAIAT OTE ONS ENI EE UE P 200 12 The Dynamic DNS SOrEEN T nn w GS GLRR 201 Chapter 13 Lj ic 203 ERR I MR TT nme 203 78 1 1 What You Can De wi Tris Chapt sienta e p dace aaeddsa ess ERR Iq Iq eae 203 Toa The SIS ae ee 15cm isi Ee PO RU PEE ERR D pO Eesti Pda a eae 203 13 2 ee cit a VLAN TOUD cinri a e ce dd dab sided sida dui eL Rx da che 204 Chapter 14 lj edt E 205 SB 1 m T A T A E E E EN E A E EA 205 14 1 1 What You Can Do inthis Chapter iius ced etra eth pia Ea E anada aai aaa k aad aea 205 14 2 The Interlace Group Serag itd haere tice inductee E ee 205 14 21 intorlace Group CoOniguratioi e 206 14 2 2 Interlace Grouping Criteria Tm 208 Chapter 15 USB Servite 211 TOA OVERVIEW Ae 211 To LI What You Dan Doim iis Chapter siasavusssasivnvadconsanveniecnvaetsasduniaadusacsrereedwanenddna ELSE DE DER EEAS 211 T2 Vial Vou Need Te KNOW em ce 211 1 Lo Belle You BOUT aoaeiaedy iod dd ddent odora od i d ea dos t Uu pr ca dodo A en 213 192 d Peine cat scat dra i eaves D S UE ems vatea tei 213 152 1 The
149. II printable characters given to you by your service provider Password Type the password of up to 64 ASCII printable characters associated with the user name above PIN A PIN Personal Identification Number code is a key to a 3G card Without the PIN code you cannot use the 3G card If your ISP enabled PIN code authentication enter the 4 digit PIN code 0000 for example provided by your ISP If you enter the PIN code incorrectly the 3G card may be blocked by your ISP and you cannot use the account to access the Internet If your ISP disabled PIN code authentication leave this field blank Dial string Enter the phone number dial string used to dial up a connection to your service provider s base station Your ISP should provide the phone number For example 99 is the dial string to establish a GPRS or 3G connection in Taiwan APN Enter the APN Access Point Name provided by your service provider Connections with different APNs may provide different services such as Internet access or MMS Multi Media Messaging Service and charge method You can enter up to 32 ASCII printable characters Spaces are allowed Connection Select Nailed UP if you do not want the connection to time out Select on Demand if you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time out in the Max Idle Timeout field Max Idle This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the VMG automatically Timeout disconnects from the ISP
150. Identifier It is usually the first three bytes er OUI of the MAC address Product Enter the product class of the device Class Model Enter the model name of the device Name Serial Enter the serial number of the device Number Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the VMG Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 209 Chapter 14 Interface Group VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 210 USB Service 15 1 Overview You can share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your VMG with users on your network The following figure is an overview of the VMG s file server feature Computers A and B can access files on a USB device C which is connected to the VMG Figure 99 File Sharing Overview The VMG will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup In this case contact your network administrator 15 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the File Sharing screen to enable file sharing server Section 15 1 3 on page 213 Use the Media Server screen to enable or disable the sharing of media files Section 15 3 on page 215 Use the Printer Server screen to enable the print server Section 15 4 on page 216 15 1 2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter VMG5313 B10A B30A S
151. L Connection ADSL over ATM v Routing v PPPoE wv IPv4 Only v 36 LLC SNAP BRIDGING 234g DSL Excom El password unmask auto Connect OConnect on Demand CManual MyDSL 192 168 1 32 Dynamic static 192 168 5 2 192 168 5 1 Oknable disable DHCP Static kbps Oknable disable 0 63 1500 MTU 68 1492 Apply Cancel VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 40 Chapter 4 Tutorials 8 You should see a Summary of your new DSL connection setup in the Broadband screen as follows Add new WAN Interface m ode Encaps 8024p 8021q I6 Routing IPoE N A N A Y Y Y N N ZW 2m 1 ADSL ATM IPoE N A ATM MyADSL Routing IPoE N A PTM VDSL Routing Try to connect to a website to see if you have correctly set up your Internet connection Be sure to contact your service provider for any information you need to configure the WAN screens 4 4 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network Thomas wants to set up a wireless network so that he can use his notebook to access the Internet In this wireless network the VMG serves as an access point AP and the notebook is the wireless client The wireless client can access the Internet through the AP 3 C Thomas has to configure the wireless network settings on the VMG Then he can set up a wireless network usin
152. LAN Allow access from other computers on the Internet 3 When the security level is setto High access to the following services is allowed Telnet FTP HTTP HTTPS DNS IMAP POP3 and SMTP App Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 Security gt Firewall gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Firewall Select Enable to activate the firewall feature on the VMG Easy Select Easy to allow LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions Medium Select Medium to allow LAN to WAN but deny WAN to LAN packet directions High Select High to deny LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 17 3 The Protocol Screen You can configure customized services and port numbers in the Protocol screen For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority website See Appendix D on page 383 for some examples Click Security gt Firewall gt Protocol to display the following screen VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 225 Chapter 17 Firewall Figure 110 Security gt Firewall gt Protocol Each entry in the following table represents an application or a set of custom protocol rules It is a re usable object and should be used in conjunction with ACL Rules in Access Control Add new service entry Name De
153. Local System sa i b Extended 5 Click Start and then OK Dibbler a DHCPv client Properties Local Computer General Log On Recovery Dependencies Service name DHCPv amp Client Display name Dibbler a DHCPv amp client Description Dibbler a portable DHCP v6 This is DHCP client version 0 7 2 Path to executable C Program Files DHCPv6Client_dibbler dibbler client exe service d C Pr Startup type Automatic Service status Stopped y Start You can specify the start parameters that apply when you start the service from here Start parameters ok JL cancel 6 Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server Example Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7 Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7 computer To enable IPv6 in Windows 7 1 Select Control Panel gt Network and Sharing Center gt Local Area Connection 2 Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 checkbox to enable it 3 Click OK to save the change VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 381 Appendix C IPv6 4 Local Area Connection Properties E3 Networking Connect using E Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethemet This connection uses the following items v 0 Client for Microsoft Networks v aos Packet Scheduler IV E Intemet Protocol Version 4 TCP IP v4 Ins
154. M ey amare 307 21 4 THe xDSL States OPI 12i ciii pti Intr Ve P PLE LI epe i div ebadt qot pe ce si vaa uet d poe E db sea dd 307 Chapter 28 E EE Sy OMe fase TI TDI TT TO DT TQ I T E CITIES 311 PIG DD SS eR t 31 26 2 The GG SUAUSHCe SIPC SU ETC T Tt 311 Chapter 29 RG a ALIEN TTD Pn 313 REMIS MEE REN Um E RUNS 313 29 2 The User Account GOFBEDI 4ussieccozi s spit E cbe ai HEIC CIN abeo CU FabEIt CE n E aput Pte OL Prat C Ed pm Ad Es 313 28 2 1 The User Account Add Edit SCEE 1iiissusar teu Fulda i Ea ataca abeo cab cents 314 Chapter 30 Remote Managemoenluiiieiosiie sev o rau aa IRR 24323 NX FOERAYRRERRRRIRAR FRRERENRIRAR CURAR aidea MAN CREEK RR EGRE iskati XRI TIE d pagg 315 VIN MP ETC NR NS 315 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 12 Table of Contents 230 2 This Perales MONI SCOPI iret eo apri br ce E ee E E p trea ai ER ra eda Lb aeta P oreet s 315 20 5 The Fust DOMAN CNN icv saree torta ee epe aSUC ta Cha Cb ctu piuAM M ELLPTA Ete p LUI UpUAGU HAMA CI EOM DI RLUt E dac EE 316 SO The Add Trust Domain Sree csi voce edace ante diss ror AN Corda ditto cede da 317 Chapter 31 TRSBGS CHE o i AI AERE MARRE ERLIAERREER SETA HA ES TERIAE IA EU MR SE DUE CMULERAS MIA 248 AK SER SUR AS DOXREJ EA REM A TARDE GERA H0 319 EINE i AME 319 31 2 The TR 069 Client SCION ituncutese iic PI SUE P DIM PM DM ELE PITT P TUDIN I NM DPPIPD M RDMdSME A 319 Chapter 32 HUI MONTAR E 321 CEP I AM T m 321 oe Tha TPODDA OUD uox by PN MIU DIM ME TEMERE HER MIRMn M
155. NAT T This is the index number of the UPnP NAT T connection Description This is the description of the UPnP NAT T connection IP Address This is the IP address of the other connected UPnP enabled device External Port This is the external port number that identifies the service Internal Port This is the internal port number that identifies the service Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 8 4 1 Turning On UPnP in Windows 7 Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows 7 UPnP server is installed in Windows 7 Activate UPnP on the VMG Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the VMG Turn on your computer and the VMG 1 Click the start icon Control Panel and then the Network and Sharing Center ag u B ce LI ace Qo a b j Cong zana LI t us yu gs m a es a 3 2 Click Change Advanced Sharing Settings VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 147 Chapter 8 Home Networking GO anti Panel Berm o Hletwort and una Certes Me ddt Vew Tosh Heip Select Turn on network discovery and click Save Changes Network discovery allows your computer to find other computers and devices on the network and other computers on the network to find your computer This makes it easier to share files and printers Change sharing options for dif
156. Obtain an IP Select this option if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address Address Automatically Use the Select this option if the ISP assigned a fixed IP address following static IP address IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use the following static IP address Obtain DNS Select this to have the VMG get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically info dynamically Use the Select this to have the VMG use the DNS server addresses you configure manually Primary Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP DNS server Secondary Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP DNS server Enable Email Select this to enable the e mail notification function The VMG will e mail you a notification Notification when the 3G connection is up Mail Server Select a mail server for the e mail address specified below If you do not select a mail server e mail notifications cannot be sent via e mail You must have configured a mail server already in the Maintenance gt Email Notification screen 3G backup Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e mail notifications that the VMG Send Email sends Title VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 93 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 10 Network Setting gt Broadband gt 3G Backup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Send Notification to Email Notifications are sent to the e mail
157. Overview A user account is the In the Users Account screen you can change the password of the admin user account that you used to log in the VMG 29 2 The User Account Screen Click Maintenance gt User Account to open the following screen Figure 159 Maintenance gt User Account User Account lets you create or manage the user accounts on the device Add new user Lock Period Modify 1 admin 0 60 mings 15 min s Administrator g 2 john 0 60 mings 15 min s Administrator a w 3 zyuser 0 10 mings 15 min s User a 1 B Note Click Edit for more user account configurations Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 132 Maintenance gt User Account LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number User Name This field displays the name of the account used to log into the VMG web configurator Retry Times This field displays the number of times consecutive wrong passwords can be entered for this account O means there is no limit Idle Timeout This field displays the the length of inactive time before the VMG will automatically log the user out of the web configurator Lock Period This field displays the length of time a user must wait before attempting to log in again after a number if consecutive wrong passwords have been entered as defined in Retry Times Group This field displays whether this user has Administrator or User privleges
158. QoS classifier from the Selected Class box select it and use the button Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 10 7 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the VMG features described in this chapter IEEE 802 1Q Tag The IEEE 802 1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges A VLAN tag includes the 12 bit VLAN ID and 3 bit user priority The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network IEEE 802 1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Table 52 IEEE 802 1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPE Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excel
159. S 242 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 10 Table of Contents Chapter 21 ER ATAU EDI Ic rece tessa tae same sms a seen mass E E msm aceon eee 243 OWS i7 faecal rela a fa LU T MT Ir 243 271 1 1 What Yot Gan Doin ihis CHOU cs ciasecsscesntadissersduccssadvssnmssesiugeraieasiouasetsiteeseersaasvereassansuets 243 Z1 VOS REN IO TO EODD arruas aE E Mito S pad On Hd a ou Ru PRU KK E ba EK 243 21 3 the Local Certificates Screen iuis p ep Mn FRI MEE PrREPIERr RH UENIRE MISERE KI S E ERR PAS PI E EN A ERER 243 213 1 0 93te Coniicats REVES disco iioii ore a o o e en ap demie 244 21 3 2 Load Signed Cerificate ouxiexsixuseeseniuesa eas tentusee aE Kaaa E Face T RR OR xL idi 246 2e The Misel CA DOGEN NE TUE 247 21 4 1 View Trusted CA Carlisle senise EE NE dA n 248 214 2 Import Trusted CA Cerificate screcmennnnen rann a EERE 248 Chapter 22 VPN soea a a a a a a eteiaeine 251 oa 0 arree e M 251 222 VRE IPSEC VFN et SCEE noaio aaaea E T 251 22 2 1 The IPSec VPN Add Edit SOLGOI iussosexiseten sore en aisi ieu tA este FE EpL CECI ibe Sania 252 225 The IPSec VPN Monitor Soest sce dade a pd Rc la aes a 258 22 Technical Referente seinien cepto uin REI AER ERE RE ERREH YR EUENRELU NE FRERIS IR E PARI OE NEERKKTE QE ERA eran 258 BN IPSec pedum TT EUM 258 Ve civit eT TR 259 22A icd c M H 260 2203 SUSU MOUB as ssn Js con ia ae en ada ea Fa e a mh daa a s Cae Ra ERU itr a ee 261
160. S Setup WPS Disabled The settings in this screen are invalid if you selectthis Method 1 Method 2 4 Method3 m Es Push Button Configuration Register Wireless Client PIN Number Enter AP s PIN Number in Wireless 1 Click Connect 1 Enter the PIN of your wireless client Client Connect gy Current state Configured J 1 Please release configuration if you 2 Activate WPS on the wireless client wantto configure the wireless within 2 minutes after clicking Beate ee z lent settings Connect within 2 minutes after clicking Release Configuration Connect 2 Enter current PIN 15624291 on your wireless client Generate New PIN Number B Notes 1 This function only works on the first SSID 2 Click the Release Configuration button to have the WPS status changed to Unconfigured Otherwise WPS status is in Configured mode Appy Cancel Enter the PIN number of the wireless client and click the Register button Activate WPS function on the wireless client utility screen within two minutes The VMG authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client This may take up to two minutes The wireless client is then able to communicate with the VMG securely The following figure shows you how to set up a wireless network and its security on a VMG and a wireless client by using PIN method VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide
161. S is set to the default of 0 the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR SCR and MBS Figure 27 Example of Traffic Shaping Cell Rate PCR lee SCR lt gt lt gt Time MBS MBS VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 102 Chapter 6 Broadband ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4 0 Specification Constant Bit Rate CBR Constant Bit Rate CBR provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent CBR traffic is generally time sensitive doesn t tolerate delay CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate cells may be dropped Examples of connections that need CBR would be high resolution video and voice Variable Bit Rate VBR The Variable Bit Rate VBR ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate VBR traffic class can be grouped into real time VBR RT or non real time VBR nRT connections The VBR RT real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth a PCR is specified but is only available when data is being sent An example of an VBR RT connec
162. SCP field in the packets 802 1P Mark Select a priority level with which the VMG replaces the IEEE 802 1p priority field in the packets If you select Unchange the VMG keep the 802 1p priority field in the packets VLAN ID If you select Remark enter a VLAN ID number with which the VMG replaces the VLAN ID of the frames If you select Remove the VMG deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding them out If you select Add the VMG treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second VLAN ID If you select Unchange the VMG keep the VLAN ID in the packets Forward to Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be forwarded out If you select Interface Unchange the VMG forward traffic of this class according to the default routing table To Queue Index Select a queue that applies to this class You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 172 Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS Table 49 Class Setup Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 10 6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen Use this screen to configure QoS policers that allow you to limit the transmission rate of incoming traffic Click Network Setting gt QoS gt Policer Setup The screen appears as shown Figure 71 Network Setting gt QoS gt Policer Setup
163. Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Select how often you want the Device to update this screen Select No Refresh to stop Interval refreshing 3G Status This field displays the status of the 3G Internet connection This field can display GSM Global System for Mobile Communications 2G GPRS General Packet Radio Service 2 5G EDGE Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution 2 75G WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access 3G HSDPA High Speed Downlink Packet Access 3 5G HSUPA High Speed Uplink Packet Access 3 75G HSPA HSDPA HSUPA 3 75G Service This field displays the name of the service provider Provider Signal Strength This field displays the strength of the signal in dBm VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 311 Chapter 28 3G Statistics Table 131 System Monitor gt 3G Statistics continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Connection This field displays the time the connection has been up Uptime 3G Card This field displays the manufacturer of the 3G card Manufacturer 3G Card Model This field displays the model name of the 3G card 3G Card F W This field displays the firmware version of the 3G card Version SIM Card IMSI The International Mobile Subscriber Identity or IMSI is a unique identification number associated with all cellular networks This number is provisioned in the SIM card VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 312 User Account 29 1
164. TION RTS CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area wireless devices are sometimes not aware of each other s presence This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through By setting this value lower than the default value the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the VMG The lower the value the more often the devices must get permission If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value see below then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the VMG Preamble A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network There are two preamble modes long and short If a device uses a different preamble mode than the VMG does it cannot communicate with the VMG Authentication The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network Fragmentation A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks while a larger Threshold threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy 7 10 3 Wireless Security Overview By their nature radio communications are simple to intercept For wireless data networks this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves but also join the network Once an unauthorized person has acce
165. Table 45 Network Setting gt QoS gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Qos Select the Enable check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance WAN Managed Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interfaces that you want to allocate Upstream using QoS Bandwidth The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interfaces actual transmission speed For example set the WAN interfaces speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps You can set this number higher than the interfaces actual transmission speed The VMG uses up to 95 of the DSL port s actual upstream transmission speed even if you set this number higher than the DSL port s actual transmission speed You can also set this number lower than the interfaces actual transmission speed This will cause the VMG to not use some of the interfaces available bandwidth If you leave this field blank the VMG automatically sets this number to be 95 of the WAN interfaces actual upstream transmission speed VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 165 Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS Table 45 Network Setting gt QoS gt General continued continued LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN Managed Enter the amount of downstream bandwidth for the LAN interfaces including WLAN that Downstream you want to allocate using QoS Bandwidth The recommendation is to set this s
166. The AP passes the wireless client s authentication request to the RADIUS server 2 The RADIUS server then checks the user s identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly 3 A256 bit Pairwise Master Key PMK is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client 4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 370 Appendix B Wireless LANs Figure 191 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example WPA 2 PSK Application Example A WPA 2 PSK application looks as follows 1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients The Pre Shared Key PSK must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters including spaces and symbols 2 The AP checks each wireless client s password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches 3 The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK Pairwise Master Key The key itself is not sent over the network but is derived from the PSK and the SSID 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryp
167. This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs over SSL SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSDP UDP 1900 The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports Universal Plug and Play UPnP SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 385 Appendix D Services Table 156 Examples of Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems VDOLI VE TCP 7000 A videoconferencing solution The UDP port number is specified in the application UDP user defined VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 386 Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2014 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in
168. Time In order to get a correct time for the device fill in a time server address select the time zone where this device is physically located and complete the daylight saving settings if needed Current Date Time Current Time 03 13 19 Current Date 15 Aug 2014 NTP Time Server First NTP time server pool ntp org v Second NTP time server time nist gov v Third NTP time server ntp1 tummy com v Fourth NTP time server None v Fifth NTP time server None T Time Zone Time zone offset GMT 01 00 Amsterdam Berlin Bern Rome Stockholm Vienna Daylight Saving State Enable Disable Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 140 Maintenance Time LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Date Time Current Time This field displays the time of your VMG Each time you reload this page the VMG synchronizes the time with the time server VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 325 Chapter 34 Time Settings Table 140 Maintenance gt Time continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Date This field displays the date of your VMG Each time you reload this page the VMG synchronizes the date with the time server NTP Time Server First Fifth NTP Select an NTP time server from the drop down list box time server Otherwise select Other and enter the IP address or URL up to 29 extended ASCII characters in length of your time
169. Use this screen 15 2 1 The Add New User Screen to create a user account that can access the secured shares on the USB device To access this screen click the Add New User button in the Network Setting gt USB Service gt File Sharing screen VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 214 Chapter 15 USB Service Figure 101 Network Setting gt USB Service gt File Sharing gt Add new user Add New User x User Name New Password Retype New Password Apply Back Each field is described in the following table Table 76 Network Setting gt USB Service gt File Sharing gt Add new user LABEL DESCRIPTION User Name Enter a user name You can enter up to 16 characters Only letters and numbers allowed New Password Enter the password used to access the secured share The password must be 5 to 15 characters long Only letters and numbers are allowed The password is case sensitive Retype New Retype the password that you entered above Password Apply Click this to save your changes to the VMG Back Click this to return to the previous screen 15 3 The Media Server Screen The media server feature lets anyone on your network play video music and photos from the USB storage device connected to your VMG without having to copy them to another computer The VMG can function as a DLNA compliant media server The VMG streams files to DLNA compliant media clients like Windo
170. VD with Router Advertisement RA messages in response to the request It specifies the minimum and maximum intervals of RA broadcasts RA messages containing the address prefix IPv6 hosts can be generated with the IPv6 prefix an IPv6 address 8 1 2 2 About UPnP Identifying UPnP Devices UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder Windows XP Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions NAT traversal allows the following Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 140 Chapter 8 Home Networking Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP See the Chapter 11 on page 181 for more information on NAT Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues Network information and configuration may also be obtained and m
171. When you make a phone call but hear a busy tone Call Completion on Busy Subscriber CCBS allows you to enable auto callback by pressing 5 and hanging up the phone The VMG then tries to call that phone number every minute since after you hang up the phone When the called party becomes available within the CCBS timeout period 60 minutes by default both phones ring e Ifthe called party s phone rings because of CCBS but no one answers the phone after 180 seconds you will hear a busy tone You can enable CCBS on the called number again e Ifyou manually call the number on which you have enabled CCBS before the CCBS timeout period expires the VMG disables CCBS on the called number e f you call a second number before the first called number s CCBS timeout period expires the VMG stops calling the first number until you finish the second call Select this option to activate CCBS on the VMG MWI Message Waiting Indication Select this if you want to hear a waiting beeping dial tone on your phone when you have at least one voice message Your VoIP service provider must support this feature Expiration Time Keep the default value for this field unless your VoIP service provider tells you to change it Enter the number of seconds the SIP server should provide the message waiting service each time the VMG subscribes to the service Before this time passes the VMG automatically subscribes again Hot Line Warm Line Enab
172. a Vlan Group we can configure the subnet and dhcp setting in LAN Setup page Add New VLAN Group _ oo Group Name VLANID Interface Modify 1 test 1111 LAN1T LAN2T LAN3U a W VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 203 Chapter 13 Vlan Group The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 70 Network Setting gt Vlan Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New Vlan Click this button to create a new VLAN group Group This is the index number of the VLAN group Group Name This shows the descriptive name of the VLAN group VLAN ID This shows the unique ID number that identifies the VLAN group Interfaces This shows the LAN ports included in the VLAN group and if traffic leaving the port will be tagged with the VLAN ID Modify Click the Edit icon to change an existing VLAN group setting or click the Delete icon to remove the VLAN group 13 2 1 Add Edit a VLAN Group Click the Add New VLAN Group button in the Vlan Group screen to open the following screen Use this screen to create a new VLAN group Figure 94 Add Edit VLAN Group Add New VLAN Group VLAN Group Name VLAN ID LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 x Include Txtagging Include Txtagging Include Txtagging Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 71 Interface Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Group Enter a name to identify this
173. affic Trellis Coding This displays whether or not the port is using Trellis coding for traffic it is sending and receiving Trellis coding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions Trellis may reduce throughput but it makes the connection more stable SNR Margin This is the upstream and downstream Signal to Noise Ratio margin in dB A DMT sub carrier s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power The signal to noise ratio margin is the maximum that the received noise power could increase with the system still being able to meet its transmission targets Actual Delay This is the upstream and downstream interleave delay It is the wait in milliseconds that determines the size of a single block of data to be interleaved assembled and then transmitted Interleave delay is used when transmission error correction Reed Solomon is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line The bigger the delay the bigger the data block size allowing better error correction to be performed Transmit Power This is the upstream and downstream far end actual aggregate transmit power in dBm Upstream is how much power the port is using to transmit to the service provider Downstream is how much port the service provider is using to transmit to the port Receive Power Upstream is how much power the service provider is receiving from the port Downstream is how much power the port i
174. age shtml Netherlands ZyXEL Benelux http www zyxel nl Norway ZyXEL Communications http www zyxel no Poland ZyXEL Communications Poland http www zyxel pl Romania ZyXEL Romania http www zyxel com ro ro Russia ZyXEL Russia http www zyxel ru Slovakia ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o organizacna zlozka http www zyxel sk Spain ZyXEL Spain http www zyxel es Sweden ZyXEL Communications http www zyxel se Switzerland Studerus AG VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 358 Appendix A Customer Support http www zyxel ch Turkey ZyXEL Turkey A S http www zyxel com tr UK ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd http www zyxel co uk Ukraine ZyXEL Ukraine http www ua zyxel com Latin America Argentina ZyXEL Communication Corporation http www zyxel com ec es Ecuador ZyXEL Communication Corporation http www zyxel com ec es Middle East Egypt ZyXEL Communication Corporation http www zyxel com homepage shtml Middle East ZyXEL Communication Corporation http www zyxel com homepage shtml North America USA ZyXEL Communications Inc North America Headquarters http www us zyxel com VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 359 Appendix A Customer Support Oceania Australia ZyXEL Communications Corporation http www zyxel com au en Africa South Africa Nology P
175. and it also does not provide identity protection It is useful in remote access situations where the address of the initiator is not know by the responder and both parties want to use pre shared key authentication 22 4 5 IPSec and NAT Read this section if you are running IPSec on a host computer behind the VMG NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both Transport and Tunnel mode An IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet both data payload and headers with a hash value appended to the packet When using AH protocol packet contents the data payload are not encrypted A NAT device in between the IPSec endpoints will rewrite either the source or destination address with one of its own choosing The VPN device at the receiving end will verify the integrity of the incoming packet by computing its own hash value and complain that the hash value appended to the received packet doesn t match The VPN device at the receiving end doesn t know about the NAT in the middle so it assumes that the data has been maliciously altered IPSec using ESP in Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire original packet including headers in a new IP packet The new IP packet s source address is the outbound address of the sending VPN gateway and its destination address is the inbound address of the VPN device at the receiving end When using ESP protocol with authentication the packet contents in this case the entire original packet
176. aneth3 1 ENE Session MAC Address CC 5D 4E 00 00 04 IPv4 Address 172 2 1 Release IPv4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 POEA IPv4 Uptime D day 1 hour 37 minutes Primary DNS server Status Rate Secondary DNS server nowt Up 100M Full Encapsulation NoLink NA NoLink NIA LAN Information I IPv4 Address 192 168 1 1 144 5M IPv4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Ethernet WAN 100M7 Full DHCP Server DSL i NIA MAC Address CC 5D 4E 00 00 01 3G USB NoDevice NIA WLAN Information MAC Address CC 5D 4E 00 00 02 Status On SSID ZyXELOO0001 Channel Auto Current 13 Security Mixed WPA2 PSKNWPA PSK 802 11 Mode 802 11b g n Mixed WPS Configured Security Firewall Medium Memory Usage VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 74 Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens Each field is described in the following table Table 5 Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select how often you want the VMG to update this screen Device Information Host Name This field displays the VMG system name It is used for identification Model Number This shows the model number of your VMG Serial Number This shows the unique serial number of your VMG Firmware This is the current version of the firmware inside the VMG Version WAN Information These fields display when you have a WAN connection WAN Type This shows wherther it s a DSL Ethernet or 3G WAN c
177. applies Action This field displays whether the rule silently discards packets DROP discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an I CMP destination unreachable message to the sender REJ ECT or allows the passage of packets ACCEPT Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action Click the Move To icon to change the order of the rule Enter the number in the field 17 4 1 Add Edit an ACL Rule Click Add new ACL rule or the Edit icon next to an existing ACL rule in the Access Control screen The following screen displays VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 228 Chapter 17 Firewall Figure 113 Access Control Add Edit Add New Rule Filter Name Order Source IP Address Source IP Address IP Type Select Service Protocol Policy Direction Enable Rate Limit Scheduler Rules Select Destination Device Destination IP Address Custom Source Port Custom Destination Port X 1 X Specific IP Address M prefix length Specific IP Address v prefix length IPv4 v Specific Service M port or port port port or port port ACCEPT WAN to LAN v packets per Minute Y 1 512 v Add new rule Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 Access Control Add Edit LA
178. ar All L Date Total Calls Outgoing Calls Incoming Calls Missing Calls Total Duration Each field is described in the following table Table 114 VoIP gt Call History gt Call History Summary LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Click this button to renew the call history list Clear All Click this button to remove all entries from the call history list This is a read only index number Date This is the date when the calls were made Total Calls This displays the total number of calls from or to your SIP numbers that day Outgoing Calls Incoming Calls This displays how many calls originated from you that day This displays how many calls you received that day Missing Calls This displays how many incoming calls were not answered that day Total Duration This displays how long all calls lasted that day 23 8 The Call History Outgoing Calls Screen Use this screen to see detailed information for each outgoing call you made Click Vol P gt Call History gt Call History Outgoing The following screen displays Figure 144 VoIP gt Call History gt Call History Outgoing Call History Outgoing Call History Incoming This page shows Call Histroy Outgoing information Refresh Clear All time phone port duration Each field is described in the following table Table 115 VoIP gt Call History gt Call History Outgoing LABEL D
179. are encrypted The encrypted contents but not the new headers are signed with a hash value appended to the packet Tunnel mode ESP with authentication is compatible with NAT because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the original header plus original payload which is unchanged by a NAT device Transport mode ESP with authentication is not compatible with NAT Table 103 VPN and NAT SECURITY PROTOCOL MODE NAT AH Transport N AH Tunnel N ESP Transport N ESP Tunnel Y 22 4 6 VPN NAT and NAT Traversal NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both transport and tunnel mode An IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet both data payload and headers with a hash value appended to the packet but a NAT device between the IPSec endpoints rewrites the source or destination address As a result the VPN device at the receiving end finds a mismatch between the hash value and the data and assumes that the data has been maliciously altered NAT is not normally compatible with ESP in transport mode either but the VMG s NAT Traversal feature provides a way to handle this NAT traversal allows you to set up an IKE SA when there are NAT routers between the two IPSec routers VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 262 Chapter 22 VPN Figure 136 NAT Router Between IPSec Routers Normally you cannot set up an IKE SA with a NAT router between the two IPSec ro
180. as the printer or with the Internet Your VMG is the AP Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is the name of the wireless network It stands for Service Set IDentifier f two wireless networks overlap they should use a different channel Like radio stations or television channels each wireless network uses a specific channel or frequency to send and receive information Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Radio Channels In the radio spectrum there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed civilian use For the purposes of wireless networking these bands are divided into numerous channels This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another When you create a network you must select a channel to use Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another the number of available channels also varies VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 126 Chapter 7 Wireless 7 10 2 Additional Wireless Terms The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the VMG s Web Configurator Table 28 Additional Wireless Terms TERM DESCRIP
181. ask 140 153 supplementary services 291 Sustained Cell Rate SCR 102 SYN attack 224 syslog protocol 297 severity levels 297 system firmware 333 version 75 passwords 23 24 reset 21 status 73 LAN 75 WAN 75 wireless LAN 75 time 325 T Tag Control Information See TCI Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID TCI The 80 three way conference 293 294 thresholds data fragment 123 127 RTS CTS 123 127 time 325 ToS 290 TPID 104 TR 064 321 TR 069 319 ACS setup 319 authentication 320 traffic shaping 102 transport mode 260 trTCM 178 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 396 Index tunnel mode 260 Two Rate Three Color Marker see trTCM Type of Service see ToS U unicast 104 Uniform Resource Identifier 283 Universal Plug and Play see UPnP upgrading firmware 333 UPnP 146 cautions 141 NAT traversal 140 USA type call service mode 293 USB features 20 V VAD 289 VID Virtual Circuit VC 101 Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN VLAN 103 Introduction 103 number of possible VIDs priority frame static VLAN ID 104 VLAN Identifier See VID VLAN tag 104 voice activity detection 289 voice coding 288 VoIP 282 peer to peer calls 279 VoIP status 305 W WAN status 75 Wide Area Network see WAN 79 warranty note 388 WDS 120 131 compatibility 120 example 131 web configurator 23 login 23 passwords 23 24 WEP 129 WEP Encryption 112 113 WEP encryption 111 WEP key 111 Wi Fi Protected Access 368 wire
182. ate format here is Month Day Year The time format is Hour Minute Second VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 330 Chapter 36 Log Setting End of Log message shows that a complete log has been sent Figure 172 E mail Log Example Subject Firewall Alert From Date Fri 07 Apr 2000 10 05 42 From userGzyxel com To userGzyxel com 1 Apr 7 00 From 192 168 1 1 To 192 168 1 255 default policy forward 09 54 03 UDP src port 00520 dest port 00520 lt 1 00 gt 2 Apr 7 00 From 192 168 1 131 To 192 168 1 2b55 default policy forward 09 54 17 UDP Src port 00520 dest port 00520 1 00 3 Apr 7 00 From 192 168 1 6 To 10 10 10 10 match forward 09 54 19 UDP Src port 03516 dest port 00053 1 01 J enipja t EE Asnip AEREE 126 Apr 7 00 From 192 168 1 1 To 192 168 1 255 match forward 10 05 00 UDP src port 00520 dest port 00520 lt 1 02 gt 127 Apr 7 00 From 192 168 1 131 To 192 168 1 255 match forward 10 05 17 UDP src port 00520 dest port 00520 lt 1 02 gt 128 Apr 7 00 From 192 168 1 1 To 192 168 1 255 match forward 10 05 30 UDP src port 00520 dest port 00520 lt 1 02 gt End of Firewall Log VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 331 Chapter 36 Log Setting VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 332 37 Firmware Upgrade 37 1 Overview This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your VMG You can download new firmware releases from you
183. atest 1 day time 16 hours 16 sec FEC 188 0 CRC ES 0 SES 0 UAS 28 28 LOS 0 0 LOF 0 0 LOM 0 Previous 1 day time 0 sec VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 308 Chapter 27 xDSL Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 130 Status gt xDSL Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select the time interval for refreshing statistics Line Select which DSL line s statistics you want to display xDSL Training Status This displays the current state of setting up the DSL connection Mode This displays the ITU standard used for this connection Traffic Type This displays the type of traffic the DSL port is sending and receiving Inactive displays if the DSL port is not currently sending or receiving traffic Link Uptime This displays how long the port has been running or connected since the last time it was started xDSL Port Details Upstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service provider Downstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service provider Line Rate These are the data transfer rates at which the port is sending and receiving data Actual Net Data Rate These are the rates at which the port is sending and receiving the payload data without transport layer protocol headers and tr
184. authenticate the ACS Connection This shows the connection request URL The ACS can use this URL to make a connection request to the VMG Local certificate used by TR 069 client You can choose a local certificate used by TR 069 client The local certificate should be imported in the Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 320 32 1 Overview TR 064 This chapter explains how to configure the VMG s TR 064 auto configuration settings 32 2 The TR 064 Screen TR 064 is a LAN Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum TR 064 is built on top of UPnP It allows the users to use a TR 064 compliant CPE management application on their computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and configure user specific parameters such as the username and password Click Maintenance gt TR 064 to open the following screen Figure 165 State Maintenance gt TR 064 R 064 TRO64 is a LAN automation control Enable Disable Apply The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 138 Maintenance gt TR 064 Cancel LABEL DESCRIPTION State Select Enable to activate management via TR 064 on the LAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exi
185. bandwidth for voice or data traffic Select Non Realtime VBR non real time Variable Bit Rate for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation Select Realtime VBR real time Variable Bit Rate for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation PPP Information This is available only when you select PPPoE or PPPOA in the Mode field PPP User Name PPP Password Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given Enter the password associated with the user name above Select password unmask to show your entered password in plain text PPP Trigger Select when to have the VMG establish the PPP connection Type YR Auto Connect select this to not let the connection time out Connect on Demand select this to automatically bring up the connection when the Device receives packets destined for the Internet Manual select this if you want to manually trigger the connection up Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server This field is not configurable if you select Auto Connect in the PPP Trigger Type field PPPoE This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation Passthrough In addition to the VMG s built in PPPoE
186. ble Disable settings are invalic Trigger by ETHER WAN Down trigger 3G backup when physical link of primary WAN is down Ping Check Enable Disable Check Cycle Every 3 30 Second Consecutive PING Fail 2 5 imes Ping Defauk Gateway Ping the Host Host Name or IP address B Note Primary WAN is not in service when ping failed after consecutive times 3G Connection Settings PIN remaining authentication times N A 992 Dial string 99 APN mernet Connection Nailed UP 9 Obtain an IP Address Automatically Use the following static IP address IP Address gt Obtain DNS info dynamically 19 static ONS IP address Secondary DNS server Enable Email Notification Mail Server 3G backup Send Email Title Send Notification to Email B Note Entering the wrong PIN code 3 times will lock SIM card Card description NIA Username Optional Optional tional Only for unlock PIN next time Budget Setup Enable Budget Contro Time Budget hours per month Data Budget Data Budget Reset all budget counters on day Reset time and data budget counters S before over budget 96 of time budget Enable of data budget Mbytes Enable of data budget Packets Actions when over budget Current 3G connection Actions Enable Emai Notification Mail Server Over Budget Email Title 1 Notification to Email interval Enable Log Interval minutes D Note Budget Control
187. blished Connection Name This displays the name of the VPN policy Remote Gateway This is the IP address of the remote IPSec router in the IKE SA Local Addresses This displays the IP address es on the LAN behind your VMG Remote This displays the IP address es on the LAN behind the remote IPSec router Addresses Action Click Trigger to establish a VPN connection with the remote network 22 4 Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this section 22 4 1 IPSec Architecture The overall IPSec architecture is shown as follows VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 258 Chapter 22 VPN Figure 133 IPSec Architecture IPSec Algorithms ESP Protocol AH Protocol RFC 2406 RFC 2402 Authentication Algorithm HMAC MDS RFC 2403 HMAC SHA 1 RFC 2404 IPSec Algorithms The ESP Encapsulating Security Payload Protocol RFC 2406 and AH Authentication Header protocol RFC 2402 describe the packet formats and the default standards for packet structure including implementation algorithms The Encryption Algorithm describes the use of encryption techniques such as DES Data Encryption Standard and Triple DES algorithms The Authentication Algorithms HMAC MD5 RFC 2403 and HMAC SHA 1 RFC 2404 provide an authentication mechanism for the AH and ESP protocols Key Management Key manag
188. button on the registrar and the first enrollee for example then check that it successfully enrolled then set up the second device in the same way WPS works only with other WPS enabled devices However you can still add non WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly generated WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK pre shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices Whether the network uses WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK depends on the device You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using if the device supports this feature Then you can enter the key into the non WPS device and join the network as normal the non WPS device must also support WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK When you use the PBC method there is a short period from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device when any WPS enabled device could join the network This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network You can easily check to see if this has happened WPS works between only two devices simultaneously so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll and will not have access to the network If this happens open the access point s configurati
189. by Wake On Lan OL MAC address of WOL device B Note 1 If Start Port and End Port configured to the same port the input text of Translation Start Port can be configurable and when user configure this value to different port number it means configure for Port Translation one to one mapping 2 WAN IP is optional If user wants to present Multi to Multi NAT user can assign the desired device WAN IP OK Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 Port Forwarding Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Clear the checkbox to disable the rule Select the check box to enable it Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters A Z a z 1 2 and so on WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 184 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Table 55 Port Forwarding Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN IP Enter the WAN IP address for which the incoming service is destined If the packet s destination IP address doesn t match the one specified here the port forwarding rule will not be applied Start Port Enter the original destination port for the packets To forward only one port enter the port number again in the End Port field To forward a seri
190. can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma Username Type your user name Password Type the password assigned to you Dynamic DNS Status User This shows Success if the account is correctly set up with the Dynamic DNS provider Authentication account Result Last Updated This shows the last time the IP address the Dynamic DNS provider has associated Time with the hostname was updated Current Dynamic IP This shows the IP address your Dynamic DNS provider has currently associated with the hostname Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 202 Vian Group 13 1 Overview Virtual LAN IDs are used to identify different traffic types over the same physical link In the following example the VMG DSL can use VLAN IDs VID 100 and 200 to identify Video on Demand and IPTV traffic respectively coming from the two VoD and IPTV multicast servers The VMG DSL can also tag outgoing requests to these servers with these VLAN IDs Figure 92 VLAN Group Example 200 13 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use these screens to group separate VLAN groups together to be treated as one VLAN group 13 2 The Vlan Group Screen Click Network Setting Vlan Group to open the following screen Figure 93 Network Setting gt Vlan Group After creat
191. cation purposes only and can be any string It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0 0 0 0 or use the DNS or E mail D type in the following situations When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers When you want the VMG to distinguish between VPN connection requests that come in from remote IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses Advanced IKE Settings Click more to display advanced settings Click less to display basic settings only NAT Traversal Select Enable if you want to set up a VPN tunnel when there are NAT routers between the VMG and remote IPSec router The remote IPSec router must also enable NAT traversal and the NAT routers have to forward UDP port 500 packets to the remote IPSec router behind the NAT router Otherwise select Disable Phase 1 Mode Select the negotiation mode to use to negotiate the IKE SA Choices are Main this encrypts the VMG s and remote IPSec router s identities but takes more time to establish the IKE SA Aggressive this is faster but does not encrypt the identities The VMG and the remote IPSec router must use the same negotiation mode VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 255 Chapter 22 VPN Table 101 Security gt IPSec VPN Add Edit Hellman Group for Key Exchange LABEL DESCRIPTION Encryption Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA Choices are Algorithm DES
192. ccount and host name on the VMG later VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 56 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4 8 2 Configuring DDNS on Your VMG Configure the following settings in the Network Setting gt DNS gt Dynamic DNS screen Select Enable Dynamic DNS Select www DynDNS com as the service provider Type zyxelrouter dyndns org in the Host Name field Enter the user name UserName1 and password 12345 Dynamic DNS Setup Dynamic DNS Enable Disable Service Provider www DynDNS com Y Hostname zyxelrouter dyndns org Username UserName1 Password 0000 mm Apply Cancel Dynamic DNS Status User Authentication Result Last Updated Time Current Dynamic IP Click Apply 4 8 3 Testing the DDNS Setting Now you should be able to access the VMG from the Internet To test this 1 Open a web browser on the computer using the IP address a b c d that is connected to the Internet 2 Type http zyxelrouter dyndns org and press Enter 3 The VMG s login page should appear You can then log into the VMG and manage it 4 9 Configuring the MAC Address Filter Thomas noticed that his daughter J osephine spends too much time surfing the web and downloading media files He decided to prevent Josephine from accessing the Internet so that she can concentrate on preparing for her final exams Josephine s computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the VMG Thomas decide
193. ccount s SIP number In order to make or receive a VoIP call you need VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 266 Chapter 23 Voice to enable and configure a SIP account and map it to a phone port The SIP account contains information that allows your VMG to connect to your VoIP service provider See Section 23 3 1 on page 267 for how to map a SIP account to a phone port Use this screen to view SIP account information You can also enable and disable each SIP account To access this screen click Vol P gt SIP gt SIP Account Figure 137 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account SIP Account In order to make Internet phone calls a valid SIP accountis essential You may need to consult your SIP service provider for the following settings This configuration should be used in conjunction with SIP Service Provider Add new account Active SIP Account Service Provider Account No Modify 1 SIP 1 ServiceProvider 1 changeme 4 T Each field is described in the following table Table 108 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new account Click this to configure a SIP account This is the index number of the entry Active This shows whether the SIP account is activated or not A yellow bulb signifies that this SIP account is activated A gray bulb signifies that this SIP account is not activated SIP Account This shows the name of the SIP account Service Provider This s
194. centrate the RF signal in a beam like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern Angles typically range from 20 degrees very directional to 120 degrees less directional Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point to point applications Positioning Antennas In general antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions In point to point application position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance For omni directional antennas mounted on a table desk and so on point the antenna up For omni directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling point the antenna down For a single AP application place omni directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible For directional antennas point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 373 Appendix B Wireless LANs VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 374 C IPv6 Overview IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 is designed to enhance IP address size and features The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits from the 32 bit IPv4 address allows up to 3 4 x 1038 IP addresses IPv6 Addressing The 128 bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16 bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons This is an
195. cer Configuration X Policer Setting Active Name Meter Type Simple Token Bucket v Committed Rate kbps Committed Burst Size kbps Conforming Action Pass v Non Conforming Action Drop v Regulated Classes Member Setting Available Class Selected Class Class 7 AH Class 2 SSH Class 8 ESP Class 3 DNS Class 11 HTTPS Class 8 RTSP Class 12 Telnet Class 9 HTTP Class 5 IKE Class 10 HTTP Proxy w Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Policer Setup Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select the check box to activate this policer Name Enter the descriptive name of this policer Meter Type This shows the traffic metering algorithm used in this policer The Simple Token Bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted Each token represents one byte The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size The Single Rate Three Color Marker srTCM is based on the token bucket filter and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate CIR the Committed Burst Size CBS and the Excess Burst Size EBS The Two Rate Three Color Marker trTCM is based on the token bucket filter and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate CIR and the Peak Information Rate PIR Committed Rate Specify the committed rate When the incoming traf
196. changed the IP address and have forgotten it you might get the IP address of the VMG by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer To do this in most Windows computers click Start Run enter cmd and then enter ipconfig The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the VMG it depends on the network so enter this IP address in your Internet browser 3 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 1 7 on page 21 forgot the password 1 See the cover page for the default login names and associated passwords 2 If those do not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 1 7 on page 21 cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 f you changed the IP address Section 8 2 on page 141 use the new IP address f you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the VMG 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See Section 1 6 on page 20 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled See Appendix D on page 399 4 If it is possible to log in from another interface check the service control settings for HTTP and HTTPS Maintenance Rem
197. changeme g W Each field is described in the following table Table 110 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new provider This is the index number of the entry SIP Service This shows the name of the SIP service provider Provider Name SIP Server This shows the IP address or domain name of the SIP server Address REGISTER Server This shows the IP address or domain name of the SIP register server Address SIP Service This shows the SIP service domain name Domain Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SIP service provider Click the Delete icon to delete this SIP service provider from the VMG 23 4 1 The SIP Service Provider Add Edit Screen A dial plan defines the dialing patterns such as the length and range of the digits for a telephone number It also includes country codes access codes area codes local numbers long distance numbers or international call prefixes For example the dial plan 2 9 xxxxxx does not allow a local number which begins with 1 or 0 Without a dial plan users have to manually enter the whole callee s number and wait for the specified dialing interval to time out or press a terminator key usually the pound key on the phone keypad before the VMG makes the call The VMG initializes a call when the dialed number matches any one of the rules in the dial plan Dial plan rules follow these conventions The collecti
198. ck Network Setting Broadband to open the following screen Click Add New WAN Interface VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 37 Chapter 4 Tutorials Add New WAN Interface et ut 3GBackup Advanced 802 1x EthernetWAN You can configure the Internet settings of this device Correct configurations build successful Internet connection Enca 802 1p 802 1q IGMP NAT Default IPv6 MLD Modify Gateway Proxy 1 VDSL PTM Routing PPPoE NIA NIA Y Y Y N N 2W 2 lan4 Ether Routing IPoE NIA NIA N Y Y N N 2W In this example the DSL connection has the following information General Name MyDSLConnection Type ADSL Connection Mode Routing Encapsulation PPPoE IPv6 IPv4 Mode IPv4 ATM PVC Configuration VPI VCI 36 48 Encapsulation Mode LLC SNAP Bridging Service Category UBR without PCR Account I nformation PPP User Name 1234 DSL Ex com PPP Password ABCDEF PPPoE Service Name MyDSL Static IP Address 192 168 1 32 Others PPPoE Passthrough Disabled NAT Enabled IGMP Multicast Proxy Enabled Apply as Default Gateway Enabled Select the Active check box Enter the General and ATM PVC Configuration settings as provided above Set the Type to ADSL over ATM Choose the Encapsulation specified by your DSL service provider For this example the service provider requires a username and password to establish Internet connecti
199. client you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the VMG Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP PPPoE Service Name Enter the name of your PPPoE service here PPPoE Passthrough This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation In addition to the VMG s built in PPPoE client you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the VMG Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP IP Address This is available only when you select I Pv4 Only or IPv6 IPv4 DualStack in the IPv6 IPv4 Mode field Obtain an IP A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address is not fixed Address the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select this if you Aut
200. configure incoming outgoing filtering rules Section 17 4 on page 228 Use the DoS screen to activate protection against Denial of Service DoS attacks Section 17 5 on page 230 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 223 Chapter 17 Firewall 17 1 2 What You Need to Know SYN Attack A SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets Each packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN ACK response While the targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN ACK it queues up all outstanding SYN ACK responses on a backlog queue SYN ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer terminates the three way handshake Once the queue is full the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests making the system unavailable for legitimate users DoS Denials of Service DoS attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources The ZyXEL Device is pre configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks DDoS A DDoS attack is one in which multiple compromised systems attack a single target thereby causing denial of service for users of the targeted system LAND Attack In a LAND attack hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of the target system This makes it appear as
201. count Static Route DDNS IGMP XDSL Internet VolP Apply Cancel VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 329 Chapter 36 Log Setting The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 143 Maintenance gt Logs Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Setting Syslog Logging The VMG sends a log to an external syslog server Select Enable to enable syslog logging Mode Select the syslog destination from the drop down list box If you select Remote the log s will be sent to a remote syslog server If you select Local File the log s will be saved in a local file If you want to send the log s to a remote syslog server and save it in a local file select Local File and Remote Syslog Server Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs UDP Port Enter the port number used by the syslog server E mail Log Settings Mail Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e mail addresses specified below If this field is left blank logs and alert messages will not be sent via E mail System Log Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the system log e mail message that Mail Subject the VMG sends Security Log Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the security log e mail message that Mail Subject the VMG sends Send Log to The VMG sends logs to the e mail
202. cters for example 00A0C5000002 or 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network see the device s User s Guide or other documentation You can use the MAC address filter to tell the VMG which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network If a device is allowed to use the wireless network it still has to have the correct information SSID channel and security If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network it does not matter if it has the correct information This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device Then they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network 7 10 3 3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it However every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802 1x to do this For wireless networks you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server This is a server used in businesses more than in homes If you do not have a RADIUS server you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network even if they cannot use t
203. ction button in the Security VPN screen to open this screen as shown next VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 252 Chapter 22 VPN Figure 131 Security gt IPSec VPN Add Edit Active IPSec Connection Name Domain Name IP Address for VPN IP Subnetmask Authentication Method Pre Shared Key Local ID Type Local ID Content Remote ID Type Remote ID Content Advanced IKE Settings NAT Traversal Phase 1 Mode Encryption Algorithm Integrity Algorithm Select Diffie Hellman Group for Key Exchange Key Life Time Phase 2 Encryption Algorithm Integrity Algorithm Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS Key Life Time Remote IPSec Gateway Address IP or Tunnel access from local IP addresses new connection 0 0 0 0 Subnet v 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 Tunnel access from remote IP addresses Subnet v IP Address for VPN 0 0 0 0 IP Subnetmask 255 255 255 0 Protocol ESP Key Exchange Method Auto lKE v Pre Shared Key Y key les Disable v io Main v 3DES v MDS v 1024bit DH Group 2 3600 3DES v MD5 v 1024bit DH Group 2 3600 IPSEC VPN Add Seconds M Seconds oK Cancel This screen contains the following fields Table 101 Security gt IPSec VPN Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to activate this VPN policy IPSec Connection Name Enter the name of the VPN policy Remote IPSec Gateway Address Enter the IP addres
204. d Press the flash key and then 0 to disconnect the call presently on hold and keep the current call on line Press the flash key and then 1 to disconnect the current call and resume the call on hold If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold there will be a remind ring VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 292 Chapter 23 Voice European Call Waiting This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone directory number If there is a second call to a telephone number you will hear a call waiting tone Take one of the following actions Reject the second call Press the flash key and then press 0 Disconnect the first call and answer the second call Either press the flash key and press 1 or just hang up the phone and then answer the phone after it rings Put the first call on hold and answer the second call Press the flash key and then 2 European Call Transfer Do the following to transfer an incoming call that you have answered to another phone 1 Press the flash key to put the caller on hold 2 When you hear the dial tone dial 98 followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call 3 After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it hang up the phone European Three Way Conference Use the following steps to make three way conference calls 1 When you are on the phone talking to
205. d click Apply to activate the WPS function Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen Figure 35 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup PS lets you set up wireless security easily Select a method for establishing a WPS connection between the router and another WPS compatible device 2 4GHz WPS Setup WPS Enable Disabled The settings in this screen are invalid if you select this Method 1 Method 2 4 Method3 heil Gy LO Push Button Configuration Register Wireless Client PIN Number Enter AP s PIN Number in Wireless 1 Click Connect 1 Enter the PIN of your wireless client Client Connect and click Register Current state Configured Register 1 Please release configuration if you 2 Activate WPS on the wireless client wantto configure the wireless within 2 minutes after clicking 2 Activate WPS on the wireless client settings Connect ai z minutes after clicking Release Configuration 2 Enter current PIN 15624291 on your wireless client Generate New PIN Number B Notes 1 This function only works on the first SSID 2 Click the Release Configuration button to have the WPS status changed to Unconfigured Otherwise WPS status is in Configured mode Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS LABEL DESCRIPTION WPS Select Enable to activate WPS on th
206. d hold the WPS button located on the VMG s front panel for more than 5 seconds Alternatively you may log into VMG s web configurator and go to the Network Setting gt Wireless WPS screen Enable the WPS function and click Apply Then click the Connect button Wi Fi Protected Setup PS lets you set up wireless security easily Select a method for establishing a WPS connection between the router and another WPS compatible device 2 4GHz WPS Setup WPS Disabled The settings in this screen are invalid if you selectthis Method 2 51 Method 3 ies Register Wireless Client PIN Number Enter AP s PIN Number in Wireless 1 Enter the PIN of your wireless client Client and click Register Current state Configured 1 Please release configuration if you 2 Activate WPS on the wireless client Register wantto configure the wireless within 2 minutes after clicking 2 Activate WPS on the wireless client settings Connect within 2 minutes after clicking Release Configuration Connect 2 Enter current PIN 15624291 on your wireless client Generate New PIN Number B Notes 1 This function only works on the first SSID 2 Click the Release Configuration button to have the WPS status changed to Unconfigured Otherwise WPS status is in Configured mode Apply Cancel Note Your VMG has a WPS button located on its front panel as well as a WPS button in its configuration utility Both buttons have
207. d is blank for One to One mapping types Global Start IP Enter the starting Inside Global IP Address IGA Enter 0 0 0 0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP You can only do this for the Many to One mapping type Global End IP Enter the ending Inside Global IP Address IGA This field is blank for One to One and Many to One mapping types Set Select the number of the mapping set for which you want to configure OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 11 8 The Sessions Screen Use this screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions a client can use Click Network Setting NAT Sessions to display the following screen Figure 85 Network Setting gt NAT gt Sessions Port Forwarding B Note The figure below limits the open sessions on a per host a LAN IP Address basis Some applications especially like P2P file sharing demand a greater number of NAT sessions in order to get better uploading and downloading rate MAX NAT Session Per Host 2048 Enter session number and click Apply to activate this feature Clear the session number field and click Apply to deactivate this feature Port Triggering DMZ ALG Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 64 Network Setting gt NAT gt Sessions LABEL DESCRIPTION WAX NAT Use this field to set a limit to th
208. d the incoming traffic and the LAN interface on which traffic is received to an interface group when its DHCP Vendor ID option information matches one listed for the interface group Use the LAN screen to configure the private IP addresses the DHCP server on the VMG assigns to the clients in the default and or user defined groups If you set the VMG to assign IP addresses based on the client s DHCP Vendor ID option information you must enable DHCP server and configure LAN TCP IP settings for both the default and user defined groups See Chapter 8 on page 139 for more information In the following example the client that sends packets with the DHCP Vendor ID option set to MSFT 5 0 meaning it is a Windows 2000 DHCP client is assigned the IP address 192 168 2 2 and uses the WAN VDSL PoE pppO 1 interface VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 205 Chapter 14 Interface Group Figure 95 Interface Grouping Application Default ETH 2 4 192 168 1 x 24 eth10 0 VDSL PoE pppO 1 192 168 2 x 24 DHCP Vendor ID option MSFT 5 0 Click Network Setting Interface Group to open the following screen Figure 96 Network Setting gt Interface Group Interface Grouping supports multiple ports to PVC and bridging groups Each group will perform as an independent network To support this feature you must create mapping groups with appropriate LAN and WAN interfaces using the Add button The Remove button will remo
209. dd to identify LAN hosts to add to the interface group by criteria such as the type of Add Clients the hardware or firmware See Section 14 2 2 on page 208 for more information With the following DHCP Vendor IDs This shows the index number of the rule Filter Criteria This shows the filtering criteria The LAN interface on which the matched traffic is received will belong to this group automatically WildCard This shows if wildcard on DHCP option 60 is enabled Support Remove Click the Remove icon to delete this rule from the VMG Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the VMG Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 207 Chapter 14 Interface Group 14 2 2 Interface Grouping Criteria Click the Add button in the Interface Grouping Configuration screen to open the following screen Figure 98 Interface Grouping Criteria Add new criteria x Criteria Source MAC address DHCP option 60 Enable wildcard on dhcp option 60 DHCP option 61 IAID DUID type Y DHCP option 125 Enterprise Number Manufacturer OUI Product Class Model Name Serial Number VLAN Group M Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 74 Interface Grouping Criteria LABEL DESCRIPTION Source MAC Enter the source MAC address of the packet Address DHCP Option Select this
210. ded antenna s Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately ED VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 389 Appendix E Legal Information VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 390 Index A ACK message 287 ACL rule 228 ACS 319 activation firewalls 225 media server 216 SIP ALG 191 SSID 114 adding a printer example 65 administrator password 24 AH 259 algorithms 259 antenna directional 373 gain 372 omni directional 373 AP access point 363 applications Internet access 18 media server 215 activation 216 iTunes server 215 applications NAT 195 authentication 127 128 RADIUS server 128 Auto Configuration Server see ACS 319 backup configuration 337 Basic Service Set See BSS 361 Basic Service Set see BSS blinking LEDs 20 Broadband 79 broadcast 104 BSS 130 361 Index example 130 BYE request 287 C CA 243 367 call history 280 incoming calls 282 outgoing calls 281 call hold 292 294 call service mode 292 293 call transfer 293 294 call waiting 293 294 Canonical Format Indicator See CFI CCMs 340 certificate factory default 244 Certificate Authority See CA certificates 243 authentication 243 CA creating 244 p
211. dic inform via TR 069 on the WAN Otherwise select Disable Inform Interval Enter the time interval in seconds at which the VMG sends information to the auto configuration server ACS URL Enter the URL or IP address of the auto configuration server ACS User Name Enter the TR 069 user name for authentication with the auto configuration server ACS Password Enter the TR 069 password for authentication with the auto configuration server WAN Interface used by TR 069 client Select a WAN interface through which the TR 069 traffic passes If you select Any WAN the VMG automatically passes the TR 069 traffic when any WAN connection is up If you select Multi_WAN you also need to select two or more pre configured WAN interfaces The VMG automatically passes the TR 069 traffic when one of the selected WAN connections is up Display SOAP messages on serial console Select Enable to show the SOAP messages on the console Connection Request Authentication Select this option to enable authentication when there is a connection request from the ACS Connection Request User Name Enter the connection request user name When the ACS makes a connection request to the VMG this user name is used to authenticate the ACS Request URL Connection Enter the connection request password Request i Password When the ACS makes a connection request to the VMG this password is used to
212. dress 22 4 7 1 ID Type and Content Examples Two IPSec routers must have matching ID type and content configuration in order to set up a VPN tunnel The two VMGs in this example can complete negotiation and establish a VPN tunnel Table 106 Matching ID Type and Content Configuration Example VMGA VMG B Local ID type E mail Local ID type IP Local ID content tom yourcompany com Local ID content 1 1 1 2 Remote ID type IP Remote ID type E mail Remote ID content 1 1 1 2 Remote ID content tom yourcompany com The two VMGs in this example cannot complete their negotiation because VMG B s Local ID Type is IP but VMG A s Remote ID Type is set to E mail An ID mismatched message displays in the IPSEC LOG Table 107 Mismatching ID Type and Content Configuration Example VMGA VMG B Local ID type IP Local ID type IP Local ID content 1 1 1 10 Local ID content 1 1 1 2 Remote ID type E mail Remote ID type IP Remote ID content aa yahoo com Remote ID content 1 1 1 0 22 4 8 Pre Shared Key A pre shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation see Section 22 4 3 on page 260 for more on IKE phases It is called pre shared because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection 22 4 9 Diffie Hellman DH Key Groups Diffie Hellman DH is a public key cryptography protocol tha
213. dress IPv4 Subnet Mask DHCP MAC Address WLAN Information MAC Address Status SSID Channel Security 802 11 Mode WPS Security Firewall Router VMG5313 B30A S080Y00000000 V1 0D AATS D Ethernet WAN lan4 wan eth3 1 CC 5D 4E 00 00 04 72 57 74 Release 255 255 255 0 0 day 1 hour 37 minutes 4223 2 172 22 5 1 IPoE 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 Server CC 5D 4E 00 00 01 CC 5D 4E 00 00 02 On ZyXEL000001 Auto Current 13 Mixed WPA2 PSKIWPA PSK 802 11b g n Mixed Configured Medium System Up Time Current Date Time System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage NAT Session Usage Interface Status Interface LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 LAN4 WLAN Ethernet WAN DSL 3G USB English v YF QuickStart Logout Pocus 20 Seconds Y 0 days 4 hours 8 minutes 01 Jan 2014 04 08 41 Status Rate Up 100M Full NoLink NIA NoLink NIA t Up 144 5M Up 100M Full NoLink N A NoDevice N A Connection Status As illustrated above the main screen is divided into these parts A title bar B main window C navigation panel 2 2 1 Title Bar The title bar provides some icons in the upper right corner Nos x VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 25 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator The icons provide the following functions Table 2 Web Configurator Icons in the Title Bar ICON DESCRIPTION Language Sel
214. ds It allows them to connect to the Internet without having to rely on inconvenient Ethernet cables You can configure your wireless network in either the built in Web Configurator or using the WPS button Figure 3 Wireless Access Example 7 1 8 1 Using the Wi Fi and WPS Buttons If the wireless network is turned off press the Wi Fi button for one second Once the WiFi LED turns green the wireless network is active You can also use the WPS button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between the VMG and a WPS compatible client by adding one device at a time To activate WPS 1 Make sure the PWR SYS LED is on and not blinking 2 Press the WPS button for five seconds and release it 3 Press the WPS button on another WPS enabled device within range of the VMG The WiFi LED flashes orange while the VMG sets up a WPS connection with the other wireless device 4 Once the connection is successfully made the WiFi LED shines green To turn off the wireless network press the Wi Fi button for one to five seconds The WiFi LED turns off when the wireless network is off VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 22 The Web Configurator 2 1 Overview The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy VMG setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 8 0 and later versions or Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions or Safari 2 0 and later versions The recommended screen res
215. ds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies Phone Services Overview Supplementary services such as call hold call waiting and call transfer are generally available from your VoIP service provider The VMG supports the following services Call Return Call Hold Call Waiting Making a Second Call Call Transfer Call Forwarding Three Way Conference Internal Calls Call Park and Pickup Do not Disturb IVR Call Completion CCBS Outgoing SIP 3 The VMG does not support DiffServ at the time of writing VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 291 Chapter 23 Voice 23 10 2 1 Note To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the VMG s phone ports you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP service provider The Flash Key Flashing means to press the hook for a short period of time a few hundred milliseconds before releasing it On newer telephones there should be a flash key button that generates the signal electronically If the flash key is not available you can tap press and immediately release the hook by hand to achieve the same effect However using the flash key is preferred since the timing is much more precise With manual tapping if the duration is too long it may be interpreted as hanging up by the VMG You can invoke all the s
216. e 28 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary continued LINK TAB FUNCTION Firewall General Use this screen to configure the security level of your firewall Protocol Use this screen to add Internet services and configure firewall rules Access Control Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services DoS Use this screen to activate protection against Denial of Service DoS attacks MAC Filter MAC Filter Use this screen to block or allow traffic from devices of certain MAC addresses to the VMG Parental Parental Control Use this screen to block web sites with the specific URL Control Scheduler Scheduler Rules Use this screen to configure the days and times when a configured Rules restriction such as parental control is enforced Certificates Local Certificates Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage certificates and certification requests Trusted CA Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs IPSec VPN Setup Use this screen to add or edit VPN policies Monitor Use this screen to view the status of all IPSec VPN tunnels You can also manually initiate a tunnel in this screen VoIP SIP SIP Account Use this screen to set up information about your SIP account and configure audio settings such as volume levels for the phones connected to the VMG SIP Service Use thi
217. e Select Off to disable 802 11 protection The transmission rate of your VMG might be reduced in a mixed mode network This field displays Off and is not configurable when you set 802 11 Mode to 802 11b Only Preamble Select a preamble type from the drop down list box Choices are Long or Short See Section 7 10 7 on page 131 for more information This field is configurable only when you set 802 11 Mode to 802 11b Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 7 9 The Channel Status Screen Use the Channel Status screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results Click Network Setting Wireless Channel Status The screen appears as shown Click Scan to scan the wireless LAN channels You can view the results in the Channel Scan Result section VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 124 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 40 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Channel Status wes wmm wos others PELEAS General Gue ore AP AC Authentic The chart shows channel status 2 4GHz Channel Monitor Scan Wireless LAN Channels Scan B note it takes about 15 seconds to scan the wireless channels Channel Scan Result E Current WLAN Channel Channel Noise Channel Hoise 100 rem 90 E p EE 74 TA 64 B f 85 54 61 1 1 2 3 4 5 5 e 8 9 10 11 12 13 Channel HO B Time for last scan 41 mins ago B Notes
218. e The screen varies depending on the interface type you select If you select ADSL VDSL over PTM as the interface type the following screen appears Figure 20 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit Bridge Mode WAN Configuration General Active Name Type Mode VLAN Active 802 1p 802 10 QoS Rate Limit x ADSUVDSL over PTM v Bridge v X 0 4094 kbps Apply Cancel VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 90 Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 9 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit Bridge Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION General Active Select this to enable the interface Name Enter a service name of the connection Type Select ADSL VDSL over PTM as the interface that you want to configure The VMG uses the VDSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port Mode Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP s DHCP server directly If you select Bridge you cannot use routing functions such as QoS Firewall DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port s VLAN This section is available only when you select ADSL VDSL over PTM in the Type field 802 1p IEEE 802 1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC
219. e Add Trust Domain Screen Use this screen to configure a public IP address which is allowed to access the VMG Click the Add Trust Domain button in the Maintenance gt Remote MGMT gt Turst Domain screen to open the following screen Figure 163 Maintenance gt Remote MGMT gt Trust Domain gt Add Trust Domain Add Trust Domain x Enter the IP address of the management station permitted to access the local management services and click Apply IP Address prefix length Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 136 Maintenance gt Remote MGMT gt Trust Domain gt Add Trust Domain LABEL DESCRIPTION I Pv4 Address Enter a public IPv4 IP address which is allowed to access the service on the VMG from the WAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the VMG Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 317 Chapter 30 Remote Management VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 318 TR 069 Client 31 1 Overview This chapter explains how to configure the VMG s TR 069 auto configuration settings 31 2 The TR 069 Client Screen TR 069 defines how Customer Premise Equipment CPE for example your VMG can be managed over the WAN by an Auto Configuration Server ACS TR 069 is based on sending Remote Procedure Calls RPCs between an ACS and a client device RPCs are sent in Exte
220. e G 729 and G 726 can distort the tones SI P INFO send the DTMF tones in SIP messages Transport Type Transport Type Select the transport layer protocol UDP or TCP usually UDP used for SIP VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 276 Chapter 23 Voice Table 111 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider gt Add new provider Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Ignore Direct IP Select Enable to have the connected CPE devices accept SIP requests only from the SIP proxy register server specified above SIP requests sent from other IP addresses will be ignored FAX Option This field controls how the VMG handles fax messages G711 Fax Select this if the VMG should use G 711 to send fax messages You have to also select which Passthrough operating codec G 711Mulaw or G 711Alaw to use for encoding decoding FAX data The peer devices must use the same settings T38 Fax Relay Select this if the VMG should send fax messages as UDP or TCP IP packets through IP networks This provides better quality but it may have inter operability problems The peer devices must also use T 38 QoS Tag SIP DSCP Mark Setting Enter the DSCP DiffServ Code Point number for SIP message transmissions The VMG creates Class of Service CoS priority tags with this number to SIP traffic that it transmits RTP DSCP Mark Setting Enter the DSCP DiffServ Code Point number for RTP voice transmi
221. e SIP VoIP works correctly with port forwarding and address mapping rules RTSP ALG Enable this to have the VMG detect RTSP traffic and help build RTSP sessions through its NAT The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 11 7 The Address Mapping Screen Ordering your rules is important because the VMG applies the rules in the order that you specify When a rule matches the current packet the VMG takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored Click Network Setting gt NAT gt Address Mapping to display the following screen ing gt NAT gt Address Mapping Add new rule Set Address Mapping can map local address to global address a Local Start IP i i Address Mapping Sessions Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Type The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 62 Network Setting gt NAT gt Address Mapping LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new rule Click this to create a new rule Set This is the index number of the address mapping set Local Start IP This is the starting Inside Local IP Address ILA Local End IP This is the ending Inside Local IP Address ILA If the rule is for all local IP addresses then this field displays 0 0 0 0 as the Local Start
222. e VMG Method 1 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration PBC Connect Click this button to add another WPS enabled wireless device within wireless range of the VMG to your wireless network This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device or a menu button similar to the Connect button on this screen Note You must press the other wireless device s WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 118 Chapter 7 Wireless Table 23 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS continued Configuratio n LABEL DESCRIPTION Method 2 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the client into the VMG Register Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Register to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device or by checking the device s settings Note You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the VMG Method 3 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the VMG into the client Release The default WPS status is configured Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the VMG Generate The PIN Personal
223. e dynamic WAN IP addresses Regardless of the ID type and content configuration the VMG does not allow you to save multiple active rules with overlapping local and remote IP addresses With main mode see Section 22 4 4 on page 261 the ID type and content are encrypted to provide identity protection In this case the VMG can only distinguish between up to 12 different incoming SAs that connect from remote IPSec routers that have dynamic WAN IP addresses The VMG can distinguish up to 48 incoming SAs because you can select between three encryption algorithms DES 3DES and AES two authentication algorithms MD5 and SHA1 and eight key groups when you configure a VPN rule see Section Figure 129 on page 251 The ID type and content act as an extra level of identification for incoming SAs VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 263 Chapter 22 VPN The type of ID can be a domain name an IP address or an e mail address The content is the IP address domain name or e mail address Table 105 Local ID Type and Content Fields LOCAL ID TYPE CONTENT IP Type the IP address of your computer DNS Type a domain name up to 31 characters by which to identify this VMG E mail Type an e mail address up to 31 characters by which to identify this VMG The domain name or e mail address that you use in the Local ID Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e mail ad
224. e mail notifications that Email Title the VMG sends Early Media Select this option if you want people to hear a customized recording when they call you IVR Play Select the tone you want people to hear when they call you Index This field is configurable only when you select Early Media See Section 23 10 on page 282 for information on how to record these tones Music On Hold Select this option to play a customized recording when you put people on hold IVR Play Select the tone to play when you put someone on hold Index This field is configurable only when you select Music On Hold See Section 23 10 on page 282 for information on how to record these tones Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the VMG Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 23 4 The SIP Service Provider Screen Use this screen to view the SIP service provider information on the VMG Click VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider to open the following screen VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 271 Chapter 23 Voice Figure 139 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider SIP Service Provider OIF ACCOUNT SIP Service Provider offers services of making Internet calls using VoIP technology You may need to consult your SIP Service Provider for the following settings This configuration should be used in conjunction with SIP Account Add new provider 1 ServiceProvider 1 changeme changeme
225. e number the higher the priority level Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested Weight Select the weight from 1 to 8 of this queue If two queues have the same priority level the VMG divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights Buffer This field displays Drop Tail DT Drop Tail DT is a simple queue management Management algorithm that allows the VMG buffer to accept as many packets as it can until it is full Once the buffer is full new packets that arrive are dropped until there is space in the buffer again packets are transmitted out of it Rate Limit Specify the maximum transmission rate in Kbps allowed for traffic on this queue OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 10 5 The Class Setup Screen Use this screen to add edit or delete QoS classifiers A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming interface For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow You can give different priorities to traffic that the VMG forwards out through the WAN interface Give high priority t
226. e number of concurrent NAT sessions each client host can Session Per have Host M If only a few clients use peer to peer applications you can raise this number to improve their performance With heavy peer to peer application use lower this number to ensure no single client uses too many of the available NAT sessions Apply Click this to save your changes on this screen Cancel Click this to exit this screen without saving any changes 11 9 Technical Reference This part contains more information regarding NAT VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 193 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT 11 9 1 NAT Definitions Inside outside denotes where a host is located relative to the VMG for example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts Global local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router for example the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side Note that inside outside refers to the location of a host while global local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet Thus an inside local address ILA is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network while an inside global address IG
227. e same group s the traffic must first go through a router In Multi Tenant Unit MTU applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 103 Chapter 6 Broadband VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information starts after the source address field of the Ethernet f
228. e schedule in green Time This field shows the time period of the schedule Description This field shows more information about this rule Modify Click the Edit icon to modify the rule or click the Delete icon to remove it VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 221 Chapter 16 Power Management 16 3 2 The Add Edit Rule Screen Use this screen to configure a schedule rule To access this screen click the Add new rule link or the Edit icon in the Network Setting gt Power Management gt Auto Switch Off gt Add or modify rules screen Figure 107 Network Setting gt Power Management gt Auto Switch Off gt Add or modify rules gt Add new rule Edit Add new rule x Rule Name BedTime Day v suN v mon M rue V wen v THU V FRI V sat Time of Day Range From 00 00 To 07 00 hh mm Description mM o Each field is described in the following table Table 82 Network Setting gt Power Management gt Auto Switch Off gt Add or modify rules gt Add new rule Edit gt LABEL DESCRIPTION Rule Name Type up to 31 alphanumberic characters for the name of this rule Day Select the week day s of the schedule Time of Day Enter the From and To times in hh mm format to set a time period for the schedule You Range can only enter a time period between 00 00 and 23 59 To set a time period crossing over midnight you must split the time period
229. e server s on your local network You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the local IP address of the desired server The port number identifies a service for example web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21 In some cases such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service for example both FTP and web service it might be better to specify a range of port numbers You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix D on page 383 Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Note Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes such as a Web or FTP server from your location Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location If you are unsure refer to your ISP Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding Example Let s say you want to assign ports 21 25 to one FTP Telnet and SMTP server A in the example port 80 to another B in the example and assign a default server IP address of 192 168 1 35 to a third C in the example You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 182 Chapter 11 Network
230. e the VMG automatically create static DHCP entries for Set Top Box STB devices when they request IP addresses Section 8 6 on page 150 Use the Wake on Lan screen to remotely turn on a device on the network Section 8 7 on page 150 Use the TFTP Server screen to identify a TFTP server for configuration file download using DHCP option 66 Section 8 8 on page 151 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 139 Chapter 8 Home Networking 8 1 2 What You Need To Know 8 1 2 1 About LAN IP Address IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device including computers servers routers printers etc needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet Mask Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks DHCP A DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server can assign your VMG an IP address subnet mask DNS and other routing information when it s turned on DNS DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a networking device before you can access it RADVD Router Advertisement Daemon When an IPv6 host sends a Router Solicitation RS request to discover the available routers RAD
231. earch and display the available APs within range Select an AP and click Apply to have the VMG establish a wireless link with the selected wireless device Figure 38 WDS Scan Scan SSID x Wireless Bridge Scan Setup Refresh e 02 STRESS 2 4G EC 43 F6 4B A9 C4 ZyXEL000001 CC 5D 4E 00 00 02 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 WDS Scan LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Bridge Scan Setup Refresh Click Refresh to update the table This is the index number of the entry SSID This shows the SSID of the available wireless device within range BSSID This shows the MAC address of the available wireless device within range Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 7 8 The Others Screen Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings Click Network Setting gt Wireless gt Others The screen appears as shown See Section 7 10 2 on page 127 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 122 Chapter 7 Wireless RTS CTS Threshold Auto Channel Timer Output Power Beacon Interval DTIM Interval 802 11 Mode 802 11 Protection Preamble RIFS Advertisement WPS 2 0 OBSS Coexistence The configurations below are the advanced wireless settings 2 4GHz Wireless Advanced Setup Fragmentation Thres
232. ect the Ethernet cable The Local Area Connection icon for UPnP disappears in the screen Restart your computer VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 351 Chapter 40 Troubleshooting VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 352 PART Ill Appendices Appendices contain general information Some information may not apply to your device Customer Support In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual you should contact your vendor If you cannot contact your vendor then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device Regional websites are listed below See also http www zyxel com about zyxel zyxel worldwide shtml Please have the following information ready when you contact an office Required Information Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it Corporate Headquarters Worldwide Asia Taiwan ZyXEL Communications Corporation http www zyxel com China ZyXEL Communications Shanghai Corp ZyXEL Communications Beijing Corp ZyXEL Communications Tianjin Corp http www zyxel cn India ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd http www zyxel in Kazakhstan ZyXEL Kazakhstan VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 355 Appendix A Customer Support Europe e http www zyxel kz Korea ZyXEL K
233. ect the language you prefer E Eroin ram Logout Click this icon to log out of the web configurator purum Quick Start Click this icon to open screens where you can configure the VMG s time zone Internet access and wireless settings 2 2 2 Main Window The main window displays information and configuration fields It is discussed in the rest of this document After you click Status on the Connection Status page the Status screen is displayed See for more information about the Status screen If you click Virtual Device on the System Info screen a visual graphic appears showing the connection status of the VMG s ports The connected ports are in color and disconnected ports are gray Figure8 Virtual Device E Jl Enoiisn v Quickstart p amp Logout Virtual Device Otis 20 Seconds Y Status WAN VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 26 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 2 2 3 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure VMG features The following tables describe each menu item Table3 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Connection Status This screen shows the network status of the VMG and computers devices connected to it Network Setting Broadband Broadband Use this screen to view and configure ISP parameter
234. ed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion allowing time sensitive applications to flow more smoothly Time sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency delay and a low level of jitter variations in delay such as Voice over IP VoIP or Internet gaming and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers 10 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The General screen lets you enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth Section 10 3 on page 165 The Queue Setup screen lets you configure QoS queue assignment Section 10 4 on page 166 The Class Setup screen lets you add edit or delete QoS classifiers Section 10 5 on page 168 The Policer Setup screen lets you add edit or delete QoS policers Section 10 5 on page 168 10 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter QoS versus Cos QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the same flow are given the same priority CoS class of service is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 163 Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packe
235. ed settings 11 6 The ALG Screen Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway ALG A SIP ALG allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream When the VMG registers with the SIP register server the SIP ALG translates the VMG s private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if your VMG is behind a SIP ALG Use this screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP VoIP ALG in the VMG To access this screen click Network Setting gt NAT gt ALG Figure 82 Network Setting gt NAT gt ALG ns Port Triggering Application Level Gateway ALG allows customized NAT traversal filters to support address and porttranslation for certain application such as FTP SIP or file transfer in IM Applications NAT ALG Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled SIP ALG Enable Disable RTSP ALG Enable Disable Apply Cancel VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 190 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 61 Network Setting gt NAT gt ALG LABEL DESCRIPTION NAT ALG Enable this to make sure applications such as FTP and file transfer in IM applications work correctly with port forwarding and address mapping rules SIP ALG Enable this to make sur
236. eform codec PCM measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into digital samples G 711 provides very good sound quality but requires 64 kbps of bandwidth VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 288 Chapter 23 Voice G 726 is an Adaptive Differential PCM ADPCM waveform codec that uses a lower bitrate than standard PCM conversion ADPCM converts analog audio into digital signals based on the difference between each audio sample and a prediction based on previous samples The more similar the audio sample is to the prediction the less space needed to describe it G 726 operates at 16 24 32 or 40 kbps G 729 is an Analysis by Synthesis AbS hybrid waveform codec that uses a filter based on information about how the human vocal tract produces sounds G 729 provides good sound quality and reduces the required bandwidth to 8 kbps Voice Activity Detection Silence Suppression Voice Activity Detection VAD detects whether or not speech is present This lets the VMG reduce the bandwidth that a call uses by not transmitting silent packets when you are not speaking Comfort Noise Generation When using VAD the VMG generates comfort noise when the other party is not speaking The comfort noise lets you know that the line is still connected as total silence could easily be mistaken for a lost connection Echo Cancellation G 168 is an ITU T standard for eliminating the echo caused by the sound of y
237. el should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 388 Appendix E Legal Information Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device Use only No 26 AWG American Wire Gauge or larger telecommunication line cord Antenna Warning This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna s Only use the inclu
238. elps save current consumption of the access point DTIM Interval Delivery Traffic Indication Message DTIM is the time period after which broadcast and multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Power Saving mode A high DTIM value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network This value can be set from 1 to 255 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 123 Chapter 7 Wireless Table 27 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Others continued LABEL DESCRIPTION 802 11 Mode Select 802 11b Only to allow only IEEE 802 11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the VMG Select 802 11g Only to allow only IEEE 802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the VMG Select 802 11n Only to allow only IEEE 802 11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the VMG Select 802 11b g Mixed to allow either IEEE 802 11b or IEEE 802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the VMG The transmission rate of your VMG might be reduced Select 802 11b g n Mixed to allow IEEE 802 11b IEEE 802 11g or IEEE802 11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the VMG The transmission rate of your VMG might be reduced 802 11 Enabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mixed mode networks networks with Protection both IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 11g traffic Select Auto to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS CTS handshake This helps improve I EEE 802 11g performanc
239. els and an adjacent AP is using channel 1 then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11 RTS CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point but are not within range of each other The following figure illustrates a hidden node Both stations STA are within range of the access point AP or wireless gateway but out of range of each other so they cannot hear each other that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used Therefore they are considered hidden from each other VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 363 Appendix B Wireless LANs Figure 190 RTS CTS RTS Range Wireless AP Station RTS AP ae CU Stations cannot j ACK po sic A __ gt lt hear each other 77 n When station A sends data to the AP it might not know that the station B is already using the channel If these two stations send data at the same time collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time resulting in a loss of messages for both stations RTS CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes An RTS CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake is invoked When a data frame exceeds the RTS CTS value you set between 0 to 2432 bytes the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS Request To Send message to the AP for permissi
240. ement allows you to determine whether to use IKE ISAKMP or manual key configuration in order to set up a VPN 22 4 2 Encapsulation The two modes of operation for IPSec VPNs are Transport mode and Tunnel mode At the time of writing the VMG supports Tunnel mode only Figure 134 Transport and Tunnel Mode IPSec Encapsulation Original IP TCP Data IP Packet Header Header Transport Mode IPSec IP Iu M mum Protected Packet Header Header Header Tunnel Mode IP IPSec IP TCP Deis Protected Packet Header Header Header Header VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 259 Chapter 22 VPN Transport Mode Transport mode is used to protect upper layer protocols and only affects the data in the IP packet In Transport mode the IP packet contains the security protocol AH or ESP located after the original IP header and options but before any upper layer protocols contained in the packet such as TCP and UDP With ESP protection is applied only to the upper layer protocols contained in the packet The IP header information and options are not used in the authentication process Therefore the originating IP address cannot be verified for integrity against the data With the use of AH as the security protocol protection is extended forward into the IP header to verify the integrity of the entire packet by use of portions of the original IP header in the hashing process Tunnel Mode Tunnel mode encapsulates the ent
241. eployment a simple user name and password pair is more practical The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types Table 151 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP LEAP Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes Certificate Client No Yes Optional Optional No Certificate Server No Yes Yes Yes No Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes Credential Integrity None Strong Strong Strong Moderate Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate Client Identity Protection No No Yes Yes No WPA and WPA2 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 11i standard WPA2 IEEE 802 11i is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server use WPA2 for stronger data encryption If you don t have an external RADIUS server you should use VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 368 Appendix B Wireless LANs WPA2 PSK WPA2 Pre Shared Key that only requires a single identical password entered into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the passwords match a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN If the AP or the wireless clients do
242. er 10 Quality of Service QoS f there are no tokens in the bucket the VMG stops transmitting until enough tokens are generated f not enough tokens are available the VMG treats the packet in either one of the following ways In traffic shaping Holds it in the queue until enough tokens are available in the bucket In traffic policing Drops it Transmits it but adds a DSCP mark The VMG may drop these marked packets if the network is overloaded Configure the bucket size to be equal to or less than the amount of the bandwidth that the interface can support It does not help if you set it to a bucket size over the interface s capability The smaller the bucket size the lower the data transmission rate and that may cause outgoing packets to be dropped A larger transmission rate requires a big bucket size For example use a bucket size of 10 kbytes to get the transmission rate up to 10 Mbps Single Rate Three Color Marker The Single Rate Three Color Marker srTCM defined in RFC 2697 is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to one user defined rate the Committed Information Rate CIR and two burst sizes the Committed Burst Size CBS and Excess Burst Size EBS The srTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels High packet loss priority level is referred to as red medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to a
243. er ADSL VDSL Profile Advanced Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION PhyR US Enable or disable PhyR US upstream for upstream transmission to the WAN PhyR US should be enabled if data being transmitted upstream is sensitive to noise However enabling PhyR US can decrease the US line rate Enabling or disabling PhyR will require the CPE to retrain For PhyR to function the DSLAM must also support PhyR and have it enabled PhyR DS Enable or disable PhyR DS downstream for downstream transmission from the WAN PhyR DS should be enabled if data being transmitted downstream is sensitive to noise However enabling PhyR DS can decrease the DS line rate Enabling or disabling PhyR will require the CPE to retrain For PhyR to function the DSLAM must also support PhyR and have it enabled Bitswap SRA Enable or disable Seamless Rate Adaption SRA Select Enable to have the VMG automa
244. er Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP MULTICAST User Defined 2 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IMAP4 TCP 143 The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e mail IMAPAS TCP 993 This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that runs over SSL IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NetBI OS TCP UDP 137 The Network Basic Input Output System is used for communication between computers in a LAN TCP UDP 138 TCP UDP 139 TCP UDP 445 NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 384 Appendix D Services Table 156 Examples of Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Networ
245. eries User s Guide 211 Chapter 15 USB Service 15 1 2 1 About File Sharing Workgroup name This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources such as a printer or files Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a network Shares When settings are set to default each USB device connected to the VMG is given a folder called a share If a USB hard drive connected to the VMG has more than one partition then each partition will be allocated a share You can also configure a share to be a sub folder or file on the USB device File Systems A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device Often different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have different file systems The file sharing feature on your VMG supports File Allocation Table FAT and FAT32 Common Internet File System The VMG uses Common Internet File System CIFS protocol for its file sharing functions CIFS compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the VMG CIFS protocol is Supported on Microsoft Windows Linux Samba and other operating systems refer to your systems specifications for CIFS compatibility 15 1 2 2 About Printer Server Print Server This is a computer or other device which manages one or more printers and which sends print jobs to each printer from the computer itself or other devices
246. ersion File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click this to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them Upload Click this to begin the upload process This process may take up to two minutes Upgrade 3G Package Current 3G This is the present 3G Package version and the date created Package Version File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click this to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them Upload Click this to begin the upload process This process may take up to two minutes Figure 174 Firmware Uploading ra Router is restarting now Please wait en the pri mplete attempting the router again The VMG automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 175 Network Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged After two minutes log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click OK to go back to the Firmware Upgrade screen VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 334
247. ertisement A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters IPv6 Cache An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cache destination cache prefix list and default router list The VMG maintains and updates its IPv6 caches constantly using the information from response messages In IPv6 the VMG configures a link local address automatically and then sends a neighbor solicitation message to check if the address is unique If there is an address to be resolved or verified the VMG also sends out a neighbor solicitation message When the VMG receives a neighbor advertisement in response it stores the neighbor s link layer address in the neighbor cache When the VMG uses a router solicitation message to query for a router and receives a router advertisement message it adds the router s information to the neighbor cache prefix list and destination cache The VMG creates an entry in the default router list cache if the router can be used as a default router When the VMG needs to send a packet it first consults the destination cache to determine the next hop If there is no matching entry in the destination cache the VMG uses the prefix list to determine whether the destination address is on link and can be reached directly without passing through a router If the address is unlink the address is considered as the next hop Otherwise the VMG determines the next
248. es folder e o0 Applications 7 t E 48 fis om E T wi aA Back Forward View Computer Home Favorites Applications 39 items 19 31 G8 available Address Book Calculator STN Ky 3 X Chess Clock DVD Player 5 Double click the Print Center icon eoo0 L Utilities 7 A fes E 45 v JM gt m ry i Pam Back Forward View Computer Home Favorites Applications 30 items 19 31 CB available n os Keychain Access Netinfo Manager Network Utility ODBC Administrator P Process Viewer 6 Click the Add icon at the top of the screen eoo Printer List ce Name W Status Stylus C43 Stopped 7 Setup your printer in the Printer List configuration screen Select IP Printing from the drop down list box 8 Inthe Printer s Address field type the IP address of your VMG 9 Deselect the Use default queue on server check box 10 Type LP1 in the Queue Name field VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 69 Chapter 4 Tutorials 11 Select your Printer Model from the drop down list box If the printer s model is not listed select Generic oo Printer List IP Printing He Printer s Address 192 168 1 1 Internet address or DNS name Complete and valid address Use default queue on server Queue Name LP1 Printer Model Generic E Cancel add gt 12 Click Add to select a printer model save and close the Printer List configura
249. es of ports enter the start port number here and the end port number in the End Port field End Port Enter the last port of the original destination port range To forward only one port enter the port number in the Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field To forward a series of ports enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the Start Port field above Translation This shows the port number to which you want the VMG to translate the incoming port For Start Port a range of ports enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated Translation End This shows the last port of the translated port range Port Server IP Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here Address Protocol Select the protocol supported by this virtual server Choices are TCP UDP or TCP UDP OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 11 3 The Applications Screen This screen provides a summary of all NAT applications and their configuration In addition this screen allows you to create new applications and or remove existing ones To access this screen click Network Setting NAT Applications The following screen appears B Note Each and every Internet activity such as online gaming and online video streaming requires atleast a port to communicate Applications provide commonly seen Intern
250. es unavailable Use the DoS screen to activate protection against DoS attacks Click Security Firewall DoS to display the following screen Figure 114 Security gt Firewall gt DoS Prevent DoS attack DoS Protection Blocking Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled Deny Ping Response Enable Disable Apply Cancel B Note When firewall is disabled the DoS and Deny Ping can not setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 Security gt Firewall gt DoS LABEL DESCRIPTION DoS Protection Select Enable to enable protection against DoS attacks Blocking Deny Ping Select Enable to block ping request packets Response VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 230 Chapter 17 Firewall Table 88 Security gt Firewall gt DoS continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 231 Chapter 17 Firewall VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 232 MAC Filter 18 1 Overview You can configure the VMG to permit access to clients based on their MAC addresses in the MAC Filter screen This applies to wired and wireless connections Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal charac
251. escribes the labels in this screen Table 59 Port Triggering Configuration Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select the check box to enable this rule Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters A Z a z 1 2 and so on WAN Interface Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port triggering rules Trigger Start The trigger port is a port or a range of ports that causes or triggers the VMG to record Port the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers Trigger End Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers Port Trigger Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP UDP or TCP UDP Open Start Port The open port is a port or a range of ports that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service The VMG forwards the traffic with this port or range of ports to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers Open End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers Open Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP UDP or TCP UDP OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving
252. ess Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL SECURITY TYPE Least Unique SSID Default Sep Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE802 1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA2 Most Secure Note You must enable the same wireless security settings on the VMG and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it IEEE 802 1x In June 2001 the IEEE 802 1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802 11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices Some advantages of IEEE 802 1x are User based identification that allows for roaming VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 365 Appendix B Wireless LANs Support for RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server Support for EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client server model that supports authentication authorization and accounting The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server The RADIUS server handles the following tasks Authentication Determines
253. ess device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding wireless electronics such as cordless phones Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles such as walls and ceilings between the AP and the wireless client Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously or add additional APs if necessary Try closing some programs that use the Internet especially peer to peer applications If the wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information it may have too many programs open that use the Internet What is a Server Set ID SSID An SSID is a name that uniquely identifies a wireless network The AP and all the clients within a wireless network must use the same SSID 40 5 USB Device Connection The VMG fails to detect my USB device 1 Disconnect the USB device 2 Reboot the VMG 3 If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on 4 Re connect your USB device to the VMG 40 6 UPnP When using UPnP and the VMG reboots my computer cannot detect UPnP and refresh My Network Places Local Network VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 350 Chapter 40 Troubleshooting 1 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the VMG s LAN port or from your computer 2 Re conn
254. ess the key You can continue to add listen to or delete tones or you can hang up the receiver when you are done Listening to Custom Tones Do the following to listen to a custom tone Pick up the phone and press on your phone s keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu Press a number from 1201 1208 followed by the key to listen to the tone You can continue to add listen to or delete tones or you can hang up the receiver when you are done Deleting Custom Tones Do the following to delete a custom tone Pick up the phone and press on your phone s keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu Press a number from 1301 1308 followed by the key to delete the tone of your choice Press 14 followed by the key if you wish to clear all your custom tones You can continue to add listen to or delete tones or you can hang up the receiver when you are done Quality of Service QoS Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to provide bandwidth for real time multimedia applications Type of Service ToS Network traffic can be classified by setting the ToS Type of Service values at the data source for example at the VMG so a server can decide the best method of delivery that is the least cost fastest route and so on
255. essage LTM Set MD Level Send Loopback Send Linktrace The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 147 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt 802 1ag LABEL DESCRIPTION 802 1ag Connectivity Fault Management Maintenance Select a level 0 7 under which you want to create an MA Domain MD Level Destination Enter the target device s MAC address to which the VMG performs a CFM loopback test MAC Address 802 1Q VLAN Type a VLAN ID 0 4095 for this MA ID VDSL Traffic This shows whether the VDSL traffic is activated Type Loopback This shows how many Loop Back Messages LBMs are sent and if there is any inorder or Message LBM outorder Loop Back Response LBR received from a remote MEP Linktrace This shows the destination MAC address in the Link Trace Response LTR Message LTM Set MD Level Click this button to configure the MD Maintenance Domain level Send Loopback Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LBM Loop Back Message to a specified remote end point Send Linktrace Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LTMs Link Trace Messages to a specified remote end point 39 5 OAM Ping Click Maintenance Diagnostic OAM Ping to open the screen shown next Use this screen to perform an OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance F4 or F5 loopback test on a PVC The VMG sends an OAM F4 or F5 packet to the DSLAM
256. et activities by categories and make configuring port forwarding easier Add New Application m EIE p AT m Application Forwarded The TCP port 30005 is reserved for TRO69 connection request port z PESDA Server IP Address Modify VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 185 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 56 Network Setting gt NAT gt Applications LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new Click this to add a new NAT application rule application Application This field shows the type of application that the service forwards Forwarded WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded Server IP This field displays the destination IP address for the service Address Modify Click the Delete icon to delete the rule 11 3 1 Add New Application This screen lets you create new NAT application rules Click Add new application in the Applications screen to open the following screen Figure 77 Applications Add Add New Application x WAN Interface VDSL v Server IP Address 192 168 1 Application Category Games v Application Forwarded Age of Empires v View Rule OK Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 Applications Add LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN Interface Select the WAN interface
257. etting gt Home Networking gt LAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface Group Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure LAN settings See Chapter 14 on page 205 for how to create a new interface group LAN IP Setup I Pv4 Address Enter the LAN IPv4 IP address you want to assign to your VMG in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 factory default Subnet Mask Prefix Length Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 factory default Your VMG automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP Address you enter so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so IGMP Snooping Status Select the Enable I GMP Snooping checkbox to allows the VMG to passively learn multicast group IGMP Mode Select Standard Mode to have the VMG forward multicast packets to a port that joins the multicast group and broadcast unknown multicast packets from the WAN to all LAN ports Select Blocking Mode to have the VMG block all unknown multicast packets from the WAN DHCP Server Sta te DHCP Select Enable to have the VMG act as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent Select Disable to stop the DHCP server on the VMG Select DHCP Relay to have the VMG forward DHCP request to the DHCP server DHCP Relay Server Address This field is only available when you select DHCP Relay in the DHCP field
258. etwork Map Icon View Mode ZyXEL vwucs313 530a g Quick Start Logout Network Map LE Internet VMG5313 B30A id Iweczro 7 Connection Status VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 73 Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens If you want to view information about a client click the client s name and Info Click the IP address if you want to change it If you want to change the name or icon of the client click Change name icon cl lo 2701871 Change icon name If you prefer to view the status in a list click List View in the Viewing mode selection box You can configure how often you want the Device to update this screen in Refresh interval Figure 13 Network Map List View Mode Network Map Viewing mode Refresh interval 7 Device Name iP Address MAC Address Address Source al Connect Type a twpcZT01871 01 192 168 1 94 00 1e 0b 24 18 93 DHCP Ethernet 5 3 The Status Screen Use this screen to view the status of the VMG Click Status to open this screen Figure 14 Status Screen ZyXEL VMG5313 B30A LI FF Quick Start Logout tu Simus GOCA GECIE 20 Seconds Y Device Information Host Name Router System Up Time 0 days 4 hours 8 minutes Model Number VMG5313 B30A Current Date Time 01 Jan 2014 04 08 41 Serial Number S090Y00000000 System Resource Firmware Version V1 00 AATS 0 CPU Usage WAN Information WAN Type Ethernet WAN WAN Name lan4 w
259. evices associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 English keyboard characters for the wireless LAN Max clients Specify the maximum number of clients that can connect to this network at the same time Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool Enhanced Select this check box to allow the VMG to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless Multicast unicast traffic Forwarding Guest WLAN Select this to create Guest WLANs for home and external clients Select the WLAN type in the Access Scenario field Access If you select Home Guest clients can connect to each other directly Scenario If you select External Guest clients are blocked from connecting to each other directly Maximum Specify the maximum rate for upstream wireless traffic to the WAN from this WLAN in Upstream kilobits per second Kbps Bandwidth Maximum Specify the maximum rate for downstream wireless traffic to this WLAN from the WAN in Downstream kilobits per second Kbps Bandwidth BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the VMG when wireless LAN is enabled E mail notificatio n when the wireless guest visit Notification to Email Enable Email Select this to have the VMG e mail you a notification when a wireless client is connected to
260. example IPv6 address 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1a2f 0000 IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways e Leading zeros in a block can be omitted So 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 can be written as 2001 db8 1a2b 15 0 0 1a2 0 Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address So 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0000 0000 0015 can be written as 2001 0db8 1a2 0000 0000 0015 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0015 2001 db8 1a2 0 0 15 Or 2001 db8 0 0 1a2 15 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits start from the left in the address compose the network address The prefix length is written as x where x is a number For example 2001 db8 1a2b 15 1a2 0 32 means that the first 32 bits 2001 db8 is the subnet prefix Link local Address A link local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network the LAN It is similar to a private IP address in IPv4 You can have the same link local address on multiple interfaces on a device A link local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80 10 The link local unicast address format is as follows Table 153 Link local Unicast Address Format 1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID 10 bits 54 bits 64 bits VMG5313 B10A B30A Ser
261. f your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address 192 168 1 1 See Appendix B on page 371 for details on how to set up your computer s IP address 10 44 If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click OK to go back to the Configuration screen Figure 179 Configuration Upload Error Configuration uploading failed The selected file contains an illegal Configuration file Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user entered configuration information and return the VMG to its factory defaults The following warning screen appears VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 338 Chapter 38 Configuration Figure 180 Reset Warning Message irm x Are you sure you want to restore factory default settings D ET Figure 181 Reset n Process Message ra Router is restarting now Please wait n th You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your VMG Refer to Section 1 7 on page 21 for more information on the RESET button 38 3 The Reboot Screen System restart allows you to reboot the VMG remotely without turning the power off You may need to do this if the VMG hangs for example Click Maintenance Reboot Click Reboot to have the VMG reboot This does not affect the VMG s configuration Figure 182 Maintenance gt Reboot Reboot Reboot
262. fer The Secure Real time Transport Protocol SRTP is a security profile of RTP It is designed to provide encryption and authentication for the RTP data in both unicast and multicast applications The VMG supports encryption using AES with a 128 bit key To protect data integrity SRTP uses a Hash based Message Authentication Code HMAC calculation with Secure Hash Algorithm SHA 1 to authenticate data HMAC SHA 1 produces a 80 or 32 bit authentication tag that is appended to the packet Both the caller and callee should use the same algorithms to establish an SRTP session Crypto Suite Select the encryption and authentication algorithm set used by the VMG to set up an SRTP media session with the peer device Select AES CM 128 HMAC SHA1 80 or AES CM 128 HMAC SHAI 32 to enable both data encryption and authentication for voice data Select AES CM 128 NULL to use 128 bit data encryption but disable data authentication Select NULL CIPHER HMAC SHATI1 80 to disable encryption but require authentication using the default 80 bit tag DTMF Mode DTMF Mode Control how the VMG handles the tones that your telephone makes when you push its buttons You should use the same mode your VoIP service provider uses RFC2833 send the DTMF tones in RTP packets PCM send the DTMF tones in the voice data stream This method works best when you are using a codec that does not use compression like G 711 Codecs that use compression lik
263. ferent network profiles Windows creates a separate network profile for each network you use You can choose specific options for each profile Home or Work v Public v Domain current profile Network discovery When network discovery is on this computer can see other network computers and devices and is visible to other network computers What is network discovery Turn on network discovery File and printer sharing When file and printer sharing is on files and printers that you have shared from this computer can be accessed by people on the network Turn on file and printer sharing Turn off file and printer sharing fj Save changes Cancel 8 5 The Additional Subnet Screen Use the Additional Subnet screen to configure IP alias and public static IP IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface The VMG supports multiple logical LAN interfaces via its physical Ethernet VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 148 Chapter 8 Home Networking interface with the VMG itself as the gateway for the LAN network When you use IP alias you can also configure firewall rules to control access to the LAN s logical network subnet If your ISP provides the Public LAN service the VMG may use an LAN IP address that can be accessed from the WAN Click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Additional Subnet to display the sc
264. fic rate of the member QoS classes is less than the committed rate the device applies the conforming action to the traffic Committed Burst Size Specify the committed burst size for packet bursts This must be equal to or less than the peak burst size two rate three color or excess burst size single rate three color if it is also configured This is the maximum size of the first token bucket in a traffic metering algorithm VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 174 Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS Table 51 Policer Setup Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Conforming Specify what the VMG does for packets within the committed rate and burst size green Action marked packets e Pass Send the packets without modification e DSCP Mark Change the DSCP mark value of the packets Enter the DSCP mark value to use Non Specify what the VMG does for packets that exceed the excess burst size or peak rate and Conforming burst size red marked packets Action Drop Discard the packets e DSCP Mark Change the DSCP mark value of the packets Enter the DSCP mark value to use The packets may be dropped if there is congestion on the network Available Class Select a QoS classifier to apply this QoS policer to traffic that matches the QoS classifier Selected Class Highlight a QoS classifier in the Available Class box and use the gt button to move it to the Selected Class box To remove a
265. following table describes the fields in this screen Table 98 Trusted CA View LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate Type This field displays general information about the certificate ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate such as Common Name CN Organizational Unit OU Organization O and Country C Certificate This read only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form You can copy and paste the certificate into an e mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution via floppy disk for example Back Click Back to return to the previous screen 21 4 2 Import Trusted CA Certificate Click the Import Certificate button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen The VMG trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 248 Chapter 21 Certificates Figure 128 Trusted CA Import Certificate Import Certificate Binary X 509 The certificate is in one of the following formats PEM Base 64 encoded Binary PKCS 7 PEM Base 64
266. g DNS to open the DNS Entry screen DNS Entry B Notes Figure 89 Network Setting gt DNS gt DNS Entry Domain Name System DNS translates hostnames into IP addresses for the purpose of locating and addressing these devices worldwide You can start by adding a new DNS entry Add new DNS entry The hastnames needs combination of the host s local name with its domain s name For example Mycomputer home consists of a local hostname Mycomputer and the domain name home The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 67 Network Setting gt DNS gt DNS Entry LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new DNS Click this to create a new DNS entry entry This is the index number of the entry Hostname This indicates the host name or domain name IP Address This indicates the IP address assigned to this computer Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule 12 2 1 Add Edit DNS Entry You can manually add or edit the VMG s DNS name and IP address entry Click Add new DNS entry in the DNS Entry screen or the Edit icon next to the entry you want to edit The screen shown next appears VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 200 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup Figure 90 DNS Entry Add Edit DNS Entry Configuration x Host Name IPv4 Address Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in th
267. g WPS Section 4 4 2 on page 42 or manual configuration Section 4 4 3 on page 46 4 4 1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings This example uses the following parameters to set up a wireless network SSID Example Security Mode WPA2 PSK Pre Shared Key DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork 802 11 Mode 802 11b g n Mixed 1 Click Network Setting gt Wireless to open the General screen Select More Secure as the security level and WPA2 PSK as the security mode Configure the screen using the provided parameters see page 41 Click Apply VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 41 Chapter 4 Tutorials Wireless Network Setup Band 2 4GHz v Wireless Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled Channel Auto v Current 2 Bandwidth 20MHz v Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name SSID ZyXEL DD34 Max clients 16 C Hide SSID C Multicast Forwarding Max Upstream Bandwidth z Kbps Max Downstream Bandwidth Kbps BSSID 10 20 30 11 22 34 Security Level No Security Basic More Secure Recommended o 00 o GENENNNNNSGNNNO _ e Cancel 2 Go to the Wireless gt Others screen and select 802 11b g n Mixed in the 802 11 Mode field Click Apply Wireless Advanced Setup RTS CTS Threshold 347 Fragmentation Threshold 2346 Auto Channel Timer fo min Output Power 100
268. g settings DMZ Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen ALG Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG Address Mapping Use this screen to change your Device s address mapping settings Sessions Use this screen to configure the maximum number of NAT sessions each client host is allowed to have through the VMG DDNS DNS Entry Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes Dynamic DNS Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address Vlan Group Vlan Group Use this screen to group and tag VLAN IDs to outgoing traffic from the specified interface Interface Interface Use this screen to map a port to a PVC or bridge group Grouping Grouping USB Service File Sharing Use this screen to enable file sharing via the VMG Media Server Use this screen to use the VMG as a media server Print Server Use this screen to enable the print server on the VMG and get the model name of the associated printer Power Power This screen is only available for administrators Use this screen to Management Management manually turn on off specific interface s and or all LEDs immediately Auto Switch Off This screen is only available for administrators Use this screen to configure schedules to have the VMG automatically turn on off specific interface s and or all LEDs Security Settings VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guid
269. ge Integrity Check MIC is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets altering them and resending them The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC If they do not match it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism MIC with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network The encryption mechanisms used for WPA 2 and WPA 2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA 2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials The common password approach makes WPA 2 PSK susceptible to brute force password guessing attacks but it s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent single alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption keys This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys a weakness of WEP User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802 1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four CCMP 4 way handshake and shortens the time required to connect to a network
270. gle port number or the range of port numbers of the source VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 229 Chapter 17 Firewall Table 87 Access Control Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Custom This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol Destination Port ees Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the destination Policy Use the drop down list box to select whether to discard DROP deny and send an ICMP destination unreachable message to the sender of REJ ECT or allow the passage of ACCEPT packets that match this rule Direction Use the drop down list box to select the direction of traffic to which this rule applies Enable Rate Select this check box to set a limit on the upstream downstream transmission rate for the Limit specified protocol Specify how many packets per minute or second the transmission rate is Scheduler Rules Select a schedule rule for this ACL rule form the drop down list box You can configure a new schedule rule by click Add New Rule This will bring you to the Security Scheduler Rules screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 17 5 The DoS Screen DoS Denial of Service attacks can flood your Internet connection with invalid packets and connection requests using so much bandwidth and so many resources that Internet access becom
271. gnment in your network ignore this section This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer After the installation is complete select Start gt All Programs gt Dibbler DHCPv6 gt Client Install as service Select Start gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services Double click Dibbler a DHCPv6 client VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 380 Appendix C IPv6 i Services ile Action View Help m B RM gt By Services Local Hs Services Local Dibbler a DHCPv6 client Name Description Status Startup Type Log On As DCOM Server Process Launcher Provides la Started Automatic Local System ADH en n a g ma oca e Start the service i TEA Automatic Local Syster e4 Distributed Link Tracking Client Maintains li Started Automatic Local System y Distributed Transaction Coordinator Coordinate Manual Network S Description Bs DNS Client Resolves a Started Automatic Network 5 Dibbler a portable DHCPv6 Bs Error Reporting Service Allows erro Started Automatic Local System This is DHCPv6 ci 3 Sy Event Log Enables ev Started Automatic Local System SS cient version Sy Extensible Authentication Protocol Provides wi Manual Local System 0 7 2 Sy Fast User Switching Compatibility Provides m Manual Local System S amp sFLEXnet Licensing Service This servic Manual
272. group You can enter up to 30 characters You can use letters Name numbers hyphens and underscores Spaces are not allowed VLAN ID Enter a unique ID number from 1 to 4 094 to identify this VLAN group Outgoing traffic is tagged with this ID if Txtagging is selected below LAN If LAN port 4 is configured as a WAN port it will not display here Select Include to add the associated LAN interface to this VLAN group Select Txtagging to tag outgoing traffic from the associated LAN port with the VLAN ID number entered above Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the VMG Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 204 Interface Group 14 1 Overview By default all LAN and WAN interfaces on the VMG are in the same group and can communicate with each other Create interface groups to have the VMG assign the IP addresses in different domains to different groups Each group acts as an independent network on the VMG This lets devices connected to an interface group s LAN interfaces communicate through the interface group s WAN or LAN interfaces but not other WAN or LAN interfaces 14 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Interface Group screens let you create multiple networks on the VMG Section 14 2 on page 205 14 2 The Interface Group Screen You can manually add a LAN interface to a new group Alternatively you can have the VMG automatically ad
273. gt Add Keyword Add Blocked Site URL Keyword Blocked Site URL Keyword Blocked Site URL Keyword Blocked Site URL Keyword Blocked Site URL Keyword Blocked Site URL Keyword x OK Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 91 Parental Control Rule Add Edit Control Profile Name Home Network User LABEL DESCRIPTION General Active Select the checkbox to activate this parental control rule Parental Enter a descriptive name for the rule Select the LAN user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop down list box If you select Custom enter the LAN user s MAC address If you select All the rule applies to all LAN users Rule List In Home Network User select Custom enter the LAN user s MAC address then click the sign to enter a computer MAC address for this PCP Up to five are allowed Click the sign to remove one Internet Access Schedule Day Select check boxes for the days that you want the VMG to perform parental control Time Drag the time bar to define the time that the LAN user is allowed access Authorized access or denied access No access Click the sign above the time bar to add a new time bar Up to three are allowed Authorized Select this to allow access for the times defined above access No access Select this to deny access for the times defined above Network Service Network Service Setting
274. he ISP IPv6 Addressing The 128 bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16 bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons This is an example IPv6 address 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways e Leading zeros in a block can be omitted So 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 can be written as 2001 db8 1a2b 15 0 0 1a2f 0 Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address So 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0000 0000 0015 can be written as 2001 0db8 1a2 0000 0000 0015 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0015 2001 db8 1a2 0 0 15 Or 2001 db8 0 0 1a2 15 IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits start from the left in the address compose the network address The prefix length is written as x where x is a number For example 2001 db8 1a2b 15 1a2 0 32 means that the first 32 bits 2001 db8 is the subnet prefix VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 105 Chapter 6 Broadband VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 106 T Wireless 7 1 Overview This chapter describes the VMG s Network Setting Wireless screens Use these screens to set up your VMG s wireless connection 7 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter This section describes
275. he VMG act as a DHCPv6 server and pass IPv6 addresses to DHCPv6 clients Stateless and Stateful The VMG uses both IPv6 stateless and stateful autoconfiguration The LAN IPv6 clients can obtain IPv6 addresses either through router advertisements or through DHCPv6 LAN IPv6 DNS Assign Setup Select how the VMG provide DNS server and domain name information to the clients From Router Advertisement The VMG provides DNS information through router advertisements e From DHCPv6 Server The VMG provides DNS information through DHCPv6 From RA amp DHCPv6 Server The VMG provides DNS information through both router advertisements and DHCPv6 DHCPv6 Configuration DHCPv6 State This shows the status of the DHCPv6 IPv6 Router Advertisement State RADVD State This shows whether RADVD is enabled or not IPv6 DNS Values IPv6 DNS Select From I SP if your ISP dynamically assigns IPv6 DNS server information Server 1 3 Select User Defined if you have the IPv6 address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server IPv6 addresses the VMG passes to the DHCP clients Select None if you do not want to configure IPv6 DNS servers DNS Query Select how the VMG handles clients DNS information requests Scenario IPv4 IPv6 DNS Server The VMG forwards the requests to both the IPv4 and IPv6 DNS servers and sends clients the first DNS information it receives IPv6 DNS Server Only The VMG forwards the requests t
276. he checkbox to enable the VMG to provide public IP addresses by DHCP server Enable ARP Proxy Select the checkbox to enable the ARP Address Resolution Protocol proxy VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 149 Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 34 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Additional Subnet continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 8 6 The STB Vendor ID Screen Set Top Box STB devices with dynamic IP addresses sometimes don t renew their IP addresses before the lease time expires This could lead to IP address conflicts if the STB continues to use an IP address that gets assigned to another device Use this screen to list the Vendor IDs of connected STBs to have the VMG automatically create static DHCP entries for them when they request IP addresses Click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt STB Vendor ID to open this screen Figure 54 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt STB Vendor ID Static DHCP UPnP Additional Subnet ISTIOT WekeonLan TFTP Server Name Device can idenitify the STB base on configured Vendor ID Please enter Vendor ID for STB Vendor ID 1 Vendor ID 2 Vendor ID 3 Vendor ID 4 Vendor ID 5 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt STB Vendor ID
277. he clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP s DHCP server cannot connect to the Internet using a 3G connection 1 The DSL and Ethernet connections have priority in that order If the DSL or Ethernet connection is up then the 3G connection will be down 2 Make sure you have connected a compatible 3G dongle to the USB port 3 Make sure you have configured Network Setting Broadband 3G Backup correctly Check that the VMG is within range of a 3G base station cannot access the VMG anymore had access to the VMG but my connection is not available anymore 1 Your session with the VMG may have expired Try logging into the VMG again 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 6 on page 20 3 Turn the VMG off and on 4 Ifthe problem continues contact your vendor 40 4 Wireless Internet Access What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection How can solve this problem The following factors may cause interference Obstacles walls ceilings furniture and so on VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 349 Chapter 40 Troubleshooting Building Materials metal doors aluminum studs Electrical devices microwaves monitors electric motors cordless phones and other wireless devices To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection you can Move your wirel
278. he device to turn it on A MAC address consists of six hexadecimal character pairs Wake up Click this to send a wake up packet to wake up the specified device 8 8 The TFTP Server Name Screen Use the TFTP Server screen to identify a TFTP server for configuration file download using DHCP option 66 RFC 2132 defines the option 66 open standard DHCP option 66 supports the IP address or the hostname of a single TFTP server Click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt TFTP Server Name to open this screen Figure 56 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt TFTP Server Name TFTP Server Name This option 66 is used to identify a TFTP server name TFTP Server Name Apply Cancel VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 151 Chapter 8 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt TFTP Server Name LABEL DESCRIPTION TFTP Server Enter the the IP address or the hostname of a single TFTP server Name Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 8 9 Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter 8 9 1 LANs WANs and the VMG The actual physical connection determines whether the VMG ports are LAN or WAN ports There are two separate IP networks one inside the LAN networ
279. he statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service provider Upstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service provider FEC This is the number of Far End Corrected blocks CRC This is the number of Cyclic Redundancy Checks ES This is the number of Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing at least one errored block or at least one defect SES This is the number of Severely Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing 30 or more errored blocks or at least one defect This is a subset of ES UAS This is the number of UnAvailable Seconds LOS This is the number of Loss Of Signal seconds LOF This is the number of Loss Of Frame seconds LOM This is the number of Loss of Margin seconds VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 310 28 1 Overview 3G Statistics Use the 3G Statistics screens to look at 3G Internet connection status 28 2 The 3G Statistics Screen To open this screen click System Monitor gt 3G Statistics The 3G status is available on this screen only when you insert a compatible 3G dongle in a USB port on the VMG Figure 158 System Monitor gt 3G Statistics Monitor Status 3G Statistics displays the 3G information Refresh Interval Currently notin 3G modulation 30 Seconds Y The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 131 System Monitor gt 3G
280. he wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password Then they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network 1 Some wireless devices such as scanners can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses 2 Hexadecimal characters are 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E and F VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 128 Chapter 7 Wireless 7 10 3 4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Encryption is like a secret code If you do not know the secret code you cannot understand the message The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication See Section 7 10 3 3 on page 128 for information about this Table 29 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER Weakest No Security WPA Static WEP t WPA PSK Strongest WPA2 PSK WPA2 For example if the wireless network has a RADIUS server you can choose WPA or WPA2 If users do not log in to the wireless network you can choose no encryption Static WEP WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Usually you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports For example suppose you have a wireless network with the VMG and you do not ha
281. hen you want the remote IPSec router to be able to distinguish between VPN connection requests that come in from IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses When you select DNS or E mail in the Local I D Type field type a domain name or e mail address by which to identify this VMG in this field Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces although trailing spaces are truncated The domain name or e mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string Remote ID Type Select I P to identify the remote IPSec router by its IP address Select E mail to identify the remote IPSec router by an e mail address Select DNS to identify the remote IPSec router by a domain name Select ASN1DN to identify the remote IPSec router by the subject field in a certificate This is used only with certificate based authentication Remote ID Content The configuration of the remote content depends on the remote ID type For IP type the IP address of the computer with which you will make the VPN connection If you configure this field to 0 0 0 0 or leave it blank the VMG will use the address in the Remote I PSec Gateway Address field refer to the Remote I PSec Gateway Address field description For DNS or E mail type a domain name or e mail address by which to identify the remote IPSec router Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces although trailing spaces are truncated The domain name or e mail address is for identifi
282. his enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site By implementing PPPoE directly on the VMG rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the VMG does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LANs computers will have access RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit LLC based multiplexing and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit VC based multiplexing Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed information Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit VC is carrying Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP VC based Multiplexing VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 101 Chapter 6 Broadband In this case by prior mutual agreement each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 carries IP etc VC based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical LLC based Multiplexing
283. his field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate such as Common Name CN OU Organizational Unit or department Organization O State ST and Country C It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information Type This field displays general information about the certificate ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate Modify Click the View icon to open a screen with an in depth list of information about the certificate or certification request Click the Remove button to delete the certificate or certification request You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 247 Chapter 21 Certificates 21 4 1 View Trusted CA Certificate Click the View icon in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen Use this screen to view in depth information about the certification authority s certificate Figure 127 Trusted CA View Name certnew cer Type ca Subject DC com DC ZyXELICN ZyXELCA Certificate BEGIN CERTIFICATE Z IMIIEaTCCA1GgAwIBAglQGKaoaDflmLtDGHjtntb31jANBgkqhkiG9wOBAQUF ADA IMRMwEQYKCZImiZPyLGOBGRYDY29tMRUwEwYKCZImiZPyL GQBGRYFWnIYRUWwXED SHE p5WEVMQOEwHhcNMDcwMjA1MDMwMTIOWhCNMTcwMjA1MDMwOTQS5 WIA MRMWE QYKCZImiZPyL GQBGRYDY29tMRUwEwYKCZlImiZPyL GOBGRYFWnIYRUwXxED Bonvena 1p5WEVMQOEwggEiMAOGCSqGSIb3DQEBAQUAAA4IBDwAwggEKAOoIBAQ si eid Back The
284. his interface 25 4 The NAT Status Screen Click System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt NAT to open the following screen The figure in this screen shows the NAT session statistics for hosts currently connected on the VMG VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 303 Chapter 25 Traffic Status Figure 155 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt NAT Refresh Interval Device Name twnb11477 05 The current connection numbers built by each LAN client are displayed in the following table A higher number of open sessions that a LAN client creates means busier Internet activities he or she is engaging in 15 Seconds v IPv4 Address MAC Address No of Open Session 192 168 1 2 00 1c 25 8c ac ac 30 Total 0 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 128 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt NAT LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select how often you want the VMG to update this screen Device Name This displays the name of the connected host IP Address This displays the IP address of the connected host MAC Address This displays the MAC address of the connected host No of Open This displays the number of NAT sessions currently opened for the connected Session host Total This displays what percentage of NAT sessions the VMG can support is currently being used by all connected hosts VMG5313 B10A B30A Series Use
285. hold RX Chain Power Save XPress Technology 2347 2346 min 10095 v 100 ms 1 ms 802 11b g n Mixed Off ng v v Auto v Enable Enable Enable Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Others LABEL DESCRIPTION RTS CTS Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS Request To Send CTS Threshold Clear To Send handshake Enter a value between 0 and 2347 Fragmentation Threshold This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent Enter a value between 256 and 2346 Auto Channel Timer If you set the channel to Auto in the Network Setting gt Wireless gt General screen specify the interval in minutes for how often the VMG scans for the best channel Enter 0 to disable the periodical scan Output Power Set the output power of the VMG If there is a high density of APs in an area decrease the output power to reduce interference with other APs Select one of the following 20 40 60 80 or 100 Beacon Interval When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon it includes with it a beacon interval This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low power mode before waking up to handle the beacon This value can be set from 50ms to 1000ms A high value h
286. hop from the default router list or routing table Once the next hop IP address is known the VMG looks into the neighbor cache to get the link layer address and sends the packet when the neighbor is reachable If the VMG cannot find an entry in the neighbor cache or the state for the neighbor is not reachable it starts the address resolution process This helps reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages Multicast Listener Discovery The Multicast Listener Discovery MLD protocol defined in RFC 2710 is derived from IPv4 s Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 IGMPv2 MLD uses I CMPv6 message types rather than IGMP message types MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3 MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4 MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join MLD Messages A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast forwarding table When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group it sends an MLD Report message for that address An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message When an MLD host wants to leave a multicast group it can send a Done message to the router or
287. host name of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the VMG MAC Address Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the VMG in these address fields Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 234 19 1 Overview Parental Control Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL You can also define time periods and days during which the VMG performs parental control on a specific user 19 2 The Parental Control Screen Use this screen to enable parental control view the parental control rules and schedules Click Security gt Parental Control to open the following screen Figure 116 Security gt Parental Control Parental Control created General Parental Control Add new PCP To limit the time of using Internet or to prevent family members from inappropriate contents and online activities the administrator can define Parental Control Profile PCP to a specific home network user A maximum of 20 profiles can be Parental Control Profile PCP Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled Default unkno fl 470 GOES GE cp 00 00 24 00 None None 3 T test unkn
288. hows the name of the SIP service provider Account No This shows the SIP number Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SIP account Click the Delete icon to delete this SIP account from the VMG 23 3 1 The SIP Account Add Edit Screen Use this screen to configure a SIP account and map it to a phone port To access this screen click the Add new account button or click the Edit icon of an entry in the Vol P gt SIP gt SIP Account screen Note Click more to see all the fields in the screen You don t necessarily need to use all these fields to set up your account Click less to see and configure only the fields needed for this feature VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 267 Chapter 23 Voice Figure 138 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account gt Add new accoun Edit SIP Account Selection SIP Account Selection SIP Service Provider Association SIP Account Associated with General Call Features v Send Caller ID Oe able Call Transfer El amp nabie Call waiting Call Waiting Reject Timer Caution If you enable Cai ClEnable Unconditional Forward Ll enable Bus ard Cl Enable No Answer Forward No Answer Time Waiting Busy Forwa ADD NEW Caution If you enable Unconditional Forward Busy Forward and No Answer will be ignored SemiceProvider 1 v LJ Enable Do Not Disturb Enable SIP Account Warning SIP Account Number changeme It you e
289. ies User s Guide 375 Appendix C IPv6 Global Address A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet It is similar to a public IP address in IPv4 A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3 Unspecified Address An unspecified address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or is used as the source address when a device does not have its own address It is similar to 0 0 0 0 in IPv4 Loopback Address A loopback address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 or 1 allows a host to send packets to itself It is similar to 127 0 0 1 in IPv4 Multicast Address In IPv6 multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6 A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts in a multicast group Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group A multicast address has a predefined prefix of ff00 8 The following table describes some of the predefined multicast addresses Table 154 Predefined Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION FFO1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 All hosts on a local node FF01 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 All routers on a local node FF02 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 All hosts on a local connected link FF02 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 All routers on a local connected link FF05 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 All routers on a local site FF05 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 All DHCP severs on a local site The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reser
290. ies User s Guide 245 Chapter 21 Certificates Figure 124 Certificate Request Created Certificate Details Certificate signing request successfully created Note a request is not yet functional have it signed by a Certificate Authority and load the signed certificate to this device Name test Type request Subject CN ccSd4e VMG8324 B10A S090Y00000000 0 abc ST tw C US Signing Request eade CERTIFICATE REQUEST MIBmDCCAQECAQAwWDEuMCwGA1UEAXxMIY2M1ZDRILURTTCOOOTFTTIUtQjF Cdjit kb Load Signed Close 21 3 2 Load Signed Certificate After you create a certificate request and have it signed by a Certificate Authority in the Local Certificates screen click the certificate request s Load Signed icon to import the signed certificate into the VMG Note You must remove any spaces from the certificate s filename before you can import it Figure 125 Load Signed Certificate Paste signed certificate Certificate Name test B Certificate BEGIN CERTIFICATE insert certificate here gt I END CERTIFICATE A oniy Cancer VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 246 Chapter 21 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 96 Load Signed Certificate LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate This is the name of the signed certificate Name Certificate Copy and paste the signed certificate
291. if the host computer sent the packets to itself making the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself Ping of Death Ping of Death uses a ping utility to create and send an IP packet that exceeds the maximum 65 536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification This may cause systems to crash hang or reboot SPI Stateful Packet Inspection SPI tracks each connection crossing the firewall and makes sure it is valid Filtering decisions are based not only on rules but also context For example traffic from the WAN may only be allowed to cross the firewall in response to a request from the LAN VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 224 Chapter 17 Firewall 17 2 The Firewall Screen Use this screen to set the security level of the firewall on the VMG Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply Click Security gt Firewall to display the General screen Figure 109 Security gt Firewall gt General General The firewall blocks unauthorized accesses to your network Drag and drop the indicator to set a security level Also note that a higher firewall level means more restrictions to the Internet activities you want to do IPv4 Firewall Enable Disable IPv6 Firewall Enable Disable Medium Recommended v v v LAN to WAN v WAN to LAN x B Note 1 LAN to WAN Allow access to all internet services 2 WAN to
292. ime This field shows the time period the interface s and or LEDs are turned on Wireless This field shows whether this schedule applies to the wireless LAN interface DSL WAN This field shows whether this schedule applies to the DSL WAN interface Eth WAN This field shows whether this schedule applies to the Ethernet WAN interface LAN1 LAN4 This field shows whether this schedule applies to the corresponding LAN interface LED This field shows whether this schedule applies to the LEDs Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 16 3 1 The Auto Switch Off Add or Modify Screen Use this screen to manage the auto switch off schedules To access this screen click the Add or modify rules link in the Network Setting gt Power Management gt Auto Switch Off screen Figure 106 Network Setting gt Power Managment gt Auto Switch Off gt Add or modify rules Add new rule 1 BedTime BORDOnEE wo 2W 2 NoWireless EIEBEAERS EH aly ZW The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 81 Network Setting gt Power Managment gt Auto Switch Off Network Setting gt Power Managment gt Auto Switch Off gt Add or modify rules LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new rule Click this link to create a rule This is the index number of a rule Rule Name This field shows the name of the rule Day This field shows the week days of th
293. in the address compose the network address This field displays the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask MLD Snooping Multicast Listener Discovery MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD hosts who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network Select Enable MLD Snooping to activate MLD Snooping on the VMG This allows the VMG to check MLD packets passing through it and learn the multicast group membership It helps reduce multicast traffic VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 143 Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 30 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt LAN Setup continued Address Assign Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION MLD Mode Select Standard Mode to have the VMG forward IPv6 multicast packets to a port that joins the IPv6 multicast group and broadcast unknown IPv6 multicast packets from the WAN to all LAN ports Select Blocking Mode to have the VMG block all unknown IPv6 multicast packets from the WAN LAN I Pv6 Select how you want to obtain an IPv6 address Stateless The VMG uses IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration RADVD Router Advertisement Daemon is enabled to have the VMG send IPv6 prefix information in router advertisements periodically and in response to router solicitations DHCPv6 server is disabled e Stateful The VMG uses IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration The DHCPv6 server is enabled to have t
294. ing or TraceRoute test The test result will be shown in the Info area Ping TraceRoute Test Info TCP IP Address URL or IPv4 IPv6 Address Ping Trace Route Nslookup The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 146 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt Ping amp TraceRoute amp NsLookup LABEL DESCRIPTION URL or IP Type the IP address of a computer that you want to perform ping traceroute or nslookup in Address order to test a connection Ping Click this to ping the IP address that you entered TraceRoute Click this button to perform the traceroute function This determines the path a packet takes to the specified computer Nslookup Click this button to perform a DNS lookup on the IP address of a computer you enter 39 4 802 1ag Click Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt 8 2 1ag to open the following screen Use this screen to perform CFM actions VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 341 Chapter 39 Diagnostic Figure 184 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt 802 1ag Ping amp Traceroute amp Nslookup This diagnostic is only used for VDSL PTM mode 802 1ag Connectivity Fault Management Maintenance Domain MD Level 20 Destination MAC Address 802 1 VLAN ID 0 4095 0 VDSL Traffic Type Test the connection to another Maintenance End Point MEP Loopback Message LBM Test the connection to another Maintenance End Point MEP Inactive Linktrace M
295. inter via your VMG To access this screen click Network Setting gt USB Service gt Print Server Figure 103 Network Setting gt USB Service gt Printer Server File Sharing Print Server When a supported printer is attached to this device it can act as a server to accept print jobs from LAN clients on your network In other words you can use any of your computers to print something you want Print Server Enable Disable B Note To use the print server define a network printer with URL http 192 168 1 1 631 printers PRINTER pp Concel The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 78 Network Setting gt USB Service gt Print Server LABEL DESCRIPTION Print Server Select Enable to have the VMG share a USB printer Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 217 Chapter 15 USB Service VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 218 Power Management 16 1 Overview Power management allows you to turn on off one or more interfaces and all LED lights without power off the whole system when necessary You can configure a schedule to do so automatically or manually do it on the Web Configurator 16 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Power Management screen to manually turn on off interface s and or LEDs Section 16 2 on page 219 Use the
296. ire IP packet to transmit it securely A Tunnel mode is required for gateway services to provide access to internal systems Tunnel mode is fundamentally an IP tunnel with authentication and encryption This is the most common mode of operation Tunnel mode is required for gateway to gateway and host to gateway communications Tunnel mode communications have two sets of IP headers Outside header The outside IP header contains the destination IP address of the VPN gateway nside header The inside IP header contains the destination IP address of the final system behind the VPN gateway The security protocol appears after the outer IP header and before the inside IP header 22 4 3 IKE Phases There are two phases to every IKE Internet Key Exchange negotiation phase 1 Authentication and phase 2 Key Exchange A phase 1 exchange establishes an IKE SA and the second one uses that SA to negotiate SAs for IPSec VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 260 Chapter 22 VPN Figure 135 Two Phases to Set Up the IPSec SA Qe TT C Phasel IPSec SA In phase 1 you must Choose a negotiation mode Authenticate the connection by entering a pre shared key Choose an encryption algorithm Choose an authentication algorithm Choose a Diffie Hellman public key cryptography key group Set the IKE SA lifetime This field allows you to determine how long an IKE SA should stay up before it times out An IKE SA time
297. is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation NAT feature of the VMG The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise Let s say you select 192 168 1 0 as the network number which covers 254 individual addresses from 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 254 zero and 255 are reserved In other words the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 for your VMG but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your VMG will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the VMG unless you are instructed to do otherwise VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 153 Chapter 8 Home Networking Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet for example only between your two branch offices you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Auth
298. is screen Table 68 DNS Entry Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Host Name Enter the host name of the DNS entry IP Address Enter the IP address of the DNS entry Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 12 3 The Dynamic DNS Screen Use this screen to change your VMG s DDNS Click Network Setting gt DNS gt Dynamic DNS The screen appears as shown Figure 91 Network Setting gt DNS gt Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS can update your current dynamic IP into a hostname Use the settings to set up dynamic DNS information Dynamic DNS Setup Dynamic DNS Enable Disable Service Provider www DynDNS com v Hostname Username Password Apply Cancel Dynamic DNS Status User Authentication Result Last Updated Time Current Dynamic IP The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 69 Network Setting gt DNS gt gt Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Dynamic DNS Setup Dynamic DNS Select Enable to use dynamic DNS VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 201 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup Table 69 Network Setting gt DNS gt gt Dynamic DNS continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Provider Select your Dynamic DNS service provider from the drop down list box Hostname Type the domain name assigned to your VMG by your Dynamic DNS provider You
299. istration is initiated by the User Agent Client UAC running in the VoIP gateway the VMG The gateway must be configured with information letting it know where to send the REGISTER message as well as the relevant user and authorization data A SIP registration has a limited lifespan The User Agent Client must renew its registration within this lifespan If it does not do so the registration data will be deleted from the SIP registrar s database and the connection broken VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 283 Chapter 23 Voice 1 The VMG attempts to register all enabled subscriber ports when it is switched on When you enable a subscriber port that was previously disabled the VMG attempts to register the port immediately Authorization Requirements SIP registrations and subsequent SIP requests require a username and password for authorization These credentials are validated via a challenge response system using the HTTP digest mechanism as detailed in RFC 3261 SIP Session Initiation Protocol SIP Servers SIP is a client server protocol A SIP client is an application program or device that sends SIP requests A SIP server responds to the SIP requests When you use SIP to make a VoIP call it originates at a client and terminates at a server A SIP client could be a computer or a SIP phone One device can act as both a SIP client and a SIP server SIP User Agent A SIP user agent can make and receive VoIP te
300. itched telephone networks SIP Identities A SIP account uses an identity sometimes referred to as a SIP address A complete SIP identity is called a SIP URI Uniform Resource Identifier A SIP account s URI identifies the SIP account in a way similar to the way an e mail address identifies an e mail account The format of a SIP identity is SIP Number 9SI P Service Domain SIP Number The SIP number is the part of the SIP URI that comes before the symbol A SIP number can use letters like in an e mail address johndoe your ITSP com for example or numbers like a telephone number 1122334455 VolP provider com for example SIP Service Domain The SIP service domain of the VoIP service provider is the domain name in a SIP URI For example if the SIP address is 11223344559 Vol P provider com then Vol P provider com is the SIP service domain SIP Registration Each VMG is an individual SIP User Agent UA To provide voice service it has a public IP address for SIP and RTP protocols to communicate with other servers A SIP user agent has to register with the SIP registrar and must provide information about the users it represents as well as its current IP address for the routing of incoming SIP requests After successful registration the SIP server knows that the users identified by their dedicated SIP URIs are represented by the UA and knows the IP address to which the SIP requests and responses should be sent Reg
301. iting hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone number Call Waiting Specify a time of seconds that the VMG waits before rejecting the second call if you do not answer it Enable Select this if you want the VMG to forward all incoming calls to the specified Unconditional phone number Forward Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right Enable Busy Select this if you want the VMG to forward incoming calls to the specified phone Forward number if the phone port is busy Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right If you have call waiting the incoming call is forwarded to the specified phone number if you reject or ignore the second incoming call Enable No Answer Forward Select this if you want the VMG to forward incoming calls to the specified phone number if the call is unanswered See No Answer Time Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right No Answer Time This field is used by the Active No Answer Forward feature Enter the number of seconds the VMG should wait for you to answer an incoming call before it considers the call is unanswered Enable Do Not Disturb Select this to set your phone to not ring when someone calls you Enable Anonymous Call Block Select this if you do not want the phone to ring when someone tries to call you with caller ID deactivated Enable Call Completion on Busy Subscriber CCBS
302. ive and enter or select the following values Name E mail Interface WAN Priority 1 High Weight 8 Rate Limit 5 000 kbps M Active Name E mail Interface WAN xi Priority aC High gt Weight si Buffer Management Drop Tail OT Rate Limit Boon kbps Ee Click Class Setup gt Add new Classifier to create a new class Check Active and follow the settings as shown in the screen below VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 54 Chapter 4 Tutorials Please follow the guidance through step 1 5 to configure a QoS rule Step1 Class Configuration M Active Class Name E mail Classificaiton Order Last z Step2 Criteria configuration Use the configurations below to specify the characteristics of a data flow need to be managed by this QoS rule Basic From Interface LAN1 s Ether Type P xo800 rj Source M Address 92168123 SubnetNetmask FPotRage IV MAC PAFFAAFFAAFF MAC Mask l Destination Address CS Subnet Netmask a FPotRage mac MAC Mask Others I Service Age of Empires M IP protocol User Defined ps DHCP LJ Pakettengh I DSCP 0 63 802 1P 0BE M T VLAN ID 0 4094 TCP ACK Step3 Packet modification The content of the packet can be modified by applying the following settings DSCP Mark Unchange z 0 63 802 1P Mark Unchange x VLAN ID Unchange 7 0 4094 Step4 Po
303. k News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet I Nternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other POP3S TCP 995 This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs over SSL PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP TUNNEL GRE User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login ROADRUNNER TCP UDP 1026 This is an ISP that provides services mainly for cable modems RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of transferring files between computers SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SMTPS TCP 465
304. k and the other outside the WAN network as shown next Figure 57 LAN and WAN IP Addresses 8 9 2 DHCP Setup DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the VMG as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the VMG provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you turn DHCP service off you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured IP Pool Setup The VMG is pre configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients DHCP Pool See the product specifications in the appendices Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 152 Chapter 8 Home Networking 8 9 3 DNS Server Addresses DNS Domain Name System maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses enter
305. k to the three way conversation press the flash key again 7 Ifyou want to separate the activated three way conference into two individual connections again press the flash key This time the party B is on line and party A is on hold 23 10 2 4 Phone Functions Summary The following table shows the key combinations you can enter on your phone s keypad to use certain features Table 122 Phone Functions Summary ACTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION O8 Call transfer Transfer a call to another phone See Section 23 10 2 2 on page 292 Europe type and Section 23 10 2 3 on page 293 USA type 66 Call return Place a call to the last person who called you O5 Enable Do Not Disturb Use these to set your phone not to ring when someone calls you or 95 Disable Do Not Disturb toiturn Eats Tun SHORT onf 41 Enable Call Waiting Use these to allow you to put a call on hold when you are answering A1 Disable Call Waiting another or to turn this function off Eee IVR Use these to set up Interactive Voice Response IVR IVR allows you to record custom caller ringing tones the sound a caller hears before you pick up the phone and on hold tones the sound someone hears when you put their call on hold TE ERE Internal Call Call the phone s connected to the VMG 82 One Shot Caller Display Call Activate or deactivate caller ID for the next call only 67 One Shot Caller Hidden Call VMG5313 B10A
306. kle O Disable User Defined Printer Name PRINTER Maker and model PRINTER System Printer Name N A B Note To use the print server define a network printer wif URL http 192 168 1 1 631 printers PRINTER Install the printer driver Please check the Windows CD if it includes the printer driver If not please install the driver from the CD included with your printer or by downloading it from the printer vendor s website After the printer driver installs successfully choose if you want to set this printer to be the default Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X Complete the following steps to set up a print server driver on your Macintosh computer Click the Print Center icon located in the Macintosh Dock a place holding a series of icons shortcuts at the bottom of the desktop Proceed to step 6 to continue If the Print Center icon is not in the Macintosh Dock proceed to the next step On your desktop double click the Macintosh HD icon to open the Macintosh HD window Pme Macintosh HD a mir tmn VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 68 Chapter 4 Tutorials 3 Double click the Applications folder 608 Zi Macintosh HD gt R E rd Rem E T wv A Back Forward View Computer Home Favorites Applications 12 items 19 31 GB available A be L J Applications Applications Mac OS 9 Users 3 r B Documents Library System 4 Double click the Utiliti
307. lass settings Forward To Interface Unchange v Step5 Outgoing queue selection Outgoing queue decides the priority of the traffic and how traffic should be shaped in the WAN interface Choose None if you do not want to apply outgoing queue To Queue Index DefaultQueue T Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 49 Class Setup Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable this classifier Class Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard characters not including spaces VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 170 Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS Table 49 Class Setup Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Classification Order From Interface Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the classifier to the number you selected after clicking Apply Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list If you want to classify the traffic by an ingress interface select an interface from the From I nterface drop down list box Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic If you select I P you also need to configure source or destination MAC address IP address DHCP options DSCP value or the protocol type If you select 802 1Q you can configure an 802 1p priority
308. layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Select the IEEE 802 1p priority level from 0 to 7 to add to traffic through this connection The greater the number the higher the priority level 802 1q Type the VLAN ID number from 0 to 4094 for traffic through this connection QoS Rate Limit Enter the rate limit for the connection This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this connection Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 6 3 The 3G Backup Screen The USB ports at the left side panel of the VMG allow you to attach a 3G dongle to wirelessly connect to a 3G network for Internet access You can have the VMG use the 3G WAN connection as a backup Disconnect the DSL and Ethernet WAN ports to use the 3G dongle as your primary WAN connection The VMG automatically uses a wired WAN connection when available Note This VMG supports connecting one 3G dongle at a time Figure 21 Internet Access Application 3G WAN Use this screen to configure your 3G settings Click Network Setting Broadband 3G Backup VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 91 Chapter 6 Broadband Note The actual data rate you obtain varies depending the 3G card you use the signal strength to the service provider s base station and so on Figure 22 Network Setting gt Broadband gt 3G Backup General hen disabled 3G Backup 2 Ena
309. lays ADD_NEW if you are creating a new SIP account or the SIP account you are modifying Select the SIP service provider profile to use for the SIP account you are Provider configuring in this screen This field is read only when you are modifying a SIP Association account General Enable SIP Select this if you want the VMG to use this account Clear it if you do not want Account the VMG to use this account SIP Account Enter your SIP number In the full SIP URI this is the part before the symbol Number You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters Authentication Username Enter the user name for registering this SIP account exactly as it was given to you You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters Password Enter the user name for registering this SIP account exactly as it was given to you You can use up to 95 printable ASCII Extended set characters VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 268 Chapter 23 Voice Table 109 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Account gt Add new accoun Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply To Phone Select a phone port on which you want to make or receive phone calls for this SIP account If you map a phone port to more than one SIP account there is no way to distinguish between the SIP accounts when you receive phone calls The VMG uses the most recently registered SIP account first when you make an outgoing call If a phone po
310. le Select this to enable the hot line or warm line feature on the VMG VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 270 Chapter 23 Voice Table 109 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Account gt Add new accoun Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Warm Line Select this to have the VMG dial the specified warm line number after you pick up the telephone and do not press any keys on the keypad for a period of time Hot Line Select this to have the VMG dial the specified hot line number immediately when you pick up the telephone Hot Line Warm Line number Enter the number of the hot line or warm line that you want the VMG to dial Warm Line Timer Enter a number of seconds that the VMG waits before dialing the warm line number if you pick up the telephone and do not press any keys on the keypad Enable Missed Select this option to have the VMG e mail you a notification when there is a Call Email missed call Notification Mail Server Select a mail server for the e mail address specified below If you select None here e mail notifications will not be sent via e mail You must have configured a mail server already in the Email Notification screen Send Notifications are sent to the e mail address specified in this field If this field is Aon calon to left blank notifications will not be sent via e mail Missed Call Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the
311. le in the DHCP field DNS Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS service provider Select Dynamic if you have the Dynamic DNS service Select Static if you have the Static DNS service DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 Enter the first and second DNS Domain Name System server IP address the VMG passes to the DHCP clients LAN I Pv6 Mode Setup IPv6 State Select Enable to activate the IPv6 mode and configure IPv6 settings on the VMG LAN IPv6 Address Setup Delegate prefix Select this option to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the service provider Random Global ID from WAN or an uplink router Static Select this option to configure a fixed IPv6 address for the VMG s LAN IPv6 address ULA Pseudo A unique local address ULA is a unique IPv6 address for use in private networks but not routable in the global I Pv6 Internet Select this to have the VMG automatically generate a globally unique address for the LAN IPv6 address The address format is like fdxx xoox xxxx Xxxx 64 ULA IPv6 Address Setup IPv6 Address If you select static IPv6 address enter the IPv6 address prefix that the VMG uses for the LAN IPv6 address Prefix Length If you select static IPv6 address enter the IPv6 prefix length that the VMG uses to generate the LAN IPv6 address An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits starting from the left
312. lent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 175 Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS Table 52 IEEE 802 1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPE Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic DiffServ QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are given the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Per Ho
313. lephone calls This means that SIP can be used for peer to peer communications even though it is a client server protocol In the following figure either A or B can act as a SIP user agent client to initiate a call A and B can also both act as a SIP user agent to receive the call Figure 146 SIP User Agent SIP Proxy Server A SIP proxy server receives requests from clients and forwards them to another server In the following example you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device c The client device A in the figure sends a call invitation to the SIP proxy server B 2 The SIP proxy server forwards the call invitation to C VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 284 Chapter 23 Voice Figure 147 SIP Proxy Server SIP Redirect Server A SIP redirect server accepts SIP requests translates the destination address to an IP address and sends the translated IP address back to the device that sent the request Then the client device that originally sent the request can send requests to the IP address that it received back from the redirect server Redirect servers do not initiate SIP requests In the following example you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C Client device A sends a call invitation for C to the SIP redirect server B The SIP redirect server sends the invitation back to A with C s IP address or domain name Client device A then sends
314. less Quick Start x Wireless Setting Step 3 of 3 The following settings are the current wireless settings which your wireless client devices need in orderto get connected to this device Wireless Service Enable Disable Wireless Network Name SSID ZyXELO00001 Security WPA2 PSK Password 432D54BEE98C L Do not automatically show this Quick Start after login Back Close 4 Your VMG saves your settings and attempts to connect to the Internet VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 34 Tutorials 4 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to use the VMG s various features Setting Up an Ethernet WAN Connection see page 35 Configure the Broadband screen as follows see page 35 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network see page 41 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups see page 47 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network see page 50 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup see page 53 Access the VMG Using DDNS see page 56 Configuring the MAC Address Filter see page 57 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer see page 58 Using the Media Server Feature see page 60 Using the Print Server Feature see page 65 4 2 Setting Up an Ethernet WAN Connection This tutorial shows you how to use LAN port 4 as an alternative or backup Internet connection using the Web Configurator 1 Click Network Setting Broadband to open the following screen Click Add New WAN Interface Broadband
315. less client WPA supplicants 370 Wireless Distribution System see WDS wireless LAN 107 125 authentication 127 128 BSS 130 example 130 channel 126 encryption 129 example 126 fragmentation threshold 123 127 limitations 129 MAC address filter 117 128 MBSSID 130 preamble 124 127 RADIUS server 128 RTS CTS threshold 123 127 security 127 SSID 128 activation 114 status 75 WDS 120 131 compatibility 120 example 131 WEP 129 WPA 129 WPA PSK 129 WPS 131 134 example 135 limitations 137 PIN 132 push button 22 132 wireless security 365 Wireless tutorial 42 wizard setup Internet 33 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 397 Index WLAN interference 363 security parameters 372 WPA 129 368 key caching 370 pre authentication 370 user authentication 369 vs WPA PSK 369 wireless client supplicant 370 with RADIUS application example 370 WPA2 368 user authentication 369 vs WPA2 PSK 369 wireless client supplicant 370 with RADIUS application example 370 WPA2 Pre Shared Key 369 WPA2 PSK 369 application example 371 WPA PSK 129 369 application example 371 WPS 131 134 example 135 limitations 137 PIN 132 example 134 push button 22 132 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 398
316. licy Forwarding This module can route or bridge packets to certain interface according to the class settings Forward To Interface Unchange z Step5 Outgoing queue selection Exclude F Exclude Exclude F Exclude I Exclude F Exclude F Exclude I Exclude I Exclude I Exclude F Exclude F Exclude F Exclude Outgoing queue decide the priority of the traffic and how traffic should be shaped in the WAN inteface Choose None if you don t want to apply outgoing queue To Queue Index E mail E Apply Cancel Class Name Give a class name to this traffic such as E mail in this example From This is the interface from which the traffic will be coming from Select LAN1 for this Interface example Ether Type Select IP to identify the traffic source by its IP address or MAC address IP Address Type the IP address of your computer 192 168 1 23 Type the IP Subnet Mask if you know it MAC Address Type the MAC address of your computer AA FF AA FF AA FF Type the MAC Mask if you know it To Queue Link this to an item in the Network Setting gt QoS gt Queue Setup screen which is the E Index mail queue created in this example VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 55 Chapter 4 Tutorials This maps e mail traffic coming from port 25 to the highest priority which you have created in the previous screen see the IP Protocol field This also maps your computer s IP addre
317. ller A and B by putting either one on hold If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold there will be a remind ring USA Call Waiting This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone directory number If there is a second call to your telephone number you will hear a call waiting tone Press the flash key to put the first call on hold and answer the second call USA Call Transfer Do the following to transfer an incoming call that you have answered to another phone Press the flash key to put the caller on hold When you hear the dial tone dial 98 followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it hang up the phone USA Three Way Conference Use the following steps to make three way conference calls When you are on the phone talking to someone party A press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone Dial a phone number directly to make another call to party B When party B answers the second call press the flash key to create a three way conversation VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 294 Chapter 23 Voice 4 Hang up the phone to drop the connection 5 Ifyou want to separate the activated three way conference into two individual connections with party A on line and party B on hold press the flash key 6 Ifyou want to go bac
318. llne e m 281 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 11 Table of Contents 239 he Call History Incoming Cale SOS rore rrr P ERR n t o a UC e HE ERR ira 282 2S UID ec mi i aT AAN a AEE AAE EAE S A 282 23 10 1 Quality of Service QOS riranin iiini ninin a REA E A NAT EATA 290 23 10 2 Phones Servicos CuBPIBW ernis ct cae ad AII AASA ONA 291 Chapter 24 LO UY0e 7 A 297 20 d NNN 5g tat weed LEE LL E EIS MM IM Li M LM EIE AES 297 2251 1 What Yos Can Din Iis Chapter uo coe o td e I pee veda e RU Desin ds 297 28 1 2 Vy hat You Need To KNOW occae dez rn dia e bna kara etapa dis Lace a abe a ibm d B pd 297 24 2 the Systemi LOG Ese rr P n 298 ALS TTO n gEsspcrI qr 299 Chapter 25 Bele c C ENIM EM 301 20 q EISE UVIBU aic dete uti uid dua LA EU duel b E derit i e eee RC EE 301 25 1 1 What Yos Can De n This Chaptal iius Lise ta WEE PER HHEEREM le Er LESER Ha RA e PES 301 zou he WAN Status SORIA susacak an E ERPauDUEC NE bae S RR RE CRI cala cuban CUR tta OU td AEEA 301 20 9 TELAN EET D ETT 302 za Dh NAT SAWS OEFBIBIT coi decode oo LS id oet e a a e a p t E o lad Eo c Pe LU datu 303 Chapter 26 VoIP SAUS iini terrai d Et Ether eI EORR Globale cis pubis iaae Eid Fuld pae ode 305 29 1 The VoF Status SOY aec bebo coris eM De E DM REN ONERE MEE IM 305 Chapter 27 fr SIOUSHOS aon ora RE ee lama E pipes AE L
319. lls incoming calls or outgoing calls being made Dial The callee s phone is ringing Ring The phone is ringing for an incoming VoIP call Process There is a VolP call in progress DI SC The callee s line is busy the callee hung up or your phone was left off the hook Codec This field displays what voice codec is being used for a current VoIP call through a phone port Peer Number This field displays the SIP number of the party that is currently engaged in a VoIP call through a phone port Phone Status Phone This field displays the name of a phone port on the VMG Outgoing This field displays the SIP number that you use to make calls on this phone port Number Incoming This field displays the SIP number that you use to receive calls on this phone port Number VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 306 27 xDSL Statistics 27 1 The xDSL Statistics Screen Use this screen to view detailed DSL statistics Click System Monitor gt xDSL Statistics to open the following screen Figure 157 System Monitor gt xDSL Statistics Monitor Refresh Interval No Refresh v Line Line D v Status VDSL Training Status Showtime Mode VDSL2 Annex A VDSL Profile Profile 17a Traffic Type PTM Mode Link Uptime 0 day 15 hours 59 minutes VDSL Port Details Upstream Downstream Line Rate 30 539 Mbps 70 989 Mbps Actual Net Data Rate 30 460 Mbps 70 843 Mbps Trellis Coding ON
320. mine which bits a packet s MAC address should match Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic s MAC address should match Enter 0 for the bit s of the matched traffic s MAC address which can be of any hexadecimal character s For example if you set the MAC address to 00 13 49 00 00 00 and the mask to ff ff ff 00 00 00 a packet with a MAC address of 00 13 49 12 34 56 matches this criteria Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Others Service This field is available only when you select I P in the Ether Type field This field simplifies classifier configuration by allowing you to select a predefined application When you select a predefined application you do not configure the rest of the filter fields VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 171 Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS Table 49 Class Setup Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Protocol This field is available only when you select I P in the Ether Type field Select this option and select the protocol service type from TCP UDP ICMP or IGMP If you select User defined enter the protocol service type number DHCP This field is available only when you select I P in the Ether Type field Select this option and select a DHCP option If you select Vendor Class ID DHCP Option 60 enter the Vendor Class Identifier Optio
321. mitters such as electric motors or microwaves Problems with absorption occur when physical objects such as thick walls are between the two radios muffling the signal VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 129 Chapter 7 Wireless 7 10 5 BSS A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS When Intra BSS traffic blocking is disabled wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS traffic blocking is enabled wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Figure 42 Basic Service set DS AP BSS 7 10 6 MBSSID Traditionally you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets BSSs As well as the cost of buying extra APs there is also the possibility of channel interference The VMG s MBSSID Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier function allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously You can then assign varying QoS priorities and or security modes to different SSIDs Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP 7 10 6 1 Notes on Multiple BSSs A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously You must use different keys for differe
322. n 60 of the matched traffic such as the type of the hardware or firmware If you select User Class ID DHCP Option 77 enter a string that identifies the user s category or application type in the matched DHCP packets Packet This field is available only when you select I P in the Ether Type field Length Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length from 46 to 1500 in the fields provided DSCP This field is available only when you select I P in the Ether Type field Select this option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided 802 1P This field is available only when you select 802 1Q in the Ether Type field Select this option and select a priority level between 0 and 7 from the drop down list box 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest VLAN ID This field is available only when you select 802 1Q in the Ether Type field Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number TCP ACK This field is available only when you select I P in the Ether Type field If you select this option the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK Acknowledge flag Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier DSCP Mark This field is available only when you select I P in the Ether Type field If you select Mark enter a DSCP value with which the VMG replaces the DSCP field in the packets If you select Unchange the VMG keep the D
323. n Protocol see DHCP dynamic WEP key exchange 368 DYNDNS wildcard 200 E EAP Authentication 367 ECHO 196 echo cancellation 289 e mail log example 330 Encapsulation 100 MER 101 PPP over Ethernet 101 encapsulation 259 RFC 1483 101 encryption 129 369 ESP 259 ESS 362 Europe type call service mode 292 Extended Service Set IDentification 110 116 Extended Service Set See ESS 362 F file sharing 20 filters MAC address 117 128 Finger 196 firewalls 223 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 392 Index add protocols 225 configuration 225 DDoS 224 DoS 224 LAND attack 224 Ping of Death 224 SYN attack 224 firmware 333 version 75 flash key 292 flashing 292 forwarding ports 182 fragmentation threshold 123 127 364 FTP 182 196 G G 168 289 General wireless LAN screen 108 H hidden node 363 HTTP 196 IBSS 361 ID type and content 263 IEEE 802 11g 365 IEEE 802 1Q 104 IGA 194 IGMP 104 version 104 IKE phases 260 ILA 194 Independent Basic Service Set See IBSS 361 initialization vector IV 369 Inside Global Address see IGA inside header 260 Inside Local Address see ILA interface group 205 Internet wizard setup 33 Internet access 18 wizard setup 33 Internet Key Exchange 260 Internet Protocol version 6 80 Internet Protocol version 6 see IPv6 IP address 140 153 ping 341 private 154 WAN 80 IP Address Assignment 103 IP alias NAT applications 196 IPSec algorithms
324. nable this item you will not get indication when somebody call you Authentication s Clenabie anonymous Cal Block Username changeme Fas wond a C Enable Call Completion on Busy Subscriber CCBS Apply To Phone V Phone 1 7 Phone 2 hone Phone 2 Notice au enable CCBS activate this feature by pressing phone key S afler attempting a call on busy Caution Mf both SIP accounts apply to the same phone the SIP account priority for that phone is SIPO SIP1 UNM Message Waiting Indication Expiration Time 120 05400 5econd URL Type Hot Line Warm Line Enable URL Type SIP Nam Line Hot Line Voice Features e Warm Line number Primary Compression Type ne Timer sec O0j amp econd Secondary Compression Type O Enable Missed Call Email Notification Third Compression Type Mad Server Speaking Volume Control 0 v Send Notification to Email Listening Volume Control 0 v Missed Call Email Tite ca Q 168 Gcho Cancallatio v amp nable G 168 Echo Cancellation Notice UJ Enable VAD Volce Active Detector jure mail Server in Advanced gt Email N page and select ime mail server for this feature Cleary media IVR Play Index D uusic On Hold IVR Play Index rd will be ignored To Number To Number To Number 0 10 180 Second Each field is desc ribed in the following table Table 109 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account gt Add new accoun Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Account Selection SIP Service This field disp
325. nd IP over Ethernet IP over Ethernet IPoE is an alternative to PPPoE IP packets are being delivered across an Ethernet network without using PPP encapsulation They are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment For instance it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells PPP over ATM PPPoA PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 A PPPoA connection functions like a dial up Internet connection The VMG encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit to the Internet Service Provider s ISP DSLAM digital access multiplexer Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP PPP over Ethernet PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial up services using PPP PPPoE is an IETF standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem DSL cable wireless etc connection For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for example RADIUS One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection T
326. nd ihe VIMIES esa coti dead FERAT ERU reanastcuashdenneis EEG pA ERU teadaaedieehianuens ESEESE AKAASSA 152 BO DHOP SBIMD ae een errr rer ere errr rer cdd uno errr rer rad dip re ree re IER 152 2 99 DNS Sarvar RCI SSO sauron eddie cd erba ero ecc o bt ia redit deas 153 Be UD MESH PAP T E 153 Chapter 9 A U 155 MES 017 ev 155 cR Me ROUNE SCOOT Sen a a 155 DaT PCE CIE Sane ge 156 93 Wie DNS Rome See DE OT EE 157 2 3 1 The DNS Route Add SOFBIBIY icascinlecciogetiiaeewiensiawaieiesoniaesaiieiias aeuieiansels 158 9 4 Tne Policy Forwarding SCreon m 158 04 1 AddEdit Policy Forwarding uiuascereeu deceat ede aderai akaa aat diana bait ia lee 160 OO RIP rc 160 98 5 1 THE RIF SCICON eoni S 161 Chapter 10 Cah or Senee 00S oc aa Ne wte enn temeser ie reer 163 LENON ON a N US 163 TOA What You Can Doin Mis Chapter P Tea 163 TOUS VIAE EHE NESE 16 r AON asiaa eia Eaa En aana KE AA aa aa t meena LK A HL UR cooled 163 10 3 The Quality of Service General Sereal quss aia e ries ei rerbenci inair EnS ER 165 p The Quau Saup Seen Me Ud 166 UNE ieu ciere RUE 167 10 9 The Class Setup SOGE t 168 18 58 1 Add Edi QOS CASE sorsoran Eaa DC a 169 10 6 The Cg Policer oe Up SOGE sonar ur EMEN eis emai oan 173 18 5 1 Add Edta QOS POCEN aenneren E rad eei taper 174 10 7 Technical vnb asta ti ch rset an ato
327. networks unless you have an unusual network topology Operation Select Passive to have the VMG update the routing table based on the RIP packets received from neighbors but not advertise its route information to other routers in this interface Select Active to have the VMG advertise its route information and also listen for routing updates from neighboring routers Enabled Select the check box to activate the settings Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the VMG VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 161 Chapter 9 Routing VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 162 Quality of Service QoS 10 1 Overview Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand Configure QoS on the VMG to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Setting up QoS involves these steps 1 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows 2 Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow The VMG assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly Packets assigned a high priority are process
328. not listed will be denied access to the VMG Add new MAC Click this if you want to add a new MAC address entry to the MAC filter list below address Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the VMG in these address fields Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc This is the index number of the entry MAC Address This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the VMG Delete Click the Delete icon to delete the entry Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 117 Chapter 7 Wireless 7 5 The WPS Screen Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup WPS on your VMG WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Set up each WPS connection between two devices Both devices must support WPS See Section 7 10 9 3 on page 134 for more information about WPS Note The VMG applies the security settings of the SSID1 profile see Section 7 2 on page 108 If you want to use the WPS feature make sure you have set the security mode of SSID1 to WPA2 PSK or No Security Click Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS The following screen displays Select Enable an
329. not support WPA2 just use WPA or WPA PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not Select WEP only when the AP and or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2 WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2 Encryption WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Message Integrity Check MIC and IEEE 802 1x WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons but offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard AES in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol CCMP TKIP uses 128 bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server AES Advanced Encryption Standard is a block cipher that uses a 256 bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael They both include a per packet key mixing function a Message Integrity Check MIC named Michael an extended initialization vector IV with sequencing rules and a re keying mechanism WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients This all happens in the background automatically The Messa
330. ns you a static WAN IP address they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address es ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM is a WAN networking technology that provides high speed data transfer ATM uses fixed size packets of information called cells With ATM a high QoS Quality of Service can be guaranteed ATM uses a connection oriented model and establishes a virtual circuit VC between Finding Out More PTM Packet Transfer Mode PTM is packet oriented and supported by the VDSL2 standard In PTM packets are encapsulated directly in the High level Data Link Control HDLC frames It is designed to provide a low overhead transparent way of transporting packets over DSL links as an alternative to ATM IPv6 Introduction IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 is designed to enhance IP address size and features The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits from the 32 bit IPv4 address allows up to 3 4 x 10 8 IP addresses The VMG can use IPv4 IPv6 dual stack to connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks and supports IPv6 rapid deployment 6RD VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 80 Chapter 6 Broadband IPv6 Addressing The 128 bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16 bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons This is an example IPv6 address 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1a2f 0000 IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways Leading zeros in a block can be omitted So 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000
331. nsible Markup Language XML format over HTTP or HTTPS An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the VMG modify settings perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the VMG You have to enable the device to be managed by the ACS and specify the ACS IP address or domain name and username and password Click Maintenance gt TR 069 Client to open the following screen Use this screen to configure your VMG to be managed by an ACS Figure 164 Maintenance gt TR 069 Client R 069 Client TRO69 is a remote management tool on this device The operator can upgrade firmware modify settings and diagnose problems remotely when TRO69 is enabled Inform Enable Disable Inform Interval 86400 ACS URL URL or IPv4 address global IPv6 address ACS User Name null d CEN WWAN Interface used by TR 069 client Any WAN Multi VAN lan4 wan eth3G6 VDSL pppo3G Display SOAP messages on serial console Enable Disable Y Connection Request Authentication Connection Request User Name null Connection Request Password mmm Connection Request URL http 72 23 30 27 30005 Local certificate used by TR 069 client v Apply Cancel VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 319 Chapter 31 TR 069 Client The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 137 Maintenance gt TR 069 Client LABEL DESCRIPTION Inform Select Enable for the VMG to send perio
332. nsport udp from request uri in SIP messages Remove the Route header in SIP messages v Dont send re Invite to the remote party when there are multiple codecs answered in the SDP Bound Interface Name Bound Interface Name OLAN any_WAN Olulti WAN ADSL VDSL ETHWAN pppo3G Outbound Proxy Outbound Proxy Address Outbound Proxy Port 5060 1025 65535 RTP Port Range Start Port 51000 1026 65494 End Port 65500 1032 65500 SRTP Support SRTP Support Crypto Suite AES CM 128 HMAC SHA1 80 M Encryption and Authentication type DTMF Mode DTMF Mode RFC2833 v Transport Type Transport Type UDP Ignore Direct IP OkEnable GDisable FAX Option G 711 Fax Passthrough Or 38 Fax Relay Fax Passthrough Codec Oc 711Mulaw GG 7114law QoS Tag SIP DSCP Mark Setting RTP DSCP Mark Setting Timer Setting Expiration Duration Register Re send timer Session Expires Min SE Phone Key Config Call Return One Shot Caller Display Call One Shot Caller Hidden Call Call Waiting Enable Call Waiting Disable IVR Internal Call Call Transfer Unconditional Call Forward Enable Unconditional Call Forward Disable No Answer Call Forward Enable No Answer Call Forward Disable Call Forward When Busy Enable Call Forward When Busy Disable One Shot Call Waiting Enable One Shot Call Waiting Disable Do Not Disturb Enable Do Not Disturb Disable Call Completion on Busy Subscriber
333. nt BSSs If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs they are in different BSSs but have the same keys they may hear each other s communications but not communicate with each other VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 130 Chapter 7 Wireless MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802 1x security 7 10 7 Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data All IEEE 802 11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble but not all support short preamble Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it and to provide more efficient communications Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it otherwise the VMG uses long preamble Note The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate 7 10 8 Wireless Distribution System WDS The VMG can act as a wireless network bridge and establish WDS Wireless Distribution System links with other APs You need to know the MAC addresses of the APs you
334. ntication EAP TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP CHAP MS CHAP and MS CHAP v2 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 367 Appendix B Wireless LANs PEAP Protected EAP LEAP Like EAP TTLS server side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients thus hiding client identity However PEAP only supports EAP methods such as EAP MD5 EAP MSCHAPv2 and EAP GTC EAP Generic Token Card for client authentication EAP GTC is implemented only by Cisco LEAP Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802 1x Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server This key expires when the wireless connection times out disconnects or reauthentication times out A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed If this feature is enabled it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen You may still configure and store keys but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled Note EAP MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security certificate based authentications EAP TLS EAP TTLS and PEAP use dynamic keys for data encryption They are often deployed in corporate environments but for public d
335. o 2 34 56 78 92 bc 00 00 24 00 None None ZW Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 90 Security gt Parental Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Parental Select Enable to activate parental control Control Add new PCP Click this if you want to configure a new Parental Control Profile PCP This shows the index number of the rule Status This indicates whether the rule is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 235 Chapter 19 Parental Control Table 90 Security gt Parental Control continued LABEL DESCRIPTION PCP Name This shows the name of the rule Home Network This shows the MAC address of the LAN user s computer to which this rule applies User MAC Internet Access This shows the day s and time on which parental control is enabled Schedule Network This shows whether the network service is configured If not None will be shown Service Website Block This shows whether the website block is configured If not None will be shown Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 19 2 1 Add Edit a Pa
336. o begin configuring this screen afresh VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 328 Log Setting 36 1 Overview You can configure where the VMG sends logs and which logs and or immediate alerts the VMG records in the Logs Setting screen 36 2 The Log Settings Screen To change your VMG s log settings click Maintenance gt Logs Setting The screen appears as shown Figure 171 Maintenance gt Logs Setting Log Setting Log Setting defines which types of logs and which log levels you want to record If you have a LAN client on your network that is running a syslog utility you can also save the log files there by enabling Syslog Logging and enter the IP address of that LAN client Syslog Setting Syslog Logging Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled Mode Remote X Syslog Server Server NAME or IPv4 IPv6 Address UDP Port Server Port E mail Log Settings Mail Server M System Log Mail Subject Security Log Mail Subject Send Log to E Mail Address Send Alarm to E Mail Address Alarm Interval 60 Second Allowed Capacity Before email Notification 80 Clear log after sending mail Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled Active Log and Alert System Log Security log Send immediate alert System Firewall Attacks DHCP client MAC Filter Blocked Web Sites PPPoE Forward Web Sites Blocked Web Sites Wireless Attack DHCP Server Certificate UPnP IPSec NAT Ac
337. o can some WPS enabled wireless clients By default a WPS devices is unconfigured This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar if it supports both functions If the registrar is unconfigured the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly generated Once a WPS enabled device has connected to another device using WPS it becomes configured A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee you must reset it to its factory defaults 7 10 9 4 Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup The following figure shows an example network In step 1 both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured When WPS is activated on both they perform the handshake In this example AP1 is the registrar and Client 1 is the enrollee The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network since it is unconfigured and has no existing information VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 135 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 46 WPS Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE REGISTRAR SECURITY INFO CLIENT 1 AP1 In step 2 you add another wireless client to the network You know
338. o communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna s coverage area Antenna Gain Antenna gain measured in dB decibel is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications For an indoor site each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 372 Appendix B Wireless LANs 2 5 For an unobstructed outdoor site each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 596 Actual results may vary depending on the network environment Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications Omni directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane The coverage area is torus shaped like a donut which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment With a wide coverage area it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points Directional antennas con
339. o run IPv4 only Select IPv6 I Pv4 DualStack to allow the Device to run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time Select IPv6 Only if you want the Device to run IPv6 only ATM PVC Configuration These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL over ATM VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 Enter the VPI assigned to you VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Enter the VCI assigned to you DSL Link Type The choices in this field change according to the Encapsulation method chosen above This field is not editable PPPoA and I PoA encapsulation use the same named DSL Link Type Ethernet over ATM EoA is used for PPPoE and I PoE encapsulation EoA a protocol for data transfer between Ethernet LAN and WAN over the ATM protocol It creates a bridged connection between the VMG and the ISP It uses an Ethernet header in the packet so that you can have multiple services connections over one PVC You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services EoA supports ENET ENCAP IPoE PPPoE and RFC1483 2684 bridging encapsulation methods PPPoA PPP over ATM allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC I PoA IP over ATM allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC Encapsulation Mode Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop d
340. o the IPv6 DNS server and sends clients the DNS information it receives Pv4 DNS Server Only The VMG forwards the requests to the IPv4 DNS server and sends clients the DNS information it receives e Pv6 DNS Server First The VMG forwards the requests to the IPv6 DNS server first and then the IPv4 DNS server Then it sends clients the first DNS information it receives Pv4 DNS Server First The VMG forwards the requests to the IPv4 DNS server first and then the IPv6 DNS server Then it sends clients the first DNS information it receives Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 8 3 The Static DHCP Screen This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 144 Chapter 8 Home Networking Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Use this screen to change your VMG s static DHCP settings Click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Static DHCP to open the following screen Figure 50 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Static DHCP Static DHCP Configuration Li Status MAC Address IP Address Modify The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Netw
341. o voice and video to make them run more smoothly Similarly give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications Click Network Setting QoS Class Setup to open the following screen VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 168 Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS Figure 69 Network Setting gt QoS gt Class Setup Add new Classifier Aclassifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria Class Setup can add edit or delete QoS classifiers Status Class Name 1 9 Local Service 2 9 SSH 4 9 ICMP 5 9 IKE 9 RTSP s 9 ESP 9 9 HTTP io F HTTP Proxy 1g HTTPS 29 Telnet 3 9 IGMP Classification Criteria DSCP Mark 8024P Mark VLAN ID Tag To Queue Modify From Intf Local Unchange Unchange Unchange PriorityS 7 From Intf LAN Sher Type IP Unchange Unchange Unchange Priority4 77 Protocol TCP From Intf LAN m ups IP Unchange Unchange Unchange Priority4 7 Protocol UDP From Intf Local Ether Type IP Unchange Unchange Unchange Priority3 7 rom LAN Dy Type IP Unchange Unchange Unchange Priority4 7 Unchange Unchange Unchange Priority3 7 rom LAN e Type IP Unchange Unchange Unchange Priority 7 rom LAN m Type IP Unchange Unchange Unchange Priority 7 ist Port Unchange Unchange Unchange Priority3 7 Protocol TCP From Intf LAN Dst Port 6080 Unchange Unchange Unchange Prio
342. odified by users in some network environments When a UPnP device joins a network it announces its presence with a multicast message For security reasons the VMG allows multicast messages on the LAN only All UPnP enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration Disable UPnP if this is not your intention UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp UI C ZyXEL s UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device IGD 1 0 See Section 8 4 1 on page 147 for examples of installing and using UPnP Finding Out More See Section 8 9 on page 152 for technical background information on LANs 8 1 3 Before You Begin Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen 8 2 The LAN Setup Screen Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your VMG Click Network Setting Home Networking to open the LAN Setup screen Follow these steps to configure your LAN settings 1 Enter an IP address into the I P Address field The IP address must be in dotted decimal notation This will become the IP address of your VMG 2 Enter the IP subnet mask into the IP Subnet Mask field Unless instructed otherwise it is best to leave this alone the configurator will automatically compute a subnet mask based upon the IP address you entered VMG5313
343. old value is smaller than the RTS CTS value see previously you set then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 364 Appendix B Wireless LANs IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802 11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802 11b standard This means an IEEE 802 11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802 11g access point and vice versa at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range IEEE 802 11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates The IEEE 802 11g data rate and modulation are as follows Table 149 IEEE 802 11g DATA RATE MBPS MODULATION 1 DBPSK Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed 2 DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 5 5 11 CCK Complementary Code Keying 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 54 Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients access points and the wired network Wireless security methods available on the VMG are data encryption wireless client authentication restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the VMG identity The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your VMG Table 150 Wirel
344. olution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your VMG Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default See Appendix D on page 399 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer 2 1 1 Accessing the Web Configurator Make sure your VMG hardware is properly connected refer to the Quick Start Guide Launch your web browser If the VMG does not automatically re direct you to the login screen go to http 192 168 1 1 A password screen displays To access the administrative web configurator and manage the VMG type the default username admin and password 1234 in the password screen and click Login If advanced account security is enabled see Section 29 2 on page 313 the number of dots that appears when you type the password changes randomly to prevent anyone watching the password field from knowing the length of your password If you have changed the password enter your password and click Login Figure 4 Password Screen ZyXEL Welcome Welcome to VMG5313 B30A configuration interface Please enter username and password to login Username gri Password aes VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 23 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 4 The following screen displays if you have not yet changed your password
345. omatically have a dynamic IP address DHCP This field displays when editing an existing WAN interface Type the class vender ID you IS want the VMG to add in the DHCP Discovery packets that go to the DHCP server VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 87 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 8 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit Routing Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP This field displays when editing an existing WAN interface Type the vender specific option 43 information you want the VMG to add in the DHCP Offer packets The information is used Hable for example for configuring an ACS s Auto Configuration Server URL Static IP Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address Address IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP Subnet Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP Mask Gateway IP Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP Address Routing Feature This is available only when you select I Pv4 Only or IPv6 IPv4 DualStack in the I Pv6 I Pv4 Mode field NAT Enable Select this option to activate NAT on this connection Full cone NAT Select this option to enable full cone NAT on this connection This field is available only when enable you activate NAT In full cone NAT the VMG maps all outgoing packets from an internal IP address and port to a single IP address and port on the external network The VMG also
346. on The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application where three inside LANs logical LANs using IP alias behind the VMG can communicate with three distinct WAN networks VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 195 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Figure 87 NAT Application With IP Alias A LAN1 192 168 1 X B IP 1 IGA 1 192 168 1 1 IP 3 IGA 3 LAN3 192 168 3 X 4 Port Forwarding Services and Port Numbers The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Please also refer to the Supporting CD for more examples and details on port forwarding and NAT Table 66 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES PORT NUMBER ECHO 7 FTP File Transfer Protocol 21 SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 25 DNS Domain Name System 53 Finger 79 HTTP Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW Web 80 POP3 Post Office Protocol 110 NNTP Network News Transport Protocol 119 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 161 SNMP trap 162 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 1723 Port Forwarding Example Let s say you want to assign ports 21 25 to one FTP Telnet and SMTP server A in the example port 80 to another B in the example and assign a default server IP address of 192 168 1 35 to a VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 196 Chapter 11 Network Address Tran
347. on Therefore select PPPoE as the WAN encapsulation type Set the IPv6 I Pv4 Mode to I Pv4 Only Enter the account information provided to you by your DSL service provider VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 38 Chapter 4 Tutorials Configure this rule as your default Internet connection by selecting the Apply as Default Gateway check box Then select DNS as Static and enter the DNS server addresses provided to you such as 192 168 5 2 DNS server1 192 168 5 1 DNS server2 Leave the rest of the fields to the default settings Click Apply to save your settings VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 39 Chapter 4 Tutorials General Active Name Type Mode Encapsulation IPv6 IPv4 Mode ATM PVC Configuration VPI 0 255 VCI 32 65535 DSL Link Type Encapsulation Mode Service Category PPP Information PPP User Name PPP Password PPP Trigger Type IDLE Timeout minutes PPPoE Service Name PPPoE Passthrough IP Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Routing Feature NAT Enable Fullcone NAT Enable IGMP Proxy Enable Apply as Default Gateway DNS server DNS DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 Tunnel Enable 6RD 6RD Type IPv4 Mask Length 6RD Border Relay Server IP 6RD IPv6 Prefix Qos Rate Limit WAN Outgoing Default Tag DSCP MTU MTU Size MyDS
348. on above are grayed out and not applicable and the Transport Type can also be set to AUTO if you select this option RFC PRACK RFC 3262 defines a mechanism to provide reliable transmission of SIP provisional 3262 Require response messages which convey information on the processing progress of the request 100rel This uses the option tag 100rel and the Provisional Response ACKnowledgement PRACK method Select this to have the the peer device require the option tag 100rel to send provisional responses reliably VoIP IOP Flags Select the VoIP inter operability settings you want to activate Replace dial Replace a dial digit with 9623 in the INVITE messages digit to 9623 in SIP messages Remove 5060 and transport udp from the Request URI string in the REGISTER and INVITE packets Remove the Route header in SIP messages Remove the Route header in SIP packets Don t send re Invite to the remote party when there are multiple codecs answered in the SDP Do not send a re Invite packet to the remote party when the remote party answers that it can support multiple codecs Bound Interface Name VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 275 Chapter 23 Voice Table 111 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider gt Add new provider Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bound Interface Name If you select LAN or Any WAN the VMG automatically acti
349. on interface and look at the list of associated clients usually displayed by MAC address It does not matter if the VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 137 Chapter 7 Wireless access point is the WPS registrar the enrollee or was not involved in the WPS handshake a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 138 Home Networking 8 1 Overview A Local Area Network LAN is a shared communication system to which many networking devices are connected It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses 8 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the LAN Setup screen to set the LAN IP address subnet mask and DHCP settings of your VMG Section 8 2 on page 141 Use the Static DHCP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses Section 8 3 on page 144 Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP and UPnP NAT traversal on the VMG Section 8 4 on page 146 Use the Additional Subnet screen to configure IP alias and public static IP Section 8 5 on page 148 Use the STB Vendor ID screen to hav
350. on is active A gray bulb signifies that this authentication is not active Interface This is the interface that uses the authentication This displays N A when there is no interface assigned EAP Identity This shows the EAP identity of the authentication This displays N A when there is no EAP identity assigned EAP method This shows the EAP method used in the authentication This displays N A when there is no EAP method assigned Bidirectional This shows whether bidirectional authentication is allowed Certificate This shows the certificate used for this authentication This displays N A when there is no certificate assigned Trusted CA This shows the Trusted CA used for this authentication This displays N A when there is no Trusted CA assigned Modify Click this icon to edit an item Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the VMG Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 98 Chapter 6 Broadband 6 5 1 Modify 802 1X Settings Use this screen to edit 802 1X authentication settings Click the Edit icon next to the rule you want to edit The screen shown next appears Figure 25 Network Setting gt Broadband gt 802 1x gt Modify Active EAP Identity Certificate Trusted CA 802 1x Authentication Edit 802 1x Settings EAP method Enable Bidirectional Authentication x EAP TLS Apply Cancel
351. on of rules is in parentheses Rules are separated by the bar symbol x stands for a wildcard and can be any digit from O to 9 A subset of keys is in a square bracket Ranges are allowed For example 359 means a number matching this rule can be 3 5 or 9 26 8 means a number matching this rule can be 2 6 7 8 or VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 272 Chapter 23 Voice The dot appended to a digit allows the digit to be ignored or repeated multiple times Any digit 0 9 after the dot will be ignored For example 01 means a number matching this rule can be O 01 0111 01111 and so on dialed number translated number indicates the number after the colon replaces the number before the colon in an angle bracket lt gt For example lt 1212 gt xxxxxxx means the VMG automatically prefixes the translated number 1212 to the number you dialed before making the call This can be used for local calls in the US lt 9 gt xxx Xxxxxxx means the VMG automatically removes the specified prefix 9 from the number you dialed before making the call This is always used for making outside calls from an office xx lt 123 456 gt xxxx means the VMG automatically translates 123 to 456 in the number you dialed before making the call Calls with a number followed by the exclamation mark will be dropped Calls with a number followed by the termination character 9
352. on to send it The AP then responds with a CTS Clear to Send message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS CTS directly to the AP without the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake You should only configure RTS CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the cost of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake If the RTS CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value see next then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Note Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size between 256 and 2432 bytes that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference If the Fragmentation Thresh
353. one numbers are dialed on a regular basis Speed Dial accelerates dialing process The following rules apply to all the phone devices connected to this device Clear all speed dials Keys Number Description 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 App iEanceu Each field is described in the following table Table 113 VoIP gt Call Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Clear all speed Click this to erase all the speed dial entries on this screen dials Keys This field displays the speed dial number you should dial to use this entry Number Enter the SIP number you want the VMG to call when you dial the speed dial number Description Enter a name to identify the party you call when you dial the speed dial number You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the VMG Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 23 7 The Call History Summary Screen The VMG logs calls from or to your SIP numbers This screen allows you to view the summary of received dialed and missed calls Click Vol P gt Call History gt Call History Summary The following screen displays VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 280 Chapter 23 Voice Figure 143 VoIP gt Call History gt Call History Summary Call History Summary This page shows Call Histroy Summary information Refresh Cle
354. onnection WAN Name This is the namke of the interface MAC Address This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC Media Access Control Address of your VMG IP v4 Address This field displays the current IP address of the VMG in the WAN Click Release to release your IP address to 0 0 0 0 If you want to renew your IP address click Renew IPv4 Subnet This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN Mask IPv4 Uptime This shows how long the VMG has had the IP address Primary DNS This shows the primary DNS server IP address server Secondary DNS This shows the secondary DNS server IP address server Encapsulation This field displays the current encapsulation method LAN Information IPv4 Address This is the current IP address of the VMG in the LAN IPv4 Subnet This is the current subnet mask in the LAN Mask DHCP This field displays what DHCP services the VMG is providing to the LAN Choices are Server The VMG is a DHCP server in the LAN It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN Relay The VMG acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients None The VMG is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Media Access Control Address of your VMG WLAN Information MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC Media Access Control Address
355. option and enter the Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 of the matched traffic 60 such as the type of the hardware or firmware Enable Select this option to be able to use wildcards in the Vendor Class Identifier configured for wildcard on DHCP i p DHCP CP option 60 option 60 option DHCP Option Select this and enter the device identity of the matched traffic 61 IAID Enter the Identity Association Identifier IAID of the device for example the WAN connection index number DUID type Select DUI D LLT DUID Based on Link layer Address Plus Time to enter the hardware type a time value and the MAC address of the device Select DUI D EN DUID Assigned by Vendor Based upon Enterprise Number to enter the vendor s registered enterprise number Select DUID LL DUID Based on Link layer Address to enter the device s hardware type and hardware address MAC address in the following fields Select Other to enter any string that identifies the device in the DUID field DHCP Option Select this and enter vendor specific information of the matched traffic 125 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 208 Chapter 14 Interface Group Table 74 Interface Grouping Criteria continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Enterprise Enter the vendor s 32 bit enterprise number registered with the IANA Internet Assigned Number Numbers Authority Manufactur Specify the vendor s OUI Organization Unique
356. or ATM switch and then returns it to the VMG The test result then displays in the text box VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 342 Chapter 39 Diagnostic ATM sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate The terminology for virtual circuits is as follows Virtual Channel VC Logical connections between ATM devices e Virtual Path VP A bundle of virtual channels Virtual Circuits A series of virtual paths between circuit end points Figure 185 Virtual Circuit Topology Virtual Circuit End to End ATM Switch Virtual Path Virtual Channel Think of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires The cable connects two points and wires within the cable provide individual circuits between the two points In an ATM cell header a VPI Virtual Path Identifier identifies a link formed by a virtual path a VCI Virtual Channel Identifier identifies a channel within a virtual path A series of virtual paths make up a virtual circuit F4 cells operate at the virtual path VP level while F5 cells operate at the virtual channel VC level F4 cells use the same VPI as the user data cells on VP connections but use different predefined VCI values F5 cells use the same VPI and VCI as the user data cells on the VC connections and are distinguished from data cells by a predefinded Payload Type Identifier PTI in the cell header Both F4 flows and F5 flows are bidirectional and have two types
357. or edit an address mapping rule click Add new rule or the rule s edit icon in the Address Mapping screen to display the screen shown next Figure 84 Address Mapping Add Edit Add new rule Type Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Set x One to One Y OK Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 63 Address Mapping Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Type Local Start IP Choose the IP port mapping type from one of the following One to One This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address Note that port numbers do not change for the One to one NAT mapping type Many to One This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA i e PAT port address translation the VMG s Single User Account feature that previous routers supported only Many to Many This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses Enter the starting Inside Local IP Address ILA VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 192 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Table 63 Address Mapping Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Local End IP Enter the ending Inside Local IP Address ILA If the rule is for all local IP addresses then this field displays 0 0 0 0 as the Local Start IP address and 255 255 255 255 as the Local End IP address This fiel
358. orea Corp http www zyxel kr Malaysia ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd http www zyxel com my Pakistan ZyXEL Pakistan Pvt Ltd http www zyxel com pk Philipines ZyXEL Philippines http www zyxel com ph Singapore ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd http www zyxel com sg Taiwan ZyXEL Communications Corporation http www zyxel com Thailand ZyXEL Thailand Co Ltd http www zyxel co th Vietnam ZyXEL Communications Corporation Vietnam Office http www zyxel com vn vi Austria ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH http www zyxel de VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 356 Appendix A Customer Support Belarus ZyXEL BY http www zyxel by Belgium ZyXEL Communications B V http www zyxel com be nl Bulgaria e ZyXEL Benrapna http www zyxel com bg bg Czech ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o http www zyxel cz Denmark ZyXEL Communications A S http www zyxel dk Estonia ZyXEL Estonia http www zyxel com ee et Finland ZyXEL Communications http www zyxel fi France ZyXEL France http www zyxel fr Germany ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH http www zyxel de Hungary ZyXEL Hungary amp SEE http www zyxel hu Latvia ZyXEL Latvia VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 357 Appendix A Customer Support e http www zyxel com lv lv homepage shtml Lithuania ZyXEL Lithuania http www zyxel com It It homep
359. ority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Note Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 154 Routing 9 1 Overview The VMG usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet To have the VMG send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway use static routes For example the next figure shows a computer A connected to the VMG s LAN interface The VMG routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the VMG s default gateway R1 You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2 You c
360. ork Setting gt Home Networking gt Static DHCP LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new static lease Click this to add a new static DHCP entry This is the index number of the entry Status MAC Address This field displays whether the client is connected to the VMG The MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address on a LAN Local Area Network is unique to your computer six pairs of hexadecimal notation A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the field listed above Modify Click the Edit icon to have the IP address field editable and change it Click the Delete icon to delete a static DHCP entry A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected entry If you click Add new static lease in the Static DHCP screen or the Edit icon next to a static DHCP entry the following screen displays Figure 51 Static DHCP Add Edit Active Group Name IP Type Select Device Info MAC Address IP Address DUID Static DHCP Configuration x Default 4v Manual Input v D jy Apply Cancel VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 145 Chapter 8 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this
361. ote MGMT VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 346 Chapter 40 Troubleshooting 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the VMG with the default IP address See Section 1 7 on page 21 6 If the problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions Make sure you have logged out of any earlier management sessions using the same user account even if they were through a different interface or using a different browser Try to access the VMG using another service such as Telnet If you can access the VMG check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the VMG does not respond to HTTP can see the Login screen but cannot log in to the VMG 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly See the cover page for the default login names and associated passwords The field is case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the VMG Log out of the VMG in the other session or ask the person who is logged in to log out 3 Turn the VMG off and on 4 f this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 40 1 on page 345 cannot Telnet to the VMG See the troubleshooting suggestions for cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the sugge
362. ote that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action 10 5 1 Add Edit QoS Class Click Add new Classifier in the Class Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a classifier to open the following screen VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 169 Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS Figure 70 Class Setup Add Edit QoS Classifier Configuration Please follow the guidance through step 1 5 to configure a QoS rule Step1 Class configuration L Active Class Name Classification Order Last Step2 Criteria configuration Use the fields below to specify the characteristics of a data flow that needs to be managed by this QoS rule Basic From Interface LAN M Ether Type NA Y Source Address Subnet Netmask Prefix Length Exclude Port Range Exclude L MAC 6000000000000 MAC Mask Exclude Destination Address Subnet Netmask Prefix Length Exclude Port Range Exclude LJ MAC 60c 900000090 MAC Mask Exclude Others Service Age of Empires v Exclude IP Protocol TCP M Exclude DHCP v Exclude Packet Length Exclude DSCP 0 53 Exclude 802 1P OBE v Exclude VLAN ID 0 4094 Exclude TCP ACK Exclude Step3 Packet modification The content of the packet can be modified by applying the following settings DSCP Mark Unchange 0 53 802 1P Mark Unchange Y VLAN ID Unchange 0 4094 Step4 Policy Forwarding This module can route or bridge packets ta certain interface according to the c
363. ou select in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you enabled Daylight Saving You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific week in a particular month The Time field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would set the day to First Sunday the month to November and the time to 2 in the Hour field Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would set the day to Last Sunday and the month to October The time you select in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 326 35 1 Overview E mail Notification A mail server
364. our voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk MWI Message Waiting Indication Enable Message Waiting Indication MWI enables your phone to give you a message waiting beeping dial tone when you have a voice message s Your VoIP service provider must have a messaging system that sends message waiting status SIP packets as defined in RFC 3842 Custom Tones IVR IVR Interactive Voice Response is a feature that allows you to use your telephone to interact with the VMG The VMG allows you to record custom tones for the Early Media and Music On Hold functions The same recordings apply to both the caller ringing and on hold tones Table 119 Custom Tones Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Total Time for All Tones 900 seconds for all custom tones combined Maximum Time per 180 seconds Individual Tone Total Number of Tones 5 Recordable You can record up to 5 different custom tones but the total time must be 900 seconds or less Recording Custom Tones Use the following steps if you would like to create new tones or change your tones VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 289 Chapter 23 Voice 23 10 1 Pick up the phone and press on your phone s keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu Press a number from 1101 1105 on your phone followed by the key Play your desired music or voice recording into the receiver s mouthpiece Pr
365. own list box Choices are e LLC SNAP BRI DGI NG In LCC encapsulation bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header This is available only when you select IPoE or PPPoE in the Select DSL Link Type field e VC MUX In VC multiplexing each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit VC To transport multiple protocols the VMG needs separate VCs There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit PDU payload e LLC ENCAPSULATION More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC This is available only when you select PPPoA in the Encapsulation field e LLC SNAP ROUTING In LCC encapsulation an IEEE 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs The LCC header can be followed by an IEEE 802 1a SubNetwork Attachment Point SNAP header This is available only when you select I PoA in the Encapsulation field VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 86 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 8 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit Routing Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non time sensitive Category such as e mail Select CBR Continuous Bit Rate to specify fixed always on
366. ows the VMG to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator Policy based routing is applied to outgoing packets prior to the normal routing You can use source based policy forwarding to direct traffic from different users through different connections or distribute traffic among multiple paths for load sharing VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 158 Chapter 9 Routing The Policy Forwarding screen let you view and configure routing policies on the VMG Click Network Setting gt Routing gt Policy Forwarding to open the following screen Figure 63 Network Setting gt Routing gt Policy Forwarding static Route DN B Note Route PolicyForwarding This page allows the PolicyForward to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator Add new Policy Forward Rule You need to add WAN Interface first The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Network Setting gt Routing gt Policy Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new Policy Forward Rule Click this to create a new policy forwarding rule This is the index number of the entry Policy Name This is the name of the rule Source IP This is the source IP address Source Subnet Mask his is the source subnet mask address
367. p Behavior DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services DS field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping DSCP 6 bits Unused 2 bits The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies IP Precedence Similar to IEEE 802 1p prioritization at layer 2 you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer 3 network IP precedence uses three bits of the eight bit ToS Type of Service field in the IP header There are eight classes of services ranging from zero to seven in IP precedence Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest Automatic Priority Queue Assignment If you enable QoS on the VMG the VMG can automatically base on the IEEE 802 1p priority level IP precedence and or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide
368. p esd E ET T 175 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen enne enne nn nnn nnn n nnn n n nnn nnn nn nnn nnn 181 ARE S p M 181 TLT What You Can Do inthis CN me P m 181 Tha Rha You Nead To KOW eR 181 AP ine POr Fonwarding SOGE M 182 TTA EE HE PON CRIES sesan assena eeann Cota Ga LE en a Kira bn Lea entra ain 184 11 2 The Applleatons SOTGBI iusssieler eR Reese arin ERE HM ides sp D MR ERE 185 D SEO NL Erie d 186 114 Sinuduegud ts tvi PTT IU S LUSIT 187 1144 1 Addidit Fort Trigerering RUIG unicus sescecsrassesee tasas be tne patna witd imam hold Pep p aa a 188 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 8 Table of Contents TLS The DMZ aN a e nii i sense sees AE A 189 TUS WP TTE 190 7 The Address Mapping Sorem e MH 191 TLZ T Add Edit Address Mapping Bulle id c rte a a aaaea 192 11 8 The BOSSES SOS dansinn a ees 193 11 9 Technical ENGNG m M 193 TT NAT DONNIONS MERETUR 194 To What NAT DOES sinoni PO d en prd aver abd er emi rid epe Hands ead 194 TIRES Mou MAT VORS oai coo en p on Dod o M bor een te ros adatta AO EL 195 TOA PATE PBA Leones p co iode tiU eda Tage Le puse XR Mouth i wed taxi tata Moped abd o aded Te eode Fes cibi ted 195 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS 199 TEA OV
369. p to maintain an existing 3G connection or Drop to disconnect it connection Actions Enable Email Select this to enable the e mail notification function The VMG will e mail you a notification Notification when there over budget occurs VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 94 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 10 Network Setting gt Broadband gt 3G Backup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Mail Server Over Budget Email Title Select a mail server for the e mail address specified below If you do not select a mail server e mail notifications cannot be sent via e mail You must have configured a mail server already in the Maintenance gt Email Notification screen Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e mail notifications that the VMG sends Send Notification to Email Notifications are sent to the e mail address specified in this field If this field is left blank notifications cannot be sent via e mail Interval Enter the interval of how many minutes you want the VMG to e mail you Enable Log Select this to activate the logging function at the interval you set in this field Basic Click this to hide the advanced settings of 3G backup Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the VMG Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration 6 4 The Advanced Screen Use the Advanced screen to enable or disable ADSL over PTM Annex M DSL PhyR and SRA
370. password again for confirmation Retry Times Enter the number of times consecutive wrong passwords can be entered for this account 0 means there is no limit Idle Timeout Enter the length of inactive time before the VMG will automatically log the user out of the web configurator Lock Period Enter the length of time a user must wait before attempting to log in again after a number if consecutive wrong passwords have been entered as defined in Retry Times Group Specify whether this user will have Administrator or User privleges Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 314 Remote Management 30 1 Overview Remote management controls through which interface s which services can access the Device Note The VMG is managed using the Web Configurator 30 2 The Remote MGMT Screen Use this screen to configure through which interface s which services can access the Device You can also specify the port numbers the services must use to connect to the Device Click Maintenance gt Remote MGMT to open the following screen Figure 161 Maintenance gt Remote MGMT Fe Ch ea Tiuist Domain Remote MGMT enables various approaches to access this device remotely from a WAN and or LAN connection Service Control WAN Interface used for services Any WAN Multi VAN lan4 wan eth36 VDSL pppo3G
371. peed to match the WAN interfaces actual transmission speed For example set the LAN managed downstream bandwidth to 100000 kbps if you use a 100 Mbps wired Ethernet WAN connection You can also set this number lower than the WAN interfaces actual transmission speed This will cause the VMG to not use some of the interfaces available bandwidth If you leave this field blank the VMG automatically sets this to the LAN interfaces maximum supported connection speed traffic priority Assigned by Upstream Select how the VMG assigns priorities to various upstream traffic flows None Disables auto priority mapping and has the VMG put packets into the queues according to your classification rules Traffic which does not match any of the classification rules is mapped into the default queue with the lowest priority Ethernet Priority Automatically assign priority based on the IEEE 802 1p priority level IP Precedence Automatically assign priority based on the first three bits of the TOS field in the IP header Packet Length Automatically assign priority based on the packet size Smaller packets get higher priority since control signaling VoIP internet gaming or other real time dre are usually small while larger packets are usually best effort data packets like ile transfers Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 10 4 The Queue Setup Screen
372. people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place A good way to come up with effective security keys passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember and to enter it in a way that appears random VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 127 Chapter 7 Wireless and does not include real words For example if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point which you know was made in 1971 you could use 7Ododchal71lvanpoi as your security key The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network 7 10 3 1 SSID Normally the VMG acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area You can hide the SSID instead in which case the VMG does not broadcast the SSID In addition you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess This type of security is fairly weak however because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID In addition unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network 7 10 3 2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number called a MAC address A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal chara
373. plain the main fields in the web configurator Click Security gt I PSec VPN to open this screen as shown next Figure 130 Security gt IPSec VPN IPSec can be used to protect data flows between a pair of hosts computer users or servers security gateways routers or firewalls or between a security gateway and a host You can add or remove IPSec tunnel connections from this page Add New Connection B Note IPSec tunnels follow the Firewall Security Level You can add Firewall ACL Rule to accept some services VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 251 Chapter 22 VPN This screen contains the following fields Table 100 Security gt IPSec VPN LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New Click this button to add an item to the list Connection This displays the index number of an entry Status This displays whether the VPN policy is enabled Enable or not Disable Connection Name The name of the VPN policy Remote Gateway This is the IP address of the remote IPSec router in the IKE SA Local Addresses This displays the IP address es on the LAN behind your VMG Remote This displays the IP address es on the LAN behind the remote IPSec s router Addresses Modify Click the Edit icon to modify the VPN policy Click the Delete icon to delete the VPN policy 22 2 1 The IPSec VPN Add Edit Screen Use these settings to add or edit VPN policies Click the Add New Conne
374. please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The address 224 0 0 0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers The address 224 0 0 1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts including gateways All hosts must join the 224 0 0 1 group in order to participate in IGMP The address 224 0 0 2 is assigned to the multicast routers group At start up the VMG queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the VMG periodically updates this information DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System DNS to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa for instance the IP address of www zyxel com is 204 217 0 2 The DNS server is extremely VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 104 Chapter 6 Broadband important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The VMG can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses manually enter them in the DNS server fields If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses along with the VMG s WAN IP address set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from t
375. r more information The 6RD IPv6 rapid deployment fields display when you set the IPv6 I Pv4 Mode field to IPv4 Only See IPv6 Rapid Deployment on page 81 for more information Enable DS Lite This is available only when you select I Pv6 Only in the I Pv6 I Pv4 Mode field Select Enable to let local computers use IPv4 through an ISP s IPv6 network DS Lite Relay Specify the transition router s IPv6 address Server IP Enable 6RD This is available only when you select I Pv4 Only in the IPv6 I Pv4 Mode field Select Enable to tunnel IPv6 traffic from the local network through the ISP s IPv4 network 6RD Type Select Static if you have the IPv4 address of the relay server otherwise select DHCP to have the Device detect it automatically through DHCP VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 88 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 8 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit Routing Mode continued Relay Server IP LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv4 Mask Enter the subnet mask number 1 32 for the IPv4 network Length 6RD Border When you set the 6RD Type to Static specify the relay server s IPv4 address in this field 6RD IPv6 Prefix Enter an IPv6 prefix for tunneling I Pv6 traffic to the ISP s border relay router and connecting to the native IPv6 Internet Mode field IPv6 Address This is available only when you select I Pv6 IPv4 DualStack or I Pv6 Only in the I Pv6 I Pv4
376. r nearest ZyXEL FTP site or www zyxel com to use to upgrade your device s performance Only use firmware for your device s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your VMG 37 2 The Firmware Screen Click Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade to open the following screen The upload process uses HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol and may take up to two minutes After a successful upload the system will reboot Do NOT turn off the VMG while firmware upload is in progress Figure 173 Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade Firmware and WWAN package Upgrade is where you can update the device with newly released features by upgrading the latest firmware and WWAN Package You can download the latest firmware and WWAN Package file from the manufacturer website of this device Upgrade Firmware Current Firmware Version V1 00 AATS 0 File Path Choose File No file chosen Upload Upgrade 3G Package Current 3G Package Version 1 06 File Path Choose File No file chosen upload The following table describes the labels in this screen After you see the firmware updating screen wait two minutes before logging into the VMG again VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 333 Chapter 37 Firmware Upgrade Table 144 Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION Upgrade Firmware Current This is the present Firmware version and the date created Firmware V
377. r oues e pas Fe ada ER PERIERE SER ERN E EEE 58 4 11 Using the Media Server Feature 22i rto peret ecd due aba caddie seb budd du anina Lea EENAA s sun LER aR 60 211 COBBOUPBBO Me YMG saisin E i nz odi BOE Gd b e up dao eua ob ria c nd 60 411 2 Using VES Meda PIS saccra ik bep REN oRES PEU Qen Erkp bri ad uv epp Pen E Re Po daba 60 411 3 Using a Digital Media AGI 1st rrt ath th nti ne aA so d a ES a ot ai 63 4 12 Using the QET 42 1 EET TE E OO LS TT 65 Part ik Technical Heferertebliussasse can peni uA PPHHH EAA 71 Chapter 5 Network Map and Status SCf amp 6Hhs isccciiciccaccicsccicssccsasicceicaacetsisassiacecsunasesratenaescavasccccesaasesnsnestaniesseacions 73 OVON a E ieee pecan iG pa 73 52 Tho Notwork Map SCOE 0502025 ssssecsesedssanavesavsaaassestvapaenstevnansasieassaaaisgate oett LEE uud qs i seat ce E ER ER apis 73 ed WIE Ve aper c r RR DEP 74 Chapter 6 jn 79 IESUS S 79 1 1 What You Can Den ihis Chapel dsndseqeepa sie condi koe edi eese ba eS rase rp Ceu rk r sau EE EL LE Gs 79 mu sucubieilt Egli er 80 Go Beles TBE e m 82 ms Ihe Brogdband DEOS auod edd Sapna eae pidas Sedna aus eu pda Lepide EATS 83 0 2 1 Add Edit intemmet Conneclhon e M 85 Ba TO 3G Backup SUFBOE soriana EA AEA SEHR EUM a 91 a ee e UT 95 EMISIT 98 G T ro pg EUNDI CN 99 DO EIBEHHOE WAN Louisa cs acca cere Hm bel
378. r s Guide 304 VoIP Status 26 1 The VoIP Status Screen Click System Monitor gt Vol P Status to open the following screen You can view the VoIP registration current call status and phone numbers in this screen Figure 156 System Monitor gt VoIP Status page olP Status Information such as whether a SIP account is registered and the total call volume made by a SIP account can be viewed in the Poll Interval s 1 sec Set Interval Stop SIP Status nr air m i Lastincoming Last Outgoing Beaiziration Waiting Number Number SIP1 Inactive changeme changeme No Call Status Account Duration Status Codec Peer Number changeme 0 00 00 Idle Phone Status Phone Outgoing Number Incoming Number Phone 1 SIP1 changeme SIP1 changeme Phone 2 SIP1 changeme SIP1 changeme The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 129 System Monitor gt VoIP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Poll Interval s Enter the number of seconds the VMG needs to wait before updating this screen and then click Set Interval Click Stop to have the VMG stop updating this screen SIP Status Account This column displays each SIP account in the VMG Registration This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account You can change this in the Status screen Registered The SIP account is registered with a SIP server Not Regi
379. r the rate limit for the connection This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this connection WAN Outgoing Select Enable and enter a DSCP DiffServ Code Point value to have the VMG add it in the current WAN Default Tag packets sent by this WAN interface DSCP If you enable Select WAN Outgoing Default Tag enter a DSCP DiffServ Code Point value to have the VMG add it in the packets sent by this WAN interface MTU MTU Size Enter the MTU Maximum Transfer Unit size for this traffic Bridging and Use this feature to bridge a LAN port s with the WAN interface Traffic to from LAN ports Routing in the not in the bridge is routed from the WAN interface same WAN ADSL use same VPI VCI in Bridge and Route modes VDSL use same VLAN in Bridge and Route modes Enable Con Enable this if you want to use the same VPI VCI settings in different WAN interfaces Select this and then choose the ports to bridge with the WAN interface V e ADSL concurrent WAN uses the same VCI PVI in both routing and bridge modes e VDSL concurrent WAN uses same VLAN in both routing and bridge mode Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the VMG Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 6 2 1 2 Bridge Mode Click the Add new WAN I nterface in the Network Setting Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to the connection you want to configure Select Bridge as the encapsulation mod
380. r tra bbxrE Vra Prid ror aeta soi HP He s aika 223 T4127 What Youlesmq Io KNOW oci Oe e d e ode apr E o ta ae rae Sn 224 TE Wer PEG ToO least isi cteteet ut east eie itas cbtelosddate po uisi eulowen eio dove ob desit lo eei te EET 225 11 5 he PIOIDDOO SENSOR ouicinagiicecstedbbtic Eei fbXd Cab o dedi CERRO but Ie CU DN abere EUN Jenbba eii Ml evte each Aa bdc Po CC DADDU EDU 225 QE ANT ECE BUH T T TED 226 174 The Access Control SOM 2 usce E E SERIEM TTE RIMIS QI 228 1731 Fen an AC BIB eect Co i Ee i i ESL te o iE Cro E bo o dti us 228 T Ee Be S DIE Li conie eta etre e tub ate Toric plas adn taal ta etd redu uc nepote cele COEM mad 230 Chapter 18 MAC i i TT TT THE 233 U spsc U Se TTU MH 233 18 2 The MAG Fiter yD ua iere kp dede abus een ia wa b Falsa acd d eat SER E CS ada iU 233 Chapter 19 Parepntat COMO ae ooa Ecl Ei eie duet er aradan e Rode 235 TOA ONEEN Aet C EE eree 235 192 The Parental Control SERSIL sage e ruat dete ule le Lea Ley apt tas wake dante eb eaa t rua ba dua pl nor EB aca ede 235 19 2 1 Add Edit a Parental Control Profle 5 eere ettet REEL De daa eR E Ee De a a be Dep ve REEL ERR ute ex Rd 236 Chapter 20 ieget l5 REL EU URS 241 PIRE EIU CS ARTE TET EUR 241 202 The Scheduler R le SOFGell 22 erri edades edis agita a d vbdasta Lado a Ea dpa PA E d 241 282 1 Ad T Edil a See UE coe eae api tEeti Haube e Dn REUS Reit Marie eid aad Cebu n od E ERE Ed MEDe
381. raffic Status gt LAN Figures about data that have been sentto and received from each LAN port including wireless are displayed in the following table Refresh Interval 15 Seconds Y Bytes Sent 58 470 127 0 0 0 0 Data 99841 0 0 0 0 Sent Packet Error 0 0 0 0 0 Drop 0 0 0 0 0 Data 81138 0 0 0 0 Received Packet Error 0 0 0 0 0 Drop a a 0 0 0 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 127 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt LAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select how often you want the VMG to update this screen Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface Bytes Sent This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface Bytes Received This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface more hide Click more to show more information Click hide more to hide them more Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface Sent Packets Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface Received Packets Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on t
382. rame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 Bits Multicast IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version 1 RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1
383. ream Bandwidth Kbps Notes 1 Max Upstream Bandwidth This field allow user configure the maximum bandwidth of this SSID to WAN 2 Max Downstream Bandwidth This field allow user configure the maximum bandwidth of WAN to this SSID 3 If Max Upstream Downstream Bandwidth is empty the CPE sets the value automatically BSSID 72 5D 4E 00 00 03 E mail notification when the wireless guest visit Enable Email Notification SSID Subnet Enable Disabled Security Level More Secure Recommended v v Security Mode WPA2 PSK v Generate password automatically Enter 8 63 characters a z A Z 0 9 and other characters are not allowed Password 000000000 sssssssssssssssssssssssessssesss more password unmask OK Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 21 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Guest More AP gt Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Network Setup Wireless You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field Passphrase Passphrase type cannot be changed The default is None Type Wireless Network Settings VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 115 Chapter 7 Wireless Table 24 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Guest More AP gt Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Network Name SSID The SSID Service Set IDentity identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated Wireless d
384. reate another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN Figure 58 Example of Routing Topology 9 2 The Routing Screen Use this screen to view and configure the static route rules on the VMG Click Network Setting gt Routing Static Route to open the following screen Figure 59 Network Setting gt Routing gt Static Route Add new Static Route Status Name Interface L VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 155 Chapter 9 Routing The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Network Setting gt Routing gt Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new static route Click this to configure a new static route This is the index number of the entry Status This field displays whether the static route is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this route is active A gray bulb signifies that this route is not active Name This is the name that describes or identifies this route Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number Subnet Mask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their de
385. reen shown next Figure 53 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Additional Subnet LAN Setup Group Name Active IPv4 Address Public LAN Active IPv4 Address This page lets you configure the public static IP and IP alias IP Alias Setup Subnet Mask Prefix Length Subnet Mask Prefix Length Offer Public IP by DHCP Enable ARP Proxy Additional Subnet Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Additional Subnet LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Alias Setup Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure the IP alias settings See Chapter 14 on page 205 for how to create a new interface group Active Select the checkbox to configure a LAN network for the VMG IP Address Enter the IP address of your VMG in dotted decimal notation IP Subnet Mask Your VMG will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the VMG Public LAN Active Select the checkbox to enable the Public LAN feature Your ISP must support Public LAN and Static IP IP Address Enter the public IP address provided by your ISP IP Subnet Mask Enter the public IP subnet mask provided by your ISP Offer Public IP by DHCP Select t
386. reless gt WDS LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Bridge Setup AP Mode Select the operating mode for your VMG Access Point The VMG functions as a bridge and access point simultaneously Wireless Bridge The VMG acts as a wireless network bridge and establishes wireless links with other APs In this mode clients cannot connect to the VMG wirelessly Bridge Restrict This field is available only when you set operating mode to Access Point table below Select Disable to turn off WDS Select Enabled to turn on WDS and enter the peer device s MAC address manually in the MAC Address Remote Bridge You can enter the MAC address of the peer device by clicking the Edit icon under Modify This is the index number of the entry MAC Address This shows the MAC address of the peer device You can connect to up to 4 peer devices format six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc Click the Delete icon to remove this entry Modify Click the Edit icon and type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address Scan Click the Scan icon to search and display the available APs within range Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 121 Chapter 7 Wireless 7 7 1 WDS Scan You can click the Scan icon in Wireless gt WDS to have the VMG automatically s
387. reless clients Orange Blinking The VMG is setting up a WPS connection Off The 2 4 GHz wireless network is not activated Phonel Green On A SIP account is registered for the phone port Emenee Blinking A telephone connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook or there is an incoming call Off The phone port does not have a SIP account registered USB Green On The VMG recognizes a USB connection through the USB1 slot Blinking The VMG is sending receiving data to from the USB device connected to it Off The VMG does not detect a USB connection through the USB1 slot 1 7 The RESET Button If you forget your password or cannot access the Web Configurator you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the default login names and passwords will be reset see the cover page 1 Make sure the PWR SYS LED is on not blinking 2 To set the device back to the factory default settings press the RESET button for five seconds or until the PWR SYS LED begins to blink and then release it When the PWR SYS LED begins to blink the defaults have been restored and the device restarts VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 21 Chapter 1 Introducing the VMG 1 8 Wireless Access The VMG is a wireless Access Point AP for wireless clients such as notebook computers or PDAs and iPa
388. rental Control Profile Click Add new PCP in the Parental Control screen to add a new rule or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to edit it Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule and or URL filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 236 Chapter 19 Parental Control Add new PCP General LJ Active Home Network User Rule List Parental Control Profile Name MPEP Custom v iz3456789abc User MAC Address 12 34 56 78 9a be Day Time Start End Network Service Network Service Settings Site URL Keyword Add Delete Internet Access Schedule Block or Allow the Web Site Service Name a ProtocolPort LJEveryday W Monday Tuesday Wednesday C Thursday C Friday LJ Saturday Sunday 18 30 24 00 E p 00 00 24 00 e 8 08 30 24 00 J a 00 00 24 00 No access Bi Authorized access v Blockthe web URLs v Apply Cancel Figure 118 Parental Control Rule Add Edit Rule gt Add Service Service Name Protocol Port Add New Service e UserDefined TCP v Example 4091 5091 6892 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 237 Chapter 19 Parental Control Figure 119 Parental Control Rule Add Edit Rule
389. rity3 7 From Intf LAN faher Type IP Unchange Unchange Unchange Priority 74 Protocol TCP From Intf LAN Ether Type IP Dst Port 23 Protocol TCP From Intf Local Ether Type IP Unchange Unchange Unchange Priority3 7 Protocol IGMP 9 7 a Unchange Unchange Unchange Priority3 2W The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Network Setting gt QoS gt Class Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new Classifier Click this to create a new classifier This is the index number of the entry Status This field displays whether the classifier is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this classifier is active A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active Class Name This is the name of the classifier Classification This shows criteria specified in this classifier for example the interface from which Criteria traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this classifier DSCP Mark This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier 802 1P Mark This is the IEEE 802 1p priority level assigned to traffic of this classifier VLAN ID Tag This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier To Queue This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier N
390. rt channel bonding A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz 40MHz channel bonding or dual channel bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase throughput The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz It is often better to use the 20 Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 109 Chapter 7 Wireless Table 16 Network Setting gt Wireless gt General continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Control This is available for some regions when you select a specific channel and set the Bandwidth Sideband field to 40MHz Set whether the control channel set in the Channel field should be in the Lower or Upper range of channel bands Passphrase If you set security for the wireless LAN and have the VMG generate a password the setting Type in this field determines how the VMG generates the password Select None to set the VMG s password generation to not be based on a passphrase Select Fixed to use a 16 character passphrase for generating a password Select Variable to use a 16 to 63 character passphrase for generating a password Passphrase Key For a fixed type passphrase enter 16 alphanumeric characters 0 9 A Z with no spaces It must contain both letters and numbers and is case sensitive For a variable type passphrase enter 16 to 63 alphanumeric characters 0 9 A Z with no spaces
391. rt is not mapped to a SIP account you cannot receive or make any calls on the phone connected to this phone port more less Click more to display and edit more information for the SIP account Click less to display and configure the basic SIP account settings URI Type Select whether or not to include the SIP service domain name when the VMG sends the SIP number SIP include the SIP service domain name TEL do not include the SIP service domain name Voice Features Primary Compression Type Secondary Compression Type Third Compression Type Select the type of voice coder decoder codec that you want the VMG to use G 711 provides high voice quality but requires more bandwidth 64 kbps G 711 is the default codec used by phone companies and digital handsets e G 711a is typically used in Europe e G 711u is typically used in North America and Japan G 726 24 operates at 24 kbps G 726 32 operates at 32 kbps G 722 is a 7 KHz wideband voice codec that operates at 48 56 and 64 kbps By using a sample rate of 16 kHz G 722 can provide higher fidelity and better audio quality than narrowband codecs like G 711 in which the voice signal is sampled at 8 KHz The VMG must use the same codec as the peer When two SIP devices start a SIP session they must agree on a codec Select the VMG s first choice for voice coder decoder Select the VMG s second choice for voice coder decoder Select None if you only want
392. s WAN IP address assignment and other advanced properties You can also add new WAN connections 3G Backup Use this screen to configure 3G WAN connection Advanced Use this screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL Annex M Annex J and DSL PhyR functions 802 1x Use this screen to view and configure the IEEE 802 1x settings on the VMG Ethernet WAN Use this screen to convert Ethernet LAN 4 port as WAN port or restore the WAN port to LAN port Wireless General Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication security settings Guest More AP Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the VMG MAC Use this screen to block or allow wireless traffic from wireless devices Authentication of certain SSIDs and MAC addresses to the VMG WPS Use this screen to configure and view your WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup settings WMM Use this screen to enable or disable Wi Fi MultiMedia WMM WDS Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System WDS links to other access points Others Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings Channel Status Use this screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results Home LAN Setup Use this screen to configure LAN TCP IP settings and other advanced Networking properties Static DHCP Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses UPnP Use this screen to turn UPnP and UPnP NAT T on or off Additional Use this screen to configure IP
393. s an MLD proxy on this connection This allows Enable the VMG to get subscription information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traffic significantly Apply as Select this option to have the VMG use the WAN interface of this connection as the system Default default gateway Gateway IPv6 DNS Configure the IPv6 DNS server in the following section Server IPv6 DNS Select Dynamic to have the VMG get the IPv6 DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically Select Static to have the VMG use the IPv6 DNS server addresses you configure manually IPv6 DNS Enter the first IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP Server 1 IPv6 DNS Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP Server 2 VLAN These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL VDSL over PTM 802 1p IEEE 802 1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Select the IEEE 802 1p priority level from 0 to 7 to add to traffic through this connection The greater the number the higher the priority level 802 1q Type the VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094 for traffic through this connection Qos VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 89 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 8 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit Routing Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Rate Limit Ente
394. s green The srTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets CBS and EBS Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate called Committed Information Rate CIR When the first bucket CBS is full new tokens overflow into the second bucket EBS All packets are evaluated against the CBS If a packet does not exceed the CBS it is marked green Otherwise it is evaluated against the EBS If it is below the EBS then it is marked yellow If it exceeds the EBS then it is marked red The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in srTCM A packet arrives The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet in bytes After a packet is transmitted a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the CBS bucket If there are not enough tokens in the CBS bucket the VMG checks the EBS bucket The packet is marked yellow if there are sufficient tokens in the EBS bucket Otherwise the packet is marked red No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped Two Rate Three Color Marker The Two Rate Three Color Marker trTCM defined in RFC 2698 is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user defined rates the Committed Information Rate CIR and the Peak Information Rate PIR The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the ne
395. s interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface Packets Received Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface more hide Click more to show more information Click hide more to hide them more Disabled This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently disconnected Interface Packets Sent Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface Packets Received Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface 25 3 The LAN Status Screen Click System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt LAN to open the following screen The figure in this screen shows the interface that is currently connected on the VMG VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 302 Chapter 25 Traffic Status Figure 154 System Monitor gt T
396. s of the remote IPSec router in the IKE SA Tunnel access from local IP addresses Select Single Address to have only one local LAN IP address use the VPN tunnel Select Subnet to specify local LAN IP addresses by their subnet mask VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 253 Chapter 22 VPN Table 101 Security gt IPSec VPN Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address for VPN If Single Address is selected enter a static IP address on the LAN behind your VMG If Subnet is selected specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask by entering a static IP address on the LAN behind your VMG Then enter the subnet mask to identify the network address IP Subnetmask If Subnet is selected enter the subnet mask to identify the network address Tunnel access from remote IP addresses Select Single Address to have only one remote LAN IP address use the VPN tunnel Select Subnet to specify remote LAN IP addresses by their subnet mask IP Address for VPN If Single Address is selected enter a static IP address on the LAN behind the remote I PSec s router If Subnet is selected specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask by entering a static IP address on the LAN behind the remote IPSec s router Then enter the subnet mask to identify the network address IP Subnetmask If Subnet is selected enter the subnet mask to identify the network address Protocol
397. s out when the IKE SA lifetime period expires If an IKE SA times out when an IPSec SA is already established the IPSec SA stays connected In phase 2 you must Choose an encryption algorithm Choose an authentication algorithm Choose a Diffie Hellman public key cryptography key group e Set the IPSec SA lifetime This field allows you to determine how long the IPSec SA should stay up before it times out The VMG automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA if there is traffic when the IPSec SA lifetime period expires If an IPSec SA times out then the IPSec router must renegotiate the SA the next time someone attempts to send traffic 22 4 4 Negotiation Mode The phase 1 Negotiation Mode you select determines how the Security Association SA will be established for each connection through IKE negotiations Main Mode ensures the highest level of security when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication phase 1 It uses 6 messages in three round trips SA negotiation Diffie Hellman exchange and an exchange of nonces a nonce is a random number This mode features identity protection your identity is not revealed in the negotiation VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 261 Chapter 22 VPN Aggressive Mode is quicker than Main Mode because it eliminates several steps when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication phase 1 However the trade off is that faster speed limits its negotiating power
398. s receiving from the service provider Actual INP Sudden spikes in the line s level of external noise impulse noise can cause errors and result in lost packets This could especially impact the quality of multimedia traffic such as voice or video Impulse noise protection INP provides a buffer to allow for correction of errors caused by error correction to deal with this The number of DMT Discrete Multi Tone symbols shows the level of impulse noise protection for the upstream and downstream traffic A higher symbol value provides higher error correction capability but it causes overhead and higher delay which may increase error rates in received multimedia data Total Attenuation This is the upstream and downstream line attenuation measured in decibels dB This attenuation is the difference between the power transmitted at the near end and the power received at the far end Attenuation is affected by the channel characteristics wire gauge quality condition and length of the physical line Attainable Net Data Rate These are the highest theoretically possible transfer rates at which the port could send and receive payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic xDSL Counters VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 309 Chapter 27 xDSL Statistics Table 130 Status gt xDSL Statistics continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Downstream These are t
399. s screen to configure your VMG s Voice over IP settings Provider Phone Phone Use this screen to select your location and a call service mode Call Rule Call Rule Call History Call History Use this screen to view a call history list Summary Call History Use this screen to view detailed information for each outgoing call Outgoing you made Call History Use this screen to view detailed information for each incoming call Incoming from someone calling you System Monitor VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 29 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary continued LINK TAB FUNCTION Log System Log Use this screen to view the status of events that occurred to the VMG You can export or e mail the logs Security Log Use this screen to view all security related events You can select level and category of the security events in their proper drop down list window Levels include Emergency e Alert e Critical Error e Warning e Notice Informational Debugging Category include Routing Table Routing Table e Account e Attack Firewall MAC Filter Traffic Status WAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the WAN port of the VMG LAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the LAN ports of the VMG NAT Use this screen to view NAT statistics for connected hosts
400. s to use the Security MAC Filter screen to grant wireless network access to his computer but not to Josephine s computer VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 57 Chapter 4 Tutorials Thomas INTERNE Josephine 1 Click Security gt MAC Filter to open the MAC Filter screen Select the Enable check box to activate MAC filter function 2 Select Allow Then enter the host name and MAC address of Thomas computer in this screen Click Apply MAC Address Filter nable Disable settings are invalid when disabled MAC Restrict Mode low Deny Host name MAC Address Thomas 02 4 2 ABE B Note Only devices listed here are granted or prohibit access to the network Apply Cancel Thomas can also grant access to the computers of other members of his family and friends However Josephine and others not listed in this screen will no longer be able to access the Internet through the VMG 4 10 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer Here is how to use an FTP program to access a file storage device connected to the VMG s USB port Note This example uses the FileZilla FTP program to browse your shared files VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 58 Chapter 4 Tutorials 1 In FileZilla enter the IP address of the VMG the default is 192 168 1 1 your account s user name and password and port 21 and click Quickconnect A screen asking for password authentication appears
401. screen Table 32 Static DHCP Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to activate the connection between the client and the VMG Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure static DHCP settings See Chapter 14 on page 205 for how to create a new interface group Select Device Info Select a device or computer from the drop down list or select Manual I nput to manually enter a device s MAC address and IP address in the following fields MAC Address If you select Manual Input enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN IP Address If you select Manual I nput enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 8 4 The UPnP Screen Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a distributed open networking standard that uses TCP IP for simple peer to peer network connectivity between devices A UPnP device can dynamically join a network obtain an P address convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network In turn a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use See page 140 for more information on UPnP Use the following screen to configure the UPnP settings on your VMG Click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt UPnP to display
402. scription Ports Protocol Number Modify B Note If a protocol rule is removed related ACL rules will also be removed The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 Security gt Firewall gt Protocol LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new Click this to add a new service service entry Name This is the name of your customized service Description This is the description of your customized service Ports Protocol This shows the IP protocol TCP UDP ICMP or TCP UDP and the port number or range Number of ports that defines your customized service Other and the protocol number displays if the service uses another IP protocol Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the entry Click the Delete icon to remove this entry 17 3 1 Add Edit a Service Use this screen to add a customized service rule that you can use in the firewall s ACL rule configuration Click Add new service entry or the edit icon next to an existing service rule in the Service screen to display the following screen VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 226 Chapter 17 Firewall Figure 111 Service Add Edit Add new service entry x Protocol Other v Protocol Number 0 255 Add Rule List Protocol Ports Protocol Number Delete Service Name Service Description Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 Service Add Edit
403. section of the client s configuration interface see the device s User s Guide for how to find the WPS PIN for the VMG see Section 7 5 on page 118 Enter the client s PIN in the AP s configuration interface If the client device s configuration interface has an area for entering another device s PIN you can either enter the client s PIN in the AP or enter the AP s PIN in the client it does not matter which Start WPS on both devices within two minutes Use the configuration utility to activate WPS not the push button on the device itself On a computer connected to the wireless client try to connect to the Internet If you can connect WPS was successful If you cannot connect check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful The following figure shows a WPS enabled wireless client installed in a notebook computer connecting to the WPS enabled AP via the PIN method VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 133 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 44 Example WPS Process PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL SSID WPA 2 PSK COMMUNICATION gt CREDO ls C 3 7 10 9 3 How WPS Works When two WPS enabled devices connect each device must assume a specific role One device acts as the registrar the device that supplies network and security settings and the other device acts as the
404. segment Press this to perform an OAM F5 segment loopback test F5 end end Press this to perform an OAM F5 end to end loopback test VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 344 Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories Power Hardware Connections and LEDs VMG Access and Login Internet Access Wireless Internet Access USB Device Connection UPnP 40 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs The VMG does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on Make sure the VMG is turned on Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the VMG Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the VMG and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on Turn the VMG off and on If the problem continues contact the vendor One of the LEDs does not behave as expected Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 1 6 on page 20 Check the hardware connections Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables Turn the VMG off and on VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 345 Chapter 40 Troubleshooting 5 If the problem continues contact the vendor 40 2 VMG Access and Login forgot the IP address for the VMG 1 The default LAN IP address is 192 168 1 1 2 Ifyou
405. select to use a security additional options appears in this screen Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication See the following sections for more details about this field Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 7 2 1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption or authentication VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 110 Chapter 7 Wireless Note If you do not enable any wireless security on your VMG your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range Figure 29 Wireless gt General No Security Security Level No Security v v v The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 Wireless gt General No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Level Choose No Security to allow all wireless connections without data encryption or authentication 7 2 2 Basic WEP Encryption WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points AP to keep network communications private Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key Note WEP is extremely insecure Its encryption can be broken by an attacker using widely available
406. server Select None if you don t want to configure the time server Check with your ISP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Time Zone Time zone offset Choose the time zone of your location This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time GMT Daylight Saving State Daylight Saving Time is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select Enable if you use Daylight Saving Time Start rule End rule Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you enabled Daylight Saving You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific week in a particular month The Time field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States set the day to Second Sunday the month to March and the time to 2 in the Hour field Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would set the day to Last Sunday and the month to March The time y
407. service for remote management Certificate HTTPS Select a certificate the HTTPS server the VMG uses to authenticate itself to the HTTPS Certificate client You must have certificates already configured in the Certificates screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the VMG Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 30 3 The Trust Domain Screen Use this screen to view a list of public IP addresses which are allowed to access the VMG through the services configured in the Maintenance Remote MGMT screen Click Maintenance Remote MGMT gt Turst Domain to open the following screen Note If this list is empty all public IP addresses can access the VMG from the WAN through the specified services Figure 162 Maintenance gt Remote MGMT gt Trust Domain Trust Domain Clickthe Add Trust Domain button to enter the IP address ofthe management station permitted to access the local management services Add Trust Domain IP Address Delete 1444 T VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 316 Chapter 30 Remote Management The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 135 Maintenance gt Remote MGMT gt Trust Domain LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Trust Click this to add a trusted host IP address Domain IPv4 Address This field shows a trusted host IP address Delete Click the Delete icon to remove the trust IP address 30 4 Th
408. severity level from the drop down list box This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected When you select a severity the VMG searches through all logs of that severity or higher Category Select the type of logs to display Clear Log Click this to delete all the logs Refresh Click this to renew the log screen Export Log Click this to export the selected log s Email Log Now Click this to send the log file s to the E mail address you specify in the Maintenance gt Logs Setting screen System Log This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry Time This field displays the time the log was recorded Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Messages This field states the reason for the log VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 298 Chapter 24 Log 24 3 The Security Log Screen Use the Security Log screen to see the security related logs for the categories that you select Click System Monitor gt Log gt Security Log to open the following screen Figure 152 System Monitor gt Log gt Security Log Security Log All security events will be logged and displayed in the following table Selec
409. slation NAT third C in the example You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet Figure 88 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A 192 168 1 33 D 192 168 1 1 B 192 168 1 34 E eu DSL INTERNEJ IP address assigned by ISP C 192 168 1 35 D 192 168 1 36 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 197 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 198 Dynamic DNS Setup 12 1 Overview DNS DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it In addition to the system DNS server s each WAN interface service is set to have its own static or dynamic DNS server list You can configure a DNS static route to forward DNS queries for certain domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server s The VMG uses a system DNS server in the order you specify in the Broadband screen to resolve domain names that do not match any DNS routing entry After the VMG receives a DNS reply from a DNS server it creates a new entry for the resolved IP address in the routing table Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you
410. ss and MAC address to the E mail queue see the Source fields 5 Verify that the queue setup works by checking Network Setting gt QoS gt Monitor This shows the bandwidth allotted to e mail traffic compared to other network traffic 4 8 Access the VMG Using DDNS If you connect your VMG to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address it is inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet The VMG s WAN IP address changes dynamically Dynamic DNS DDNS allows you to access the VMG using a domain name http zyxelrouter dyndns org NO W X Y Z To use this feature you have to apply for DDNS service at www dyndns org This tutorial covers Registering a DDNS Account on www dyndns org Configuring DDNS on Your VMG Testing the DDNS Setting Note If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use DDNS 4 8 1 Registering a DDNS Account on www dyndns org 1 Open a browser and type http www dyndns org 2 Apply for a user account This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the username and password 3 Log into www dyndns org using your account 4 Add a new DDNS host name This tutorial uses the following settings as an example Hostname zyxelrouter dyndns org Service Type Host with IP address P Address Enter the WAN IP address that your VMG is currently using You can find the IP address on the VMG s Web Configurator Status page Then you will need to configure the same a
411. ss to the network he or she can steal information or introduce malware malicious software intended to compromise the network For these reasons a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network or understand the data carried on it These security standards do two things First they authenticate This means that only people presenting the right credentials often a username and password or a key phrase can access the network Second they encrypt This means that the information sent over the air is encoded Only people with the code key can understand the information and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key These security standards vary in effectiveness Some can be broken such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol WEP Using WEP is better than using no security at all but it will not keep a determined attacker out Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly For example the WPA PSK security standard is very secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attacker s software to guess for example a twenty letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters but it is not very secure if you use a short key which is very easy to guess for example a three letter word from the dictionary Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker it s not just
412. ssions The VMG creates Class of Service CoS priority tags with this number to RTP traffic that it transmits Timer Setting Expiration Enter the number of seconds your SIP account is registered with the SIP register server Duration before it is deleted The VMG automatically tries to re register your SIP account when one half of this time has passed The SIP register server might have a different expiration Register Re Enter the number of seconds the VMG waits before it tries again to register the SIP account send timer if the first try failed or if there is no response Session Expires Enter the number of seconds the VMG lets a SIP session remain idle without traffic before it automatically disconnects the session Min SE Enter the minimum number of seconds the VMG lets a SIP session remain idle without traffic before it automatically disconnects the session When two SIP devices start a SIP session they must agree on an expiration time for idle sessions This field is the shortest expiration time that the VMG accepts Phone Key Enter the key combinations for certain functions of the SIP phone Config Call Return Enter the key combinations that you can enter to place a call to the last number that called you One Shot Caller Enter the key combinations that you can enter to activate caller ID for the next call only Display Call One Shot Caller Enter the key combinations that yo
413. stered The last time the VMG tried to register the SIP account with the SIP server the attempt failed The VMG automatically tries to register the SIP account when you turn on the VMG or when you activate it Inactive The SIP account is not active You can activate it in VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 305 Chapter 26 VoIP Status Table 129 System Monitor gt VoIP Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Registration Time This field displays the last time the VMG successfully registered the SIP account The field is blank if the VMG has never successfully registered this account URI This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account You can change these in the VoIP gt SIP screens Message This field indicates whether or not there are any messages waiting for the SIP account Waiting Last Incoming Number This field displays the last number that called the SIP account The field is blank if no number has ever dialed the SIP account Last Outgoing This field displays the last number the SIP account called The field is blank if the SIP Number account has never dialed a number Call Status Account This column displays each SIP account in the VMG Duration This field displays how long the current call has lasted Status This field displays the current state of the phone call Idle There are no current VoIP ca
414. stinations Interface This is the WAN interface used for this static route Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the static route on the VMG Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the VMG A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route 9 2 1 Add Edit Static Route Use this screen to add or edit a static route Click Add new static route in the Routing screen or the Edit icon next to the static route you want to edit The screen shown next appears Figure 60 Routing Add Edit Add New Static Route Iv Active Route Name IP Type IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Use Interface Destination IP Address Use Gateway IP Address IPv4 v o00 pooo 11 Enable Disable ioco v oK Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Routing Add Edit Sheet 1 of 2 LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Select this to enable the static route Clear this to disable this static route without having to delete the entry Route Name Enter a descriptive name for the static route IP Type Select whether your IP type is IPv4 or IPv6 Destination IP Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 network address of the final destination Address VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 156 Chapter 9 Routing Table 39 Routing Add Edit Sheet 2 of 2 L
415. stions about your browser cannot use FTP to upload download the configuration file cannot use FTP to upload new firmware See the troubleshooting suggestions for cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 347 Chapter 40 Troubleshooting 40 3 Internet Access cannot access the Internet 1 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 6 on page 20 2 M Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the Network Setting gt Broadband screen These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly make sure that you enabled the wireless LAN in the VMG and your wireless client and that the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the VMG 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device and reconnect them 5 Ifthe problem continues contact your ISP cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection 1 Make sure you have the DSL WAN port connected to a telephone jack or the DSL or modem jack on a splitter if you have one 2 Make sure you configured a proper DSL WAN interface Network Setting gt Broadband screen with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled 3 Check tha
416. stisticsstscticscacasiaiinisaceiedcesiessiicsreniaieaiaeraivaaesbdetassarassasisinccainenssnasidsbenistascsisascstienstaciaesictinis 35 AI OVERVIEW c nww nG S X X XX EAOa 35 4 2 Setting Up an Ethernet WAN Connection ccc cccccccsseneeceeesseneeeeenseeneesenseneneaeeensnneecsenensnnecenatnnneee 35 4 2 Seng Up an ADSL PPPOE Comme Ginny sessienirir eai RnR 37 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 5 Table of Contents 44 Setting Up a Secure Wireless NEDNOFKE 1221 55 c n rre ox rape edd E 41 4 4 1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings laaeeeiieesssiiesseeeeieeee nene enne thanh anna 41 LC BMC pcd T 42 Vc mE nu l n e 46 4 5 Seung Up Multiple Wireless Groups Lire etate o nba Ro CER EHE ERRDE XS REMEPPU een ani cameramen 47 4 6 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network ccccscceeeeesteeeeeeeseteeeeeeeeteeeeeeenaeeeeees 50 4 7 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup uuisssieeees rng nda kk rita an ER PER RA ES RR AREE MIR Ra ENARRARE 53 Lioplcr c yu Xus CIBC ERR Lm mm 56 4 8 1 Registering a DDNS Account on www dyndns org eeeeeeeeeseeee eene ennemis 56 4 8 2 Contiguring DDNS on Your YMG uiua osse rnein raain rbd d Ga Lua da PR dn pk i a ST 4 6 3 Testing th DDNS ini 57 4 9 Configuring the MAC Address Fillet oce attt tte NR HERE REDEEM RECO EX REESE Ga E ES HER ESO 57 4 10 Access Your Shared Files From a Compute
417. switch The router or switch then sends a group specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if other devices connected to this port should remain in the group VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 379 Appendix C IPv6 Example Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP 2003 Vista Example By default Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6 This example shows you how to use the ipv6 install command on Windows XP 2003 to enable IPv6 This also displays how to use the ipconfig command to see auto generated IP addresses C gt ipv install Installing Succeeded C gt ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix IP Address s e s so e s o o e r 10 1 1 46 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Address e80 2d0 59ff f eb8 103c 4 Default Gateway m 2 woe 10 1 1 254 IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista Use the ipconfig command to check your automatic configured IPv6 address as well You should see at least one IPv6 address available for the interface on your computer Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP Windows XP does not support DHCPv6 If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP Note If you use static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assi
418. t Yet Valid message if the certificate has not yet become applicable This field displays the date that the certificate expires The text displays in red and includes an Expiring or Expired message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired Modify Click the View icon to open a screen with an in depth list of information about the certificate or certification request For a certification request click Load Signed to import the signed certificate Click the Remove icon to delete the certificate or certification request You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use 21 3 1 Create Certificate Request Click Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates and then Create Certificate Request to open the following screen Use this screen to have the VMG generate a certification request VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 244 Chapter 21 Certificates Figure 123 Create Certificate Request Create Certificate Request ps To generate a certificate signing request you need to include Common Name Organization Name State Province Name and the 2 letter Country Code for the certificate Certificate Name Common Name Auto Customize Organization Name State Province Name Country Region Name US United States v Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 95 Create Certificate Request
419. t a level from the pull down menu to show filtered results Level Debugging Y Category All v Export Log Facility Clear Log Refresh Email Log Now Time The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 125 System Monitor gt Log gt Security Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Level Select a severity level from the drop down list box This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected When you select a severity the VMG searches through all logs of that severity or higher Category Select the type of logs to display Clear Log Click this to delete all the logs Refresh Click this to renew the log screen Export Log Click this to export the selected log s Email Log Now Click this to send the log file s to the E mail address you specify in the Maintenance gt Logs Setting screen This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry Time This field displays the time the log was recorded Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Messages This field states the reason for the log VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 299 Chapter 24 Log VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s
420. t allows two parties to establish a shared secret over an unsecured communications channel Diffie Hellman is used within IKE SA setup to establish session keys Upon completion of the Diffie Hellman exchange the two peers have a shared secret but the IKE SA is not authenticated For authentication use pre shared keys VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 264 23 1 Overview Use this chapter to Connect an analog phone to the VMG Make phone calls over the Internet as well as the regular phone network Configure settings such as speed dial Configure network settings to optimize the voice quality of your phone calls 23 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter These screens allow you to configure your VMG to make phone calls over the Internet and your regular phone line and to set up the phones you connect to the VMG Use the SIP Account screen Section 23 3 on page 266 to set up information about your SIP account control which SIP accounts the phones connected to the VMG use and configure audio settings such as volume levels for the phones connected to the VMG Use the SIP Service Provider screen Section 23 4 on page 271 to configure the SIP server information QoS for VoIP calls the numbers for certain phone functions and dialing plan Use the PhoneRegion screen Section 23 5 on page 279 to change settings that depend on the country you are in Use the Call Rule screen Section 23 6 on page 279 to se
421. t have the WAN interface s already configured in the Broadband screens Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 9 5 RIP Routing Information Protocol RIP RFC 1058 and RFC 1389 allows a device to exchange routing information with other routers VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 160 Chapter 9 Routing 9 5 1 The RIP Screen Click Network Setting gt Routing gt RIP to open the RIP screen zi To activate RIP for the WAN Interface select the desired RIP version and operation and place a check in the Enable checkbox To stop RIP on the WAN Interface uncheck the Enable checkbox Click the Apply button to start stop RIP and save the configuration Interface Version Enable Disable Default 27 Figure 65 RIP DefaultGateway l Interface Operation Disable DefaultGateway Appy Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 RIP LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index of the interface in which the RIP setting is used Interface This is the name of the interface in which the RIP setting is used Version The RIP version controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the VMG sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP version 1 is universally supported but RIP version 2 carries more information RIP version 1 is probably adequate for most
422. t of parameters relating to one of the VMG s BSSs The SSID Service Set IDentifier identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility Security This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile Guest WLAN This displays if the guest WLAN function has been enabled for this WLAN If Home Guest displays clients can connect to each other directly If External Guest displays clients are blocked from connecting to each other directly N A displays if guest WLAN is disabled Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 114 Chapter 7 Wireless 7 3 1 Edit Guest More AP Use this screen to edit an SSID profile Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the Guest More AP screen The following screen displays Figure 33 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Guest More AP gt Edit Wireless Network Setup Wireless Enable Disabled The settings in this screen are invalid if you select this Passphrase Type None M Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name SSID ZyXEL000001_Guest1 Max clients 32 Hide SSID Enhanced Multicast Forwarding Z Guest WLAN Access Scenario External Guest Max Upstream Bandwidth Kbps Max Downst
423. t the LAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the DSL connection Network Setting gt I nterface Group 4 Ifyou set up a WAN connection using bridging service make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP s DHCP server cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time You can only use one type of DSL connection either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time cannot connect to the Internet using an Ethernet connection 1 The DSL connection has priority If the DSL connection is up then the Ethernet connection will be down VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 348 Chapter 40 Troubleshooting 2 Make sure you have the Ethernet WAN port connected to a MODEM or Router 3 Make sure you converted LAN port number four as WAN Click Enable in Network Setting gt Broadband gt Ethernet WAN screen 4 Make sure you configured a proper EthernetWAN interface Network Setting gt Broadband screen with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled 5 Check that the WAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the Ethernet connection Network Setting gt Interface Group 6 If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have t
424. t this screen without saving VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 321 Chapter 32 TR 064 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 322 SNMP 33 1 Overview This chapter explains how to configure the SNMP settings on the VMG 33 2 The SNMP Screen Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices Your VMG supports SNMP agent functionality which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the VMG through the network The VMG supports SNMP version one SNMPv1 and version two SNMPv2c The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation Figure 166 SNMP Management Model MANAGER SNMP AGENT AGENT Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device the VMG An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device Examples of variables include such as number of packets received node port status etc
425. t types CoS technologies include IEEE 802 1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ Differentiated Services or DS IEEE 802 1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field which replaces the eight bit ToS Type of Service field in the IP header Tagging and Marking In a QoS class you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP DiffServ Code Point value IEEE 802 1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet When the packet passes through a compatible network the networking device such as a backbone switch can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker Traffic Shaping Bursty traffic may cause network congestion Traffic shaping regulates packets to be transmitted with a pre configured data transmission rate using buffers or queues Your VMG uses the Token Bucket algorithm to allow a certain amount of large bursts while keeping a limit at the average rate Traffic Rate Traffic Rate Traffic Time Time Before Traffic Shaping After Traffic Shaping Traffic Policing Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user defined criteria Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user defined criteria and identify it as either conforming exceeding or violating the criteria Traffic Rate Traffic Rate Traffic Time Time Before Traffic Policing
426. t up shortcuts for dialing frequently used VoIP phone numbers Use the Call History Summary screen Section 23 7 on page 280 to view the summary list of received dialed and missed calls Use the Call History Outgoing screen Section 23 8 on page 281 to view detailed information for each outgoing call you made Use the Call History I ncoming screen Section 23 9 on page 282 to view detailed information for each incoming call from someone calling you You don t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your account In fact if your service provider did not supply information on a particular field in a screen it is usually best to leave it at its default setting VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 265 Chapter 23 Voice 23 1 2 What You Need to Know About VoIP VoIP VoIP stands for Voice over IP IP is the Internet Protocol which is the message carrying standard the Internet runs on So Voice over IP is the sending of voice signals speech over the Internet or another network that uses the Internet Protocol SIP SIP stands for Session Initiation Protocol SIP is a signalling standard that lets one network device like a computer or the VMG send messages to another In VoIP these messages are about phone calls over the network For example when you dial a number on your VMG it sends a SIP message over the network asking the other device the number you dialed to take part in the call SIP Accounts
427. tall Ininsta Properties Description TCP IP version The latest version of the intemet protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks cance Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen Select Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address This example shows a global address 2001 b021 2d 1000 obtained from a DHCP server C gt ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix IPv6 Address 2001 b021 2d 1000 Link local IPv6 Address fe80 25d8 dcab c80a 5189 11 IPv4 Address 172 16 100 61 Subnet Mask s avs na V ox sx 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway e80 213 49ff feaa 7125 11 172 16 100 254 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 382 Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is USER DEFI NED the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number Port s This value depends
428. ters are not allowed Password Disabled The settings in this screen are invalid if you select this None v 32 Hide SSID Enhanced Multicast Forwarding Z Guest WLAN Access Scenario External Guest Y Kbps Kbps Enable Disabled More Secure Recommended WPA2 PSK v guest123 more password unmask ok Cancel 5 Check the status of VI P and Guest in the Guest More AP screen The yellow bulbs signify that the SSIDs are active and ready for wireless access Guest WLAN 1 ZyKELO00001 Guest Mied WRAZ PSKIWPA NIA a 2 VIP Mixed WPA2 PSKAWPA External Guest 2 3 Guest Mixed Mu DR External Guest Ed 4 6 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions you may connect a router to the VMG s LAN The router may be used to separate two department networks This tutorial shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 50 Chapter 4 Tutorials In the following figure router R is connected to the VMG s LAN R connects to two networks N1 192 168 1 x 24 and N2 192 168 10 x 24 If you want to send traffic from computer A in N1 network to computer B in N2 network the traffic is sent to the VMG s WAN default gateway by default In this case B will never receive the traffic
429. ters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen 18 2 The MAC Filter Screen Use this screen to allow wireless and LAN clients access to the VMG Click Security gt MAC Filter The screen appears as shown Figure 115 Security gt MAC Filter Enable MAC Filter and add the MAC addresses of the LAN clients in your home or office to the following table if you wish to allow only them to access your network Sometimes MAC Filter is considered a method to increase the security of your network MAC Address Filter Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled MAC Restrict Mode Allow Deny Host name MAC Address B Note Only devices listed here are granted or prohibit access to the network Apply Cancel VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 233 Chapter 18 MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 Security gt MAC Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Filter Select Enable to activate the MAC filter function MAC Restrict Mode Select Allow to only permit the listed MAC addresses access to the VMG Select Deny to permit anyone access to the VMG except the listed MAC addresses Set This is the index number of the MAC address Allow Select Allow to enable the MAC filter rule The rule will not be applied if Allow is not selected Host name Enter the
430. th no servers defined your VMG filters out all incoming inquiries thus preventing intruders from probing your network For more information on IP address translation refer to RFC 1631 The IP Network Address Translator NAT VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 194 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT 11 9 3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address For outgoing packets the ILA Inside Local Address is the source address on the LAN and the IGA Inside Global Address is the source address on the WAN For incoming packets the ILA is the destination address on the LAN and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN NAT maps private local IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks It replaces the original IP source address and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload NAT mapping in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet The VMG keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored The following figure illustrates this Figure 86 How NAT Works NAT Table LAN Inside Local Inside Global IP Address IP Address WAN 192 168 1 10 IGA 1 192 168 1 13 192 168 1 11 IGA2 192 168 1 12 IGA 3 192 168 1 13 IGA 4 Inside Local Inside Global Address ILA Address IGA ae 192 168 1 10 11 9 4 NAT Applicati
431. that Client 1 supports registrar mode but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network In this case AP1 must be the registrar since it is configured it already has security information for the network AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2 Figure 47 WPS Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR EXISTING CONNECTION g Gp CLIENT 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 2 In step 3 you add another access point AP2 to your network AP2 is out of range of AP1 so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point However you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 136 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 48 WPS Example Network Step 3 EXISTING CONNECTION CLIENT 1 REGISTRAR ENROLLEE AP2 7 10 9 5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware WPS works in Infrastructure networks only where an AP and a wireless client communicate It does not work in Ad Hoc networks where there is no AP When you use WPS it works between two devices only You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously you must enroll one after the other For instance if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee by pressing the WPS
432. that you want to apply this NAT rule to Server IP Enter the inside IP address of the application here Address Application Select the category of the application from the drop down list box Category Application Select a service from the drop down list box and the VMG automatically configures the Forwarded protocol start end and map port number that define the service View Rule Click this to display the configuration of the service that you have chosen in Application Fowarded OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 186 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT 11 4 The Port Triggering Screen Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service coming in from the server on the WAN to the IP address of a computer on the client side LAN The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer you have to manually replace the LAN computer s IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer s IP address Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service The VMG records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends
433. the screen shown next UPnP State UPnP UPnP NAT T State UPnP NAT T B Note Figure 52 Network Setting gt Home Network Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a networking standard for easy network connectivity among networking devices and software that also have and enable UPnP UPnP NAT T only work when NAT is enabled ing gt UPnP ditional Subnet STB Vendo Enable Disable Enable Disabled Description IPv4 Address External Port Internal Port Protocol Bep cancel VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 146 Chapter 8 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION UPnP Select Enable to activate UPnP Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator s login screen without entering the VMG s IP address although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator UPnP NAT T Select Enable to allow UPnP enabled applications to automatically configure the VMG so that they can communicate through the VMG by using NAT traversal UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application The table below displays the NAT port forwarding rules added automatically by UPnP
434. them in the DNS Server fields in the DHCP Setup screen Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of IPCP IP Control Protocol after the connection is up If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation The VMG supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the DHCP Setup screen 8 9 4 LAN TCP IP The VMG has built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it
435. tically adjust the connection s data rate according to line conditions without interrupting service ADSL Modulation PTM over Select Enable to use PTM over ADSL Since PTM has less overhead than ATM some ISPs ADSL use this for better performance G Dmt ITU G 992 1 better known as G dmt is an ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation G dmt full rate ADSL expands the usable bandwidth of existing copper telephone lines delivering high speed data communications at rates up to 8 Mbit s downstream and 1 3 Mbit s upstream VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 96 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 12 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Advanced continued LABEL DESCRIPTION G lite ITU G 992 2 better known as G lite is an ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation G lite does not strictly require the use of DSL filters but like all variants of ADSL generally functions better with splitters T1 413 ANSI T1 413 is a technical standard that defines the requirements for the single asymmetric digital subscriber line ADSL for the interface between the telecommunications network and the customer installation in terms of their interaction and electrical characteristics ADSL2 It optionally extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates to 12 Mbit s downstream and depending on Annex version up to 3 5 Mbit s upstream with a mandatory capability of ADSL2 transceivers
436. tion keys They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them Figure 192 WPA 2 PSK Authentication PSK VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 371 Appendix B Wireless LANs Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features Table 152 Wireless Security Relational Matrix METHOD KEY Sean Ue ENTER IEEE 802 1X N METHOD MANUAL KEY j MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open None No Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Ys Diae WPA TKIP AES No Enable WPA PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable WPA2 TKIP AES No Enable WPA2 PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna which propagates the signal through the air The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2 4GHz IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 119 or 5GHz IEEE 802 11a is needed t
437. tion screen 009 Printer List IP Printing Printer s Address 192 168 1 1 Internet address or DNS name Complete and valid address C Use default queue on server Queue Name LP1 Printer Model ESP Model Name a EPSON 24 Pin Series CUPS v1 1 EPSON New Stylus Color Series CUPS v1 1 EPSON New Stylus Photo Series CUPS v1 1 EPSON Stylus Color Series CUPS v1 1 UE f Cancel add gt 13 The Name LP1 on 192 168 1 1 displays in the Printer List field The default printer Name displays in bold type 6080 Printer List ce a QG Make Default Add Delete Name diStatus LP1 on 192 168 1 1 Stylus C43 Stopped Your Macintosh print server driver setup is complete You can now use the VMG s print server to print from a Macintosh computer VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 70 PART II echnical Refer Network Map and Status Screens 5 1 Overview After you log into the Web Configurator the Network Map screen appears This shows the network connection status of the Device and clients connected to it You can use the Status screen to look at the current status of the Device system resources and interfaces LAN WAN and WLAN 5 2 The Network Map Screen Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients A warning message appears if there is a connection problem Figure 12 N
438. tion would be video conferencing Video conferencing requires real time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image s changing dynamics The VBR nRT non real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation It is commonly used for bursty traffic typical on LANs PCR and MBS define the burst levels SCR defines the minimum level An example of an VBR nRT connection would be non time sensitive data file transfers Unspecified Bit Rate UBR The Unspecified Bit Rate UBR ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers However UBR doesn t guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth An example application is background file transfer IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and default gateway Introduction to VLANs A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in th
439. tions Before you begin connect the USB storage device containing the media files you want to play to the USB port of your VMG 4 11 1 Configuring the VMG Note The Media Server feature is enabled by default To use your VMG as a media server click Network Setting Home Networking Media Server Media Server Enable Disable Interface Default v Media Library Path Imntlusb1 1 Check Enable Media Server and click Apply This enables DLNA compliant media clients to play the video music and image files in your USB storage device 4 11 2 Using Windows Media Player This section shows you how to play the media files on the USB storage device connected to your VMG using Windows Media Player USB Storage Device M ce INTERNE ZyXEL Device Computer with Windows Media Player VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 60 Chapter 4 Tutorials Windows Vista 1 Open Windows Media Player and click Library gt Media Sharing as follows E Windows Media Player Now Playing TS dd Music Library Songs Create Playlist Create Auto Playlist El gt Playlists Album ej Create Playlist Aaron Goldberg Music E Jd Library Pictures P Artist Worlds Video Album Aaron Goldberg Recorded TV d Songs C Jazz Other Genre 2006 Year Add to Libra ADDIY Media ITO Maun Changes Sei o Add Favorites to List When Dragging NN More Options Help
440. tivate the dial plan rules you specify in the text box provided See Section Enable 23 5 on page 279 for how to set up a rule Dialing Interval Selection Dialing Interval Selection Enter the number of seconds the VMG should wait after you stop dialing numbers before it makes the phone call The value depends on how quickly you dial phone numbers If you select Immediate Dial Enable you can press the pound key to tell the VMG to make the phone call immediately regardless of this setting Immediate Dial Enable Immediate Dial Enable Select this if you want to use the pound key to tell the VMG to make the phone call immediately instead of waiting the number of seconds you selected in the Dialing Interval Selection field If you select this dial the phone number and then press the pound key The VMG makes the call immediately instead of waiting You can still wait if you want Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 278 Chapter 23 Voice 23 5 The Phone Screen Use this screen to maintain settings that depend on which region of the world the VMG is in To access this screen click VolP gt Phone Figure 141 VoIP gt Phone Selecting current region where this device physically is located provides better quality of phone calls Region Settings USA NORTHAMERI
441. troubleshooting for suggestions 15 2 The File Sharing Screen Use this screen to set up file sharing through the VMG The VMG s LAN users can access the shared folder or share from the USB device inserted in the VMG To access this screen click Network Setting gt USB Service gt File Sharing Figure 100 Network Setting gt USB Service gt File Sharing File Sharing Media Server Print Server The device can share files from your USB flash drive or disk when you attach itto the USB port You may start from deciding which folders in the USB disks to share and which users can access the shared folders Server Configuration File Sharing Services Enable Disable Host Name Gateway Account Management Add New User Active Status User Name Modity Apply Cancel VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 213 Chapter 15 USB Service Each field is described in the following table Table 75 Network Setting gt USB Service gt File Sharing LABEL DESCRIPTION Information Volume This is the volume name the VMG gives to an inserted USB device Capacity This is the total available memory size in megabytes on the USB device Used Space This is the memory size in megabytes already used on the USB device Server Configura tion File Sharing Select Enable to activate file sharing through the VMG Services Host Name Enter the host name on the share
442. tup 2 1 The Quick Start Wizard appears automatically after login Or you can click the Click Start icon in the top right corner of the web configurator to open the quick start screens Select the time zone of the VMG s location and click Next Figure 9 Quick Start Welcome Welcome to Quick Start wizard The wizard will quide you through the basic settings ofthis device This will take aboutfew minutes to complete Click Nextto begin Do not automatically show this Quick Start after login Back Next Close Enter your Internet connection information in this screen The screen and fields to enter may vary depending on your current connection type Click Next Click Next VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 33 Chapter 3 Quick Start Figure 10 Quick Start Internet Connection Quick Start x Internet Connection Step 2 of 3 The current connection type is setto PPPoE and needs a user name and password to get online User Name SamPill Password Is there specific IP address information from your Internet Service Provider ISP Yes No Then the IP Address information will be dynamically assigned to you from your ISP LJ Do not automatically show this Quick Start after login Back Next Close 3 Turn the wireless LAN on or off If you keep it on record the security settings so you can configure your wireless clients to connect to the VMG Click Save Figure 11 Quick Start Wire
443. tures such as Firewall Access Control in the Scheduler Rule screen 20 2 The Scheduler Rule Screen Use this screen to view add or edit time schedule rules Click Security gt Scheduler Rule to open the following screen Figure 120 Security gt Scheduler Rule Scheduler Rules A scheduler rule is a scheduling setting and a re usable object that should be used in conjunction with other configurations Add new rule Rule Name Day Time Description Modify The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 92 Security gt Scheduler Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new rule Click this to create a new rule This is the index number of the entry Rule Name This shows the name of the rule Day This shows the day s on which this rule is enabled Time This shows the period of time on which this rule is enabled Description This shows the description of this rule Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the schedule Click the Delete icon to delete a scheduler rule Note You cannot delete a scheduler rule once it is applied to a certain feature VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 241 Chapter 20 Scheduler Rule 20 2 1 Add Edit a Schedule Click the Add button in the Scheduler Rule screen or click the Edit icon next to a schedule rule to open the following screen Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule Figure 121 Scheduler Rule Add Edit
444. twork The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR CIR and PIR values are based VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 178 Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider and client The trTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels High packet loss priority level is referred to as red medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green The trTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets Committed Burst Size CBS and Peak Burst Size PBS Tokens are generated and added into the two buckets at the CIR and PIR respectively All packets are evaluated against the PIR If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red Otherwise it is evaluated against the CIR If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow Finally if it is below the CIR then it is marked green The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in trTCM A packet arrives If the number of tokens in the PBS bucket is less than the size of the packet in bytes the packet is marked red and may be dropped regardless of the CBS bucket No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped f the PBS bucket has enough tokens the VMG checks the CBS bucket The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the si
445. ty Ltd http www zyxel co za VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 360 Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies Ad hoc Wireless LAN Configuration BSS The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent Ad hoc WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters A B C Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other they can set up an independent network which is commonly referred to as an ad hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set IBSS The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad hoc wireless LAN Figure 187 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS is disabled wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 361 Appendix B Wireless LANs ESS Figure 188 Basic Service Set R Prd a Ethernet MITT a LI IPC An Extended Service
446. u can enter to deactivate caller ID for the next call only Hidden Call Call Waiting Enter the key combinations that you can enter to turn on the call waiting function Enable Call Waiting Enter the key combinations that you can enter to turn off the call waiting function Disable IVR Enter the key combinations that you can enter to record custom caller ringing tones the sound a caller hears before you pick up the phone and on hold tones the sound someone hears when you put their call on hold IVR stands for Interactive Voice Response Internal Call Enter the key combinations that you can enter to call the phone s connected to the VMG Call Transfer Enter the key combinations that you can enter to transfer a call to another phone Unconditional Call Forward Enable Enter the key combinations that you can enter to forward all incoming calls to the phone number you specified in the SIP gt SIP Account screen Unconditional Call Forward Disable Enter the key combinations that you can enter to turn the unconditional call forward function off VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 277 Chapter 23 Voice Table 111 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider gt Add new provider Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION No Answer Call Forward Enable Enter the key combinations that you can enter to forward incoming calls to the phone number you specified in the SIP gt SIP Account screen if the
447. ua nds eame Ii v E te ei 99 har Technical RTN aus iverxixpidt uve pt Ogre ape a ra b qe bad daa a esa etia t bag aranea 100 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 6 Table of Contents Chapter 7 MARIE GIGS RU TE 107 RN ERN T T T TM 107 441 What You Can Doin this Chapter sc ccssrzeceraedieasesrcdsasdean igestocesingerteceriieerscesnsteanscashaemverrestienneess 107 i2 What T Need tw RION MSN EU 108 Le The General Scream anna NNE 108 TANIE 1G a A 110 Ta BASE WEP TUN crete anes Seance cree apos ata dati a a E a ER 111 T 23 More Secure WPA 2 PSK sccescsetactisantsscisaaenstgachavesscscnasqurpacinades E Ea E E 113 7 3 Ihe Guest More AP SCICON 2i eec ie taii n aA E RR M EAR EA PAR A ERE Fax AERA A A 114 La Edi Guest More AP pcc 115 rr Uu CE ui et er T 117 TENPO vic MT ET Tes ed bah vid aides UMS ROUTER 118 FECE ADEST mmm 119 Tr e WOS SEER 120 TEED SE CANDY Mt rS TEENS 122 TA Mhe AES SrCe UTE 122 1 9 The Channel Status SOFBBFI ck cence LE RR Dr eC t eae eb do doc RS 124 1 19 Technical PORES OS Lions E PIPER a R E ERO accented ania eae M RR AERA 125 404 Wireless Network QUOFVIGW iine suevieni ae cer decir seus neus ria rv Vua YU sacs terse does eats veo EEE dan EE Fede REB 125 20 2 Additional Wireless TEMS sirsenis aeania FAC a od Kurt cea GbR IR Ka ua up sso 127 110 8 IIIS a SS OVEN qc ER 127 repe eo ues c Ed 129 RA iia t ven INR E D OT A EN ER 130 pese ege c
448. ublic key 243 replacing 244 storage space 244 Certification Authority 243 Certification Authority see CA certifications 387 notices 387 CFI 104 CFM 340 CCMs 340 link trace test 340 loopback test 340 MA 340 MD 340 MEP 340 MIP 340 channel 363 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 391 Index interference 363 channel wireless LAN 126 Class of Service 290 Class of Service see CoS client list 144 client server protocol 284 comfort noise generation 289 compatibility WDS 120 configuration backup 337 firewalls 225 reset 338 restoring 338 static route 99 156 158 200 Connectivity Check Messages see CCMs contact information 355 copyright 387 CoS 176 290 CoS technologies 164 creating certificates 244 CTS Clear to Send 364 CTS threshold 123 127 customer support 355 D data fragment threshold 123 127 DDoS 224 default server address 190 Denials of Service see DoS DH 264 DHCP 140 152 differentiated services 291 Differentiated Services see DiffServ 176 Diffie Hellman key groups 264 DiffServ 176 marking rule 176 DiffServ Differentiated Services 290 code points 290 marking rule 291 digital IDs 243 disclaimer 387 DLNA 215 DMZ 189 DNS 140 153 DNS server address assignment 104 Domain Name 196 Domain Name System see DNS Domain Name System See DNS DoS 224 DS field 176 291 DS dee differentiated services DSCP 176 290 dynamic DNS 199 wildcard 200 Dynamic Host Configuratio
449. ul 7 10 9 2 PIN Configuration Each WPS enabled device has its own PIN Personal Identification Number This may either be static it cannot be changed or dynamic in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface Use the PIN method instead of the push button configuration PBC method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other However you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method When you use the PIN method you must enter the PIN from one device usually the wireless client into the second device usually the Access Point or wireless router Then when WPS is activated on the first device it presents its PIN to the second device If the PIN matches one device sends the network and security information to the other allowing it to join the network Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router referred to here as the AP and a client device using the PIN method 1 Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices 2 Access the WPS section of the AP s configuration interface See the device s User s Guide for how to do this VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 132 Chapter 7 Wireless Look for the client s WPS PIN it will be displayed either on the device or in the WPS
450. unt is already registered with the SIP server You can use it to make a VoIP call Service Provider This column displays the service provider name and SIP number for each SIP account URI This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account You can change these in the VoIP gt SIP screens VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 71 Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 78 6 1 Overview Broadband This chapter discusses the VMG s Broadband screens Use these screens to configure your VMG for Internet access A WAN Wide Area Network connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet It connects your private networks such as a LAN Local Area Network and other networks so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations Figure 15 LAN and WAN 6 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Broadband screen to view remove or add a WAN interface You can also configure the WAN settings on the VMG for Internet access Section 6 2 on page 83 Use the Advanced screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL Annex M Annex J and DSL PhyR functions Section 6 4 on page 95 Use the Ethernet WAN screen to convert LAN port number four as a WAN port or restore the WAN to a LAN port This is for Ethernet connection Table 6 WAN Setup Overview INTERNEJ eD
451. upplementary services by using the flash key 23 10 2 2 Europe Type Supplementary Phone Services This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the Europe Type Call Service Mode Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below After pressing the flash key if you do not issue the sub command before the default sub command timeout 2 seconds expires or issue an invalid sub command the current operation will be aborted Table 120 European Flash Key Commands COMMAND SUB COMMAND DESCRIPTION Flash Put a current call on hold to place a second call Switch back to the call if there is no second call Flash 0 Drop the call presently on hold or reject an incoming call which is waiting for answer Flash 1 Disconnect the current phone connection and answer the incoming call or resume with caller presently on hold Flash 2 1 Switch back and forth between two calls 2 Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call 3 Separate the current three way conference call into two individual calls one is on line the other is on hold Flash 3 Create three way conference connection Flash 98 Transfer the call to another phone European Call Hold Call hold allows you to put a call A on hold by pressing the flash key If you have another call press the flash key and then 2 to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hol
452. ur network play media files located in the shares Interface Select an interface on which you want to enable the media server function Media Library Enter the path clients use to access the media files on a USB storage device connected to Path the VMG Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 15 4 Print Server The VMG allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN You can do this by connecting a USB printer to one of the USB ports on the VMG and then configuring a TCP IP port on the computers connected to your network 15 4 1 Before You Begin To configure the print server you need the following Your VMG must be connected to your computer and any other devices on your network The USB printer must be connected to your VMG A USB printer with the driver already installed on your computer The computers on your network must have the printer software already installed before they can create a TCP IP port for printing via the network Follow your printer manufacturers instructions on how to install the printer software on your computer Note Your printer s installation instructions may ask that you connect the printer to your computer Connect your printer to the VMG instead VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 216 Chapter 15 USB Service 15 4 2 The Print Server Screen Use this screen to enable or disable sharing of a USB pr
453. uter Once your VMG is configured and functioning properly it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings Click Backup to save the VMG s current configuration to your computer VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 337 Chapter 38 Configuration Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your VMG Table 145 Restore Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click this to find the file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed ZIP files before you can upload them Upload Click this to begin the upload process Do not turn off the VMG while configuration file upload is in progress After the VMG configuration has been restored successfully the login screen appears Login again to restart the VMG The VMG automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 178 Network Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address o
454. uters because the NAT router changes the header of the IPSec packet NAT traversal solves the problem by adding a UDP port 500 header to the IPSec packet The NAT router forwards the IPSec packet with the UDP port 500 header unchanged In the above figure when IPSec router A tries to establish an IKE SA IPSec router B checks the UDP port 500 header and IPSec routers A and B build the IKE SA For NAT traversal to work you must Use ESP security protocol in either transport or tunnel mode Use IKE keying mode Enable NAT traversal on both IPSec endpoints Set the NAT router to forward UDP port 500 to IPSec router A Finally NAT is compatible with ESP in tunnel mode because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the original header plus original payload which is unchanged by a NAT device The compatibility of AH and ESP with NAT in tunnel and transport modes is summarized in the following table Table 104 VPN and NAT SECURITY PROTOCOL MODE NAT AH Transport N AH Tunnel N ESP Transport Y ESP Tunnel Y Y This is supported in the VMG if you enable NAT traversal 22 4 7 ID Type and Content With aggressive negotiation mode see Section 22 4 4 on page 261 the VMG identifies incoming SAs by ID type and content since this identifying information is not encrypted This enables the VMG to distinguish between multiple rules for SAs that connect from remote IPSec routers that hav
455. v6 It is derived from the 48 bit 6 byte Ethernet MAC address as shown next EUI 64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and fourth bytes of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC address See the following example MAC 00 13 49 12 34 56 EUI 64 02 13 49 BENED e 34 56 Identity Association An Identity Association IA is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client through which the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses Each IA must be associated with exactly one interface The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration from a DHCP server for that interface Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information The IA type is the type of address in the IA Each IA holds one type of address IA NA means an identity association for non temporary addresses and IA TA is an identity association for temporary addresses An IA NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields but an IA TA option does not The DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA NA before the lifetimes expire After T1 the client sends the server S1 from which the addresses in the IA NA were obtained a Renew message If VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 377 Appendix C IPv6 the time T2 is reached and the server does
456. vates the VoIP service when any LAN or WAN connection is up If you select Multi_WAN you also need to select two or more pre configured WAN interfaces The VoIP service is activated only when one of the selected WAN connections is up Outbound Proxy Outbound Proxy Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP outbound proxy server if your VolP service provider has a SIP outbound server to handle voice calls This allows the VMG to work with any type of NAT router and eliminates the need for STUN or a SIP ALG Turn off any SIP ALG on a NAT router in front of the VMG to keep it from re translating the IP address since this is already handled by the outbound proxy server Outbound Enter the SIP outbound proxy server s listening port if your VoIP service provider gave you Proxy Port one Otherwise keep the default value RTP Port Range Start Port Enter the listening port number s for RTP traffic if your VolP service provider gave you this ERES information Otherwise keep the default values nd Por To enter one port number enter the port number in the Start Port and End Port fields To enter a range of ports enter the port number at the beginning of the range in the Start Port field enter the port number at the end of the range in the End Port field SRTP Support SRTP Support When you make a VolP call using SIP the Real time Transport Protocol RTP is used to handle voice data trans
457. ve a RADIUS server Therefore there is no authentication Suppose the wireless network has two devices Device A only supports WEP and device B supports WEP and WPA Therefore you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network Note It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption The other types of encryption are better than none at all but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly When you select WPA2 or WPA2 PSK in your VMG you can also select an option WPA compatible to support WPA as well In this case if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2 you should set up WPA2 PSK or WPA2 depending on the type of wireless network login and select the WPA compatible option in the VMG Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network The longer the key the stronger the encryption Every device in the wireless network must have the same key 7 10 4 Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks their signals are subject to limitations of distance interference and absorption Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal Interference may come from other radio transmissions such as military or air traffic control communications or from machines that are coincidental e
458. ve the grouping and add the ungrouped interfaces to the Default group Only the default group has IP interface Add New Interface Group Group Name WAN Interface LAN Interfaces Default eth3 1 pppo3G0 ppp1 1 LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 ZyXELOD The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 72 Network Setting gt Interface Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New Click this button to create a new interface group Interface Group Group Name This shows the descriptive name of the group WAN Interface This shows the WAN interfaces in the group LAN Interfaces This shows the LAN interfaces in the group Criteria This shows the filtering criteria for the group Modify Click the Delete icon to remove the group Add Click this button to create a new group 14 2 1 Interface Group Configuration Click the Add New Interface Group button in the Interface Group screen to open the following screen Use this screen to create a new interface group Note An interface can belong to only one group at a time VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 206 Chapter 14 Interface Group Figure 97 Interface Group Configuration Group Name WAN Interfaces used in the grouping Interface Group Configuration Add B Note PTM type None VDSL ppp1 1 eth3G eth3G pppo3G pppo3G0 ATM type None eth3G eth3G pppo3G pppo3G0 ETH type
459. ved and can not be assigned to a multicast group Table 155 Reserved Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS FF00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF02 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF03 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF04 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF06 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF07 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 376 Appendix C IPv6 Table 155 Reserved Multicast Address continued MULTICAST ADDRESS FF08 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF09 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FFOE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FFOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Subnet Masking Interface EUI 64 Both an IPv6 address and Pv6 subnet mask compose of 128 bit binary digits which are divided into eight 16 bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character 1 10 A F Each block s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters For example FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FC00 0000 0000 0000 ID In IPv6 an interface ID is a 64 bit identifier It identifies a physical interface for example an Ethernet port or a virtual interface for example the management IP address for a VLAN One interface should have a unique interface ID The EUI 64 Extended Unique Identifier defined by the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IP
460. very Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen Use this screen to view your VMG s MAC filter settings and add new MAC filter rules Click Network Setting gt Wireless gt MAC Authentication The screen appears as shown Figure 34 Wireless gt MAC Authentication MAC Authentication can allow or block the access of the device s to your wireless network Edit the list in the table to decide the rule of the access on device s General SSID ZyXELO00001_Guesti v MAC Restrict Mode Disabled Allow Deny MAC address List Add new MAC address MAC Address Modify B Notes Note If mode of first SSID allow is choosed and MAC listis empty WPS will be disabled Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 Wireless gt MAC Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION SSID MAC Restrict Mode Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filter settings Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table Select Disable to turn off MAC filtering Select Deny to block access to the VMG MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the VMG Select Allow to permit access to the VMG MAC addresses
461. with Using the Library Jazz 2005 2 Check Find media that others are sharing in the following screen and click OK Media Sharing L2 x Find and share music pictures and video on your network Leam about sharing Online jv En Share my media d Your network Network is a private network Devices that you allow can ed media WM find your shar Networking How does sharing change firewall settings Loe ce 3 Inthe Library screen check the left panel The Windows Media Player should detect the VMG VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 61 Chapter 4 Tutorials ial Windows Media Player Now Playing jd Music VMG1312 3 jk Playlists a ej Create Playist Primary Views 3 JI Library M Artist e Sf a 9 Album j a y gt awe J Songs Artist Album Songs Genre Year Genre 3 Year A chen Additional Views E A 4 D Contributing Composer Parental Online Stores Artist Rating The VMG displays as a playlist Clicking on the category icons in the right panel shows you the media files in the USB storage device attached to your VMG Windows 7 Open Windows Media Player It should automatically detect the VMG O Windows Media Player File View Play Tools Help QUO VMG1312 Organize v Stream v Create playlist v E Library e Playlists fi is am gt 4 JJ Music Music Videos Pictures Recorded TV Playlists JJ
462. word WEP key for data transmission If you chose 64 bit WEP then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F If you chose 128 bit WEP then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F You must configure at least one password only one password can be activated at any one time more less Click more to show more fields in this section Click less to hide them WEP Encryption Select 64 bits or 128 bits This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 112 Chapter 7 Wireless 7 2 3 More Secure WPA 2 PSK The WPA PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over WEP Using a Pre Shared Key PSK both the VMG and the connecting client share a common password in order to validate the connection This type of encryption while robust is not as strong as WPA WPA2 or even WPA2 PSK The WPA2 PSK security mode is a newer more robust version of the WPA encryption standard It offers slightly better security although the use of PSK makes it less robust than it could be Click Network Setting gt Wireless to display the General screen Select More Secure as the security level Then select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the Security Mode list Figure 31 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 PSK Security Level More Secure Recommended
463. work The VMG generates a global IPv6 prefix from its IPv4 WAN address and tunnels IPv6 traffic to the ISP s Border Relay router BR in the figure to connect to the native IPv6 Internet The local network can also use IPv4 services The VMG uses it s configured IPv4 WAN IP to route IPv4 traffic to the Pv4 Internet VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 81 Chapter 6 Broadband Figure 16 Pv6 Rapid Deployment LAN WAN Pv6 Pv4 IPv4 Pv6 in IPv4 EL ISP IPv4 BR IPv6 in IPv4 IPv6 Internet IPv6 iPv4 Km Mg A IPv4 e E IPv4 Internet Dual Stack Lite Use Dual Stack Lite when local network computers use IPv4 and the ISP has an IPv6 network When the VMG has an IPv6 WAN address and you set I Pv6 IPv4 Mode to IPv6 Only you can enable Dual Stack Lite to use IPv4 computers and services The VMG tunnels IPv4 packets inside IPv6 encapsulation packets to the ISP s Address Family Transition Router AFTR in the graphic to connect to the IPv4 Internet The local network can also use IPv6 services The VMG uses it s configured IPv6 WAN IP to route IPv6 traffic to the IPv6 nternet Figure 17 Dual Stack Lite LAN WAN IPv6 IPv6 Pv4 IPv4 in IPv6 L ISP IPv6 I Pv6 Internet IPv6 1Pv4 ee eee IPv4 Internet 6 1 3 Before You Begin You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address Get this information from your ISP VMG
464. ws Media Player The Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is a group of personal computer and electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home network The VMG media server enables you to Publish all shares for everyone to play media files in the USB storage device connected to the VMG Use hardware based media clients like the DMA 2500 to play the files Note Anyone on your network can play the media files in the published shares No user name and password or other form of security is used The media server is enabled by default with the video photo and music shares published To change your VMG s media server settings click Network Setting USB Service Media Server The screen appears as shown VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 215 Chapter 15 USB Service Figure 102 Network Setting gt USB Service gt Media Server If you would like to play any media contents stored in a USB flash drive or disk through a media client like PS3 attach the USB flash drive or disk onto this device and enable the Media Server function Media Server Enable Disable Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 77 Network Setting gt USB Service gt Media Server LABEL DESCRIPTION Media Server Select Enable to have the VMG function as a DLNA compliant media server Enable the media server to let DLNA compliant media clients on yo
465. xchange information with one another A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios attached to other computers Like walkie talkies most wireless networking devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to use However wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data encryption Finding Out More See Section 7 10 on page 125 for advanced technical information on wireless networks 7 2 The General Screen Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode Note If you are configuring the VMG from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the VMG s SSID channel or security settings you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the VMG s new settings Click Network Setting gt Wireless to open the General screen VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 108 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 28 Network Setting gt Wireless gt General Wireless Network Setup Band 2 4GHz Y Wireless Enable Disabled settings are invalid when disabled Channel Auto Y Current 12 more Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name SSID
466. ximum bandwidth of WAN to this SSID 3 If Max Upstream Downstream Bandwidth is empty the CPE sets the value automatically E mail notification when the wireless guest visit Enable Email Notification SSID Subnet Enable Disabled Security Level More Secure Recommended gt eS Security Mode WPA2 PSK v Generate password automatically Enter 8 63 characters a z A Z 0 9 and other characters are not allowed Password 12345678 more password unmask In the Guest More AP screen click the Edit icon to configure the third wireless network group Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 49 Chapter 4 Tutorials Wireless Network Setup Wireless Passphrase Type Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name SSID Max clients Max Upstream Bandwidth Max Downstream Bandwidth Notes Enable Email Notification SSID Subnet Security Level amp gt 1 Max Upstream Bandwidth This field allow user configure the maximum bandwidth of this SSID to WAN 2 Max Downstream Bandwidth This field allow user configure the maximum bandwidth of WAN to this SSID 3 If Max Upstream Downstream Bandwidth is empty the CPE sets the value automatically E mail notification when the wireless guest visit Security Mode Generate password automatically Enter 8 63 characters a z A Z 0 9 and other charac
467. y and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 123 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY 0 Emergency The system is unusable 1 Alert Action must be taken immediately 2 Critical The system condition is critical 3 Error There is an error condition on the system 4 Warning There is a warning condition on the system VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 297 Chapter 24 Log Table 123 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY 5 Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system 6 Informational The syslog contains an informational message 7 Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes 24 2 The System Log Screen Use the System Log screen to see the system logs Click System Monitor gt Log to open the System Log screen Figure 151 System Monitor gt Log gt System Log results All system events will be logged and displayed in the following table Select a level from the pull down menu to show filtered Level Error v Category All v Clear Log Refresh Export Log Email Log Now Time Facility Level Messages The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 124 System Monitor gt Log gt System Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Level Select a
468. ynamic Static DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 Tunnel Enable 6RD Enable Disable 6RD Type DHCP Static IPv4 Mask Length 6RD Border Relay Server IP BRD IPv6 Prefix VLAN Active 802 1p iY 802 19 0 4094 Qos Rate Limit kbps WAN Outgoing Default Tag Enable Disable DSCP 0 63 MTU MTU Size 1492 MTU 68 1492 Bridge and Routing mode in the same WAN Enable Con current WAN Apply Cancel VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 85 Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Add New WAN Interface Edit Routing Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION General Active Select this to enable the interface Name Specify a descriptive name for this connection Type Select whether it is an ADSL VDSL over PTM ADSL over ATM connection or Ethernet Mode Select Routing if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop down list box This option is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field The choices depend on the connection type you selected If your connection type is ADSL VDSL over PTM the choices are PPPoE and I PoE If your connection type is ADSL over ATM the choices are PPPoE PPPOA I PoE and IPoA IPv6 IPv4 Mode Select IPv4 Only if you want the Device t
469. your pre shared key in this field A pre shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation Type from 8 to 31 case sensitive ASCII characters or from 16 to 62 hexadecimal 0 9 A F characters You must precede a hexadecimal key with a Ox zero x which is not counted as part of the 16 to 62 character range for the key For example in 0x0123456789ABCDEF Ox denotes that the key is hexadecimal and 0123456789ABCDEF is the key itself Local ID Type Select IP to identify the VMG by its IP address Select E mail to identify this VMG by an e mail address Select DNS to identify this VMG by a domain name Select ASN1DN Abstract Syntax Notation one Distinguished Name to this VMG by the subject field in a certificate This is used only with certificate based authentication VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 254 Chapter 22 VPN Table 101 Security gt IPSec VPN Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Local ID Content When you select IP in the Local ID Type field type the IP address of your computer in this field If you configure this field to 0 0 0 0 or leave it blank the VMG automatically uses the Pre Shared Key refer to the Pre Shared Key field description It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0 0 0 0 in this field or use the DNS or E mail type in the following situations e When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers W
470. ys what percentage of the VMG s memory is currently used Usually this percentage should not increase much If memory usage does get close to 10096 the VMG is probably becoming unstable and you should restart the device See Section 38 2 on page 337 or turn off the device unplug the power for a few seconds NAT Session Usage This field displays what percentage of the VMG supported NAT sessions are currently being used Interface Status Interface This column displays each interface the VMG has Status This field indicates the interface s use status For the DSL interface this field displays Down line down Up line up or connected and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE encapsulation For the Ethernet WAN and LAN interface this field displays Up when using the interface and NoLink when not using the interface For the WLAN interface this field displays the enabled Active or disabled InActive state of the interface For the 3G USB interface this field displays Up when using the interface and NoDevice when no device is detected in any USB slot Rate For the Ethernet WAN and LAN interface this displays the port speed and duplex setting For the DSL interface it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate For the WLAN interface it displays the maximum transmission rate or N A with WLAN disabled For the 3G USB interface this field displays Up when a 3G USB device is installed in a USB
471. ze of the packet in bytes Otherwise the packet is marked yellow VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 179 Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS VMG5313 B10A B30A Series User s Guide 180 Network Address Translation NAT 11 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the VMG NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network 11 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Port Forwarding screen to configure forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network Section 11 2 on page 182 Use the Applications screen to forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network Section 11 3 on page 185 Use the Port Triggering screen to add and configure the VMG s trigger port settings Section 11 4 on page 187 Use the DMZ screen to configure a default server Section 11 5 on page 189 Use the ALG screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP VoIP ALG in the VMG Section 11 6 on page 190 Use the Address Mapping screen to configure the VMG s address mapping settings Section 11 7 on page 191 Use the Sessions screen to configure the VMG s maximum number of NAT sessions Section 11 7 on page 191 11 1 2 What You Need To Know Inside Outside Inside

ZyXEL VMG5313-B10A/ User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents